HomeMy WebLinkAboutProject Manual For Augusta Utilities Water System Improvements
Augusta Richmond GA
DOCUMENT NAME;?~ec:+ '(Y\Clr'ILO..\ -tOe-- PuQu.'6-k" utI \ ;-\-\ e~
~er 'BYO\--e0' \0r\0DV~(\\7)
DOCUMENT TYPE:
YEAR: q ~
BOX NUMBER: ~
FILE NUMBER: \ Y 66t
NUMBER OF PAGES: d=I J
I-
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
/155 'i
PROJECT MANUAL
FOR
AUGUSTA UTILITIES WATER SYSTEM IMPROVEMENTS
MORGAN ROAD GROUND STORAGE TANK & PUMP STATION
Augusta, Georgia
Prepared for
AUGUSTA UTILITIES
Prepared by
Cranston, Robertson & Whitehurst, P.C.
ENGINEERS - PLANNERS - SURVEYORS
452 Ellis Street - P.O. Box 2546
Augusta, Georgia 30903
\
./
September 28,1999
99-234.31
,'"
....
.....
....7
,
~g~~~~~"'~~!iljl~_. .........mm..
ONLY AND CONFERS NO RIGHTS UPON THE CERTIFICATE
I SIn sur a nee S e r vie e s. In c . HOLDER. THIS CERTIFICATE DOES NOT AMEND. EXTEND OR
1900 Wi nston Road. Sui te 100 ALTER THE COVERAGE AFFORDED BY THE POLICIES BELOW.
P.O. Box 10328 COMPANIES AFFORDING COVERAGE
K n 0 x vi 11 e . TN 37939 - 0 3 2 8 COMPANY T r a v e 1 e r s
Attn: Me1 i ssa Sti 1 es Ext: A
. .....
DATE (MMfDDfYY)
12/16/1999
) S Har~n Company
P.O. Box 450
Athens. TN 37371-0450
COMPANY
B
COMPANY
C
COMPANY
D
'1!~s 'fo:b~:~~i~~:~~'!~.~~~ ~~::;~'I:~:'6:F';~:~G}ftN2fGg+~:8:~:~LOWH;~~:~:~:~~"i:g'~UEDT~:::+~'~';~~G~k:6':~i~~6AB60~'~OR:+!:~::~'~ti2~"~:~R',66""
INDICATED. NOTWITHSTANDING ANY REQUIREMENT. TERM OR CONDITION OF ANY CONTRACT OR OTHER DOCUMENT WITH RESPECT TO WHICH THIS
CERTIFICATE MAY BE ISSUED OR MAY PERTAIN, THE INSURANCE AFFORDED BY THE POLICIES DESCRIBED HEREIN IS SUBJECT TO ALL THE TERMS,
EXCLUSIONS AND CONDITIONS OF SUCH POLICIES. LIMITS SHOWN MAY HAVE BEEN REDUCED BY PAID CLAIMS.
CO
LTR
TYPE OF INSURANCE
POLICY NUMBER
POLICY EFFECTIVE POLICY EXPIRATION
DATE (MMIDDfYY) DATE (MM/DDfYY)
LIMITS
GENERAL LIABILITY
GENERAL AGGREGATE $
PRODUCTS - COMP/OP AGG $
-CO-399N1671-99
11/15/1999
11/15/2000
EACH OCCURRENCE
$
....?!.9.9.~.!..00 0
.2..!.9~~,.000
$ .......~.~..~9.9.....000..
.~.....()09....0.()0.
.....~.q.().!..09Cl.
5,000
A
CLAIMS MADE X OCCUR
OWNER'S & CONTRACTOR'S PROT
PERSONAL & ADV INJURY
FIRE DAMAGE (Anyone fire)
$
MED EXP (Anyone person)
$
X ANY AUTO
ALL OWNED AUTOS
SCHEDULED AUTOS
A -810-399N1671-TIL-99
X HIRED AUTOS
X NON-OWNED AUTOS
COMBINED SINGLE LIMIT
00
AUTOMOBILE LIABILITY
GARAGE LIABILITY
ANY AUTO
BODILY INJURY $
(Per person)
11/15/1999 11/15/2000
BODILY INJURY $
(Per accident)
PROPERTY DAMAGE $
AUTO ONLY - EA ACCIDENT $
OTHER THAN AUTO ONLY:
EACH $
EXCESS LIABILITY
A X UMBRELLA FORM ~ U P 3 9 9 N 16 71- 9 9
OTHER THAN UMBRELLA FORM
WORKERS COMPENSATION AND
EMPLOYERS' LIABILITY
$
.~~~.?~~.~.~RENCE ........:..$.....JCl.....0.0.9.....0 0 0
11/15/1999 11/15/2000~~(3~~~.~T.E....................: $.... ..10.. ()OO.., 000
:$
A
inUB337K3034-99
INCL :
EXCLi
11/15/1999
11/15/2000
EL DISEASE - POLICY LIMIT
EL DISEASE- EA EMPLOYEE
THE PROPRIETOR!
PARTNERS/EXECUTIVE
OFFICERS ARE:
:' OTHER
~LANKET BUILDERS
.A ~ISK/INSTALLATION
:FLOATER
PER JOB SITE:
$4.000,000
~T660337K2639-99
11/15/1999
11/15/2000
OFF PREMISES STORAGE: $100,000
TRANSIT:
$100,000
DESCRIPTION OF OPERA TlONS/LOCA TlONSNEHICLES/SPECIAL ITEMS
ROJECT: MORGAN ROAD GROUND STORAGE TANK & PUMP STATION. AUGUSTA. GA
:BF5n~~tFt~8P.?:e~!::f:::::::::::):)::::)::.:.'::,:.,:,..
...........:...........:.:.::;:...:::::::::;:::::
.' :: ...~IllC~l;I#\::nON .:" ':::' ::"'/':::':"::::;::.': .::. ::.:::...: :...:.: :..... '" ,. . .............. .......:.., ..:' .... ...
SHOULD ANY OF THE ABOVE DESCRIBED POLICIES BE CANCELLED BEFORE THE.
EXPIRATION DATE THEREOF, THE ISSUING COMPANY WILL ENDEAVOR TO MAIL
--1...S....- DAYS WRITTEN NOTICE TO THE CERTIFICATE HOLDER NAMED TO THE LEFT.
BUT FAILURE TO MAIL SUCH NOTICE SHALL IMPOSE NO OBLIGATION OR LIABILITY
AUGUSTA COMMISSION
360 BAY STREET, #240
AUGUSTA. GA 30901
OF ANY KIND UPON THE COMPANY. ITS AGENTS OR REPRESENTA TlVES.
AUTHORIZED REPRESENTATIVE
t/Jlk-
'ACQRQ"2:5;;;S"oT.1'l95~""""""':"""':':::"":""":':',',',',:,',',',',',',',',',',',',',',',',',',',','"""""""""""':':':':':"""":""',"',','"",:,',',:,':',:,',
:;:::;:::::::;:::;:;:::;:::::/i:::::::;::;;;::::::}:::i:::::::::;:r;i:;:i{{{:i;}i;i:i:i{:i:i{:fi:f~{:~:?i:;:rrrri:i:i:;:i:i:;:i:~:;:~:~:i:~:~:;:~:~;;:i:~:;:i:i:;:;:~:i:i{:i;~:i:i:ri:~;
. .... ... ... . . . . . . .. ........ ...........
Cons t ru c t i o.~....P.~...v ./MEL IS S
..........,:;::,:;:::::>::.:::::::::::::::::::,::::::::::: .. . ....... .......:...:::::r;:::~9Sm:Bi8:8~:~:m~T'ON::t968
".
'"::;---:'-.~'
y ~
bee
RfJ
<i(6! ., i.99.9
~,.y~fi'
Kif COi'
" i/4!:,(
,. "'Vli~,
l, ~7'
--..-.:
~;.-7":l'"
. ,._,
-::...~~.
~. \.;,' r
~~~ ')
~ (' ~ ~.
(,
. I'. i ~
-----'--
..".
'\
),......
.:.. .\
. ~ '. ~ -'
-. '1'"
,
> r: .'"
"',0'."
..:....:\...1,.;'
~,;.;; :. =..:::.~.');....,
- ,
---
';-T;
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Morgan Road Ground storage Tank and Pump Station
Augusta-Richmond County Bid Item No. 99-130
Post Bid Addendum No.2
December 15, 1999
Page 1 of 1
Revisions to the Plans:
Sheet Cl-2: Add the following General Note No. 13.
A preconstruction conference shall be held with the City Engineer or his
designated representative prior to beginning construction. This meeting
shall be scheduled with the Department (~lPublic Works at the time the
not~fication of work commencement is given.
Sheet CI-2: Change the phone number in Roadway Note No.8 to 821-1706.
Sheet C2-1: Change the pond outlet pipe from c.P.P. to R.C.P. with O-ring gaskets.
Sheet C2-2 Add a Rip Rap Filter Berm around the pond outlet structure.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Morgan Road Ground storage Tank and Pump Station
Augusta-Richmond County Bid Item No. 99-130
Addendum No.1
November 24, 1999
Page 1 of 3
Revisions to the Contract Documents:
Section GC-26:
Section 02510:
Delete Paragraph 2 in its entirety.
Add the following Paragraph:
2.15 YARD HYDRANTS:
A.
Section 02510:
Section 11500:
2.1
Section 11500:
2.1
2.1
2.2
2.3
Yard hydrants shall be frost proof, suitable for 3/4" hose
connection and shall be equal in all respects to a Simmons Model
803.
Revise Paragraph 2.3.B to include ANSI A21.53 and A WW A
C153 as an alternative to ANSI A21.10 and AWWA CliO.
Revise Paragraph 2.1.A to read as follows:
A.
The contractor shall furnish and install, as shown on the plans and
specified herein, two (2) horizontal spilt case mechanical seal
pumps capable of delivering the flows specified hereinafter.
Add the following Paragraphs:
E.
Pump motors shall be EPACT motors with a 1.15 service factor.
F.
Pumps shall be as manufactured by Peerless Pump Company,
Goulds Pumps, Inc., Fairbanks Morse Pump Corporation or equal.
C.
Pumps shall have a minimum efficiency of 83% at the design point
of 2,317 gpm.
c.
Pump Motor Starters shall be as manufactured by Allen Bradley,
Cutler Hammer, General Electric, Square 0 or equal.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Morgan Road Ground storage Tank and Pump Station
Augusta-Richmond County Bid Item No. 99-130
Addendum No.1
November 24, 1999
Page 2 of 3
2.6 AIR RELEASE VALVE:
A.
Each pump shall be supplied with an air release valve of suitable
size for the operating conditions. Pumps shall be tapped for
installation of air release valves.
Section 11500:
Revise Paragraph 3.3.A to read as follows:
3.3
A.
All equipment and appurtenances shall be shop primed by the
manufacturer and field painted in accordance with Section 09900
and the manufacturer's recommendations.
Section 11500:
In Paragraph 3.5.A delete the reference "for each pump supplied'
at the end of the first sentence and replace with "and one (1) set of
replacement bearings".
Revisions to the Plans:
Sheet C5-1: Replace the Air Release Valve detail with the enclosed revised detail.
Sheet CS-l: Add the enclosed Wooden Privacy Fence detail.
Sheet S-I: Add the following note to the Steel Notes:
13. Bar grating shall be type B, size 12 aluminum grating as manufactured by
IKG Borden or equal.
Sheet S-4: Add the enclosed Entry Roof Section as well as details "A" and "B" for
the Roof at the entry to the building.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Morgan Road Ground storage Tank and Pump Station
Augusta-Richmond County Bid Item No. 99-130
Addendum No.1
November 24, 1999
Page 3 of 3
Sheet E-1: Add two (2) duplex GFI receptacles at the concrete pedestal shown.
Homerun shall be 4 - #12's circuits LEM-8,1O. Receptacles serve battery
charger and jacket heater on GENSET.
Sheet E-2: Change A.Le. rating at panels MDP, LA, HA and LEM to 22,000 A.I.C.
1" AIR RELEASE VALVE\
APCO MODEL NO. 200A
OR EQUAL.
~ ~1" BRONZE GATE VALVE
1" UNION ~
1" GALVANIZED NIPPLE
1" TAPPING SLEEVE AND
CORPORATION STOP
AIR RELEASE VALVE
N.T.S.
I
I
I
4 X 4 P T POSTS
@
8'-0" O.C. 1 X 8 P.T. 2 X 4 P.T. RAILS
r PICKETS (TYP. ) 3 EA. CONTINUOUS
7
-
II II
I
II II
I
II II
"<of ill' I 'milllI lillm' 1'1111'111
=rrT:::::j-n 111=III:::::jlT=
:; . , .. . . .. . . ,
. . . .. ~.' , ~4 .
. " , " .' . '.
, ~ . "
. . , . .
. .
Q . .
'~ ... ..~ . ' .,~ . .' .. ,
.
........ " . "
. . .,
. J :p . /~ '-;- . .
. . . .
. :,. Z'
4 W-' . " ,
. 2:>.
, .. . " . . ,. "
10
.
W
f.-1
CD
f.-1
10
b
N
16"r<'
(TYP)
.1
3000 PSI CONCRETE
(TYP)
WOODEN PRIVACY FENCE
N.T.S.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
/
(
.
o
I
....
....
SPLIT FACE BLOCK
SEE DETAIL "A"
/
/
SEE DETAJ
18" OVERHANG ON
4" CONCRETE
SIDEWALK
lTYPl
~
~
.' =' -:' ':-'..~ .:' ~;. .:: ':.'..: ~ :"~ :. ~',:' ~~. ',~:. ~.:.;.". ~.<..::' ':.. .~ ~." ~ . . .: '''':.: :.: " .... i. ':" ~.
..... '. ....'..:.....:.~.:.~...~:~~. .~~~.::~..:.-:I:. ':. .~~..~ ,': ....:::.~ ....1.
<:,
.1
....
".:' -'...
.~. ."\
. ..... .....'
. .
.'}' .;.~.
5' -10"
ENTRY ROOF SECTION
NOT TO SCALE
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
SPLIT FACE BLOCK
~I
2- 1/2"(11 A325
BOLTS @ 2'-0. O.~
{
PL 3/8" X 5" X 5"/
I FLASHING
1.5F22 METAL DECK
ATTACH W/#10 SCREWS
@ 12" O.C.
~STANDING SEAM ROOF
/ / TO MATCH BUILDING
::---.
1/4" THICK
BENT It (CaNT.)
1/2" GROUT BED
BEHIND PLATE
C4 X 5.4 JOISTS
@ 4'-0" O.C.
DETAIL "A"
NOT TO SCALE
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
STANDING SEAM ROOF
/:0 MATCH BUILDING
1. 5F22 METAL DECKING
W/#10 SCREWS @ 12" O.C.
CONTINUOUS END
/CAP
3/16
3/16
.t!i
~
/ '\11/8
C4 X 5.4 JOISTS
@ 4'-0" O,C.
PL 3/8" X 5" X 5"
1/4" THICK
BENT f( (CaNT.)
TS3x3x1/4" COLUMN
1'-6" OVERHANG
~
DETAIL "s"
NOT TO SCALE
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
PROJECT MANUAL
FOR
AUGUST A UTILITIES WATER SYSTEM IMPROVEMENTS
MORGAN ROAD GROUND STORAGE TANK & PUMP STATION
Augusta, Georgia
AUGUST A COMMISSION
The Honorable Bob Young
Mayor
Lee Beard
Ulmer Bridges
Henry H. Brigham
Jerry Brigham
Freddie Lee Handy
William B. Kuhlke
William H. Mays, III
James B. Powell
Steve Shepard
Richard Colclough
Charles R. Oliver
Administrator
Max Hicks, P.E.
Director of Utilities
Prepared by
Cranston, Robertson & Whitehurst, P .C.
ENGINEERS - PLANNERS - SURVEYORS
452 Ellis Street - P.O. Box 2546
Augusta, Georgia 30903
September 28, 1999
99-234.31
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
INVITATION FOR BIDS
Sealed proposals will be received by the Augusta Commission at the Purchasing Department,
Room 605, Municipal Building, Augusta, Georgia 30901; until 3:00 p.m, on Thursday, December
2, 1999 and at that time and place publicly opened for furnishing all materials, labor, machinery, etc.
necessary to install approximately one five million gallon ground storage tank and pump station
complete with all related appurtenances referred to herein as:
BID ITEM 99-130 AUGUSTA UTILITIES 'VATER SYSTEM IMPROVEMENTS
MORGAN ROAD GROUND STORAGE TANK & PUMP STATION
in accordance with the plans and specifications herewith.
Plans and specitications are open to public inspection at the offices of the Purchasing
Department, of Cranston, Robertson & Whitehurst, P.c., 452 Ellis Street Augusta, Georgia 30901,
the Augusta Utilities Department, 2760 Peach Orchard Road, Augusta, Georgia; the F,W. Dodge
Division Plan Room, Augusta, Georgia; and the Augusta Builders Exchange, Augusta, Georgia.
Plans and specifications for bidding purposes may be obtained from the City of Augusta, Purchasing
Department, 530 Greene Street, Room 605, upon payment of One Hundred Dollars ($100,00) (non-
refundable) for each set of documents issued.
Each bidder must furnish a Financial, Experience and Equipment Statement.
Bids must be accompanied by a Certified Check or Bid Bond in an amount equal to Ten
Percent (10%) of the Total Bid Price, No bid may be withdrawn for a period of thirty (30) days after
the closing time scheduled for the receipt of bids. Performance and payment bonds in the amount of
100% of the contract price wi II be required.
Address all bids to Geri Sams, Purchasing Department, Room 605, Municipal Building,
Augusta, Georgia, 30901, marking the envelope:
AUGUST A UTILITIES WATER SYSTEM IMPROVEMENTS
MORGAN ROAD GROUND STORAGE TANK & PUMP STATION
The Augusta Commission reserves the right to reject any and all bids.
Advertised in:
The Augusta Chronicle - November 3, 8, 16,23, 1999
Metro Courier - November 3, 1999
I-I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
T ABLE OF CONTENTS
NO. OF PAGES
SECTION TITLE
Invitation for Bids
lB Instructions to Bidders
BB Bid Bond
P Proposal
CA Certificate of O\vner's Attorney
A Agreement
NA Notice of Award
PB Performance and Payment Bonds
GC General Conditions
SC Special Conditions
TS Technical Specifications
4
2
"
.J
4
5
26
8
198
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
SECTION IB
INSTRUCTION TO BIDDERS
IB-1. GENERAL:
A. All proposals must be presented in a sealed envelope. addressed to the Owner. The
proposal must be tiled with the Owner on or before the time stated in the Invitation
for Bids, Mailed proposals will be treated in every respect as though filed in person
and will be subject to the same requirements,
B, Proposals received subsequent to the time stated will be returned unopened, Prior to
the time stated any proposal may be withdrawn at the discretion of the biclcler, but no
proposal may be withdrawn for a period of thirty (30) days after bids have been
opened, pending the execution of a contract with the successful bickleI'.
IB-2. BID DEPOSIT:
A. Each proposal shall be accompanied by a deposit of cash or certitied check for ten
percent (10(%) of the amount of the proposal, and any proposal not accompanied
by such deposit shall be absolutely void and will not be considered, Checks shall
be drawn on a bank or trust company insured by the Federal Deposit Insurance
Corporation and shall be payable to the order of the Owner. The successful bidder,
upon his failure or refusal to execute and deliver the contract and bonds required
wi thin (10) days after he has received notice of the acceptance of his bid, shall forfeit
to the Owner, as liquidated damages for such failure or refusal, the security deposited
with his bid.
B. In lieu of the bid deposit required herein, the bidder may execute a bid bond for the
same amount. Surety shall meet all requirements relating to performance bond
required in Paragraph IB-08.
IB-3. EXAMINATION OF WORK:
A, Each bidder shalL by careful examination, satisfy himselfas to the nature and location
of the work, the conformation of the ground, the character, quality and quantity of the
facilities needed preliminary to and during the execution of the work. the general and
local conditions, and all other matters which can in any \vay affect the work or the
cost thereof under the contract. No verbal agreement or conversation with any
officer, agent or employee of the Owner, either before or after the execution of the
contract, shall affect or modify any of the terms or obligations therein,
IB-1
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
IB-4. ADDENDA AND INTERPRETATIONS:
A. No interpretation of the meaning of the plans, specifications or other pre-bid
documents will be made to any bidder orally.
B. Every request for such interpretation should be in writing addressed to CRANSTON,
ROBERTSON 8.:. \VHITEHURST, P.c., P. O. Box 2546, Augusta, Georgia 30903
and to be given consideration must be received at least tive days prior to the date
tixed for the opening of bids, Any and all such interpretations and any supplemental
instructions \vill be in the form of written addenda to the specifications \vhich, if
issued, will be sent by certified mail with return receipt requested to all prospective
bidders at the respective addresses furnished for such purpose. not later than three
days prior to the date fixed for the opening of bids. Failure of any bidder to receive
any such addendum or interpretation shall not relieve such biclcler from any obligation
under his bid as submitted. All addenda so issued shall become part of the Contract
Documents.
IB-5. PREPARATION OF BIDS:
A. Bids shall be submitted on the forms provided and must be signed by the bidder or his
authorized representative. Any corrections to entries made on bid forms shall be
initialed by the person signing the bid.
B. Bidders must quote on all items appearing on the bid forms, unless specific directions
in the advertisement, on the bid form, or in the special conditions allow for partial
bids. Failure to quote on all items may disqualify the bid, When quotations on all
items are not required, bidders shall insert the words "No Bid" where appropriate,
C. Alternate bids will not be considered unless specifically called for.
0, Telegraphic bids will not be considered. Modifications to bids already submitted will
be allowed ifsubmitted by telegraph prior to the time fixed in the Invitation for Bids.
Modifications shall be submitted as such, and shall not reveal the total amount of
either the original or revised bids,
E. Bids by wholly owned proprietorships or partnerships will be signed by all owners.
Bids of corporations will be signed by an officer of the firm and his signature attested
by the secretary thereof who wi 11 affix the corporate seal to the Proposal.
IB-6. BASIS OF AWARD:
A. The bids will be compared on the basis ofa lump sum price which \vill include and
cover the furnishing of all materials and the performance of all labor requisite or
proper, and completing of all the work called for under the accompanying contract,
and in the manner set forth and described in the specitications.
18-2
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
B. The proposed quantities as shown in certain items of the proposal are for the purpose
of comparing bids and awarding payment of monthly estimates for items of
construction complete in place, It is the responsibility of the Contractor to check all
items ofconstruction since final payment will be rendered accordinu to the lump sum
amount as bid in the proposal. In case of error in quantities as shown, the lump sum
amount as stated in the proposal will prevail at the end of the job when linal payment
is rendered except as set forth in the specifications, Should an error in the quantities
be noted, the prospective bidder should notify immediately the Engineer \\'ho will
check the quantity and issue addendum to all prospective bidders correcting the faulty
quantity, The bid will indicate that the bidder ag:rees complete Iv with the quantities
as shown and is willing: to accept the total lump sum as pavment in full for all work
shown on the plans or covered in the specif'ications,
For the purposes of comparing bids only, in case of error in the extension of prices in
a proposal, unit bid prices shall govern,
IB-7. BIDDER'S QUALIFICATIONS:
A, No proposal will be received from any biclcler unless he can present satisfactory
evidence that he is skilled in work ofa similar nature to that covered by the Contract
and has sufficient assets to meet all obligations to be incurred in carrying out the
work, He shall submit sealed in an envelope, a FINANCIAL, EXPERIENCE
AND EQUIPMENT STATEMENT, giving reliable information as to working
capital available, plant, equipment, and his experience and general
qualifications. The Owner will make such investigations as are deemed necessary
to determine the ability ofthe bidder to perform the work and the bidder shall furnish
to him all such additional information and data for this purpose as may be requested,
The Owner reserves the right to reject any bid ifthe evidence submitted by the bidder,
or investigation of him fails to satisfy the Owner that such bidder is properly qualified
to carry out the obligations of the Contract and to complete the work contemplated
therein, Part of the evidence required above shall consist ofa list of the names and
addresses of not less than five (5) firms, governments, or corporations for \\'hich the
bidder has done similar work,
IB-S. I)ERFORMANCE AND PAYMENT BONDS:
A. At the time of entering into the Contract, the Contractor shall give a performance
bond and a labor and material payment bond to the Owner for the use of the Owner
and all persons doing work or furnishing skill, tools, machinery or materials under or
for the purpose of such Contract, conditional for the payment as they become due, of
alljust claims for such work, tools, machinery, skill and materials, for the completion
of the Contract according to its terms, for saving the Owner harmless from all costs
and charges that may accrue on account of the doing of the \vork specitiecL and for
the compliance with the laws appertaining thereto. Said bonds shall be for the amount
of the contract price. The surety must be a substantial surety company satisfactory
!B-3
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
to the Owner and authorized by law to do business in the state in which the work is
located,
B. Attorneys-in-fact who sign bonds must file with each copy thereof a certified and
effectively dated copy of their powers of attorney.
IB-9. REJECTION OF B1DS:
A. These proposals are asked for in good faith, and awards will be made as soon as
practicable, provided satisfactory bids are received, The right is reserved, however,
to waive informalities in bidding, to reject any or all proposals. or to accept a bid
other than the lowest submitted if such action is deemed to be in the best interest of
the Owner.
18-4
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
RELIANCE INSURANCE CO~PANY
HOME OFFICE. PHILADELPHIA, PENNSYLVANIA
BID BOND
APPROVED BY THE AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF ARCHITECTS
A.I.A, DOCUMENT NO. A-310 (FEB, 1970 ED.)
KNOW ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENTS, THATWE
J.S. HAREN COMPANY
as Principal, hereinafter called the Principal, and the RELIANCE INSURANCE COMPANY of Philadelphia.
Pennsylvania~a corporation duly organized under the laws of the State of Pennsylvania, as Surety, hereinaf.
lercalled the Surety, are-held and firmly bound unto
AUGUSTA-RICHMOND COUNTY CONSOLIDATED', GOVERNMENT
as Obligee, hereinafter called the Obligee, in the sum of
TEN PERCENT (lOX) OF THE ~~OUNT BID--
Dollars ($ ),
for the payment of which sum well and truly to be made, the said Principal and the said Surety, bind our-
selves, our heirs, executors, administrators, successors and assigns, jointly and severally, firmly by these
presents.
WHEREAS, the Principal has submitted a bid for
MORGAN ROAD GROUND STORAGE WATER TANK/PUMPING STATION
AUGUSTA, GA
NOW THEREFORE, if the Obligee shall accept the bid of the Principal and the Principal shall enter into a
Contract with the Obligee in accordance with the terms of such bid, and give such bond or bonds as may be
specified in the bidding or ContractDocuments with good and sufficient surety for the faithful performance
of such Contract and forthe prompt payment of labor and material furnished in the prosecution thereof, or in
the event of the failure of the Principal to enter such Contract and give such bond or bonds, if the Principal
shall pay to the Obligee the difference not to exceed the penalty hereof between the amount specified in
said bid and such larger amount for which the Obligee may in good faith contract with ahother party to
perform the Work covered by said bid, then this obligation shall be null and void, otherwise to remain in full
force and effect. .
Signed and sealed this
day of
A.D. 19 99
2ND
DECEMBER
C fbwQNA~"~~
J.S. HAREN COMPANY
(Principal) (Seal)
~~7(es,'dtrtl-
(title)
FACT
BDR.2305 6/95
I 0
~
. ....1 . - :;. .. .
t1-'.
I 0
.. . .. =-
RELIA......CE SURETY COMPANY
ffi',lTED PACmC INSURANCE COMPANY
RELlA.1~CE INSURANCE COMP A,;,'lY
RELIANCE NATIONAL INDEMNITY COMPANY
II
I
II
.\
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
ADMINISTRATIVE OFFICE. PHilADELPHIA, PENNSYLVANIA
POWER OF A TIORNEY
KNOW All MEN BY THESE PRESENTS. that RELIANCE SURETY COMPANY is a corporation duly organiud under the laws of the State ot Del.
ewere, and that RELIANCE INSURANCE COMPANY and UNITED PACIFIC INSURANCE COMPANY, are corporations duly orgenized.under the laws
01 the Commonwealth of Pennsylvanie and that RELIANCE NATIONAL INDEMNITY COMPANY i. a corporation duly organizlld undar the lawI of
the State of Wisconsin (herein collectively called "the Companiu-) and that the Compenie. by virtue of signature and seal. do hareby maKe.
constitute and eppoint E. J. Pennisi, Jr.. John C. Middleton, Donald E. Wi III a 11\1, H. Ril.y Holllday, H. A. Wright, Jr., Nancy lock., Mich..1 D,
Regen, Tracy Tuck.r. Lynda Y. Kingsl.y.. of Naahvil1., T.nn..... their true and lawful Attorney(s).in-Fact, to make, execute, seal end deliver tor
and on their behalf. and as their ect and deed any and all bonda and und.rtaklng. of 8ur.tywhip and to bind the Companies thereby .a9 fully and to
the same extent es if such bonds and undertakings and other writing. obligatory in the nature thereof were signed by an Executive Officer ot Ihe
Companiea end sealed and attested by one other ot such oHicers, end hereby ratifies and confirm. all that their said Attorney(s)-in-Fect may do in
pursuance hereof.
. This Power of Attorney is granted under and by the authority of Article VII. of the By.Laws of RELIANCE SURETY COMPANY,
RELIANCE INSURANCE COMPANY. UNITED PACIFIC INSURANCE COMPANY, and RELIANCE NATIONAL INDEMNITY COMPANY which
provisions are now in full force and effect. reading as follows:
ARTlCLE VlI. EXECUTlON OF BONOS AND UNOEl\TMINGS
,. T'he 8o.d of Oi,ecton. the PT~. ttw Ckairm." of t.hI Bon. IJIY'If Set'-iot Vi~ P1'.M:Mnt. .,.,., Vice Pr-'denl 011 Aaei.11lf'1t Vice PT-.iOent 01 ou-r oHi~ o..io;ne1.ed by tN 8o.,d of
D.oct... _ ~ POW" ond --..v.o la' ""point Ano"'oy(ol~n-Foct _'0 outhooizo ~.o..acute on behall 01 tho c~:_ - ~....--, ,ocoon._, .ont.ac1lI 01 i~"'tY
rd .- ,..ritingo obIig....... in tho 1\01110 ~ool. ond (bl'o .oMon tIT'f ouch An",noylaHn-Foct at trrOf limo ond .....OM tho """,.. - ...u-ity given '0 them.
2. AnCW'TW"f'~Hn-f.ct""" 1\aV. pow... ...-.d autnotltY. M.Jbi<<:t to ttw twme II"'d limit.aot'll of the Pow... of Anor,...., i-..d to them. to ...cute 6e'i~_ on ~f of the Comp.ny, bono.
rd ~ai:ingo. .ocoora- .0nt70C1l1 0' indomnty _ 00- writinga obIigat..... in tho 1\01\I0 _001. Tho ."'~"'o.o Mol io not no.....,., ,'" tho validity 01 tIT'f bondo ond <.roda<1alurqa.
rfoC.OQrUat"lCM. contJ'KU of indoemriry and ot"'" writinga obl,g.tory in the N1U'. theteof.
3. AnorneytaHn-FIC'l aNI'I neve pow_ and a.rthor'ity to u:ecute .tf~evla reourtd to be ena.ched to bOt"'lM. ,ecOQt"li:zM"Olll. c:ontractll of i~nity 01 other conditiOf'\lll or obliIJl'tOt)
~oIr.inge _ they anoll ??0o NYO pow" ond O<JIho<ity '0 .ot1Jfy tho financiol at"amont of tho Com~tIT'f _ '0 .""'- 01 tho B.,.uwo of tho ComptlT'f '" tIT'f aniclo '" ao<:tion '_001.
n.;" Pow.. of Attomay io ~nood _ aoa>od by lacsimila unci.. ond by O<JIho<ity 01 tho 10UowinQ ._ution od..,.od by tho Executivo - nMnCoO Commin_ 01 tho BoOldo of Oirecton of l\.oIi....,.
\......anco Compony. Un.ad Pacific Inklanco ComptlT'f ond R.fi...- Notional IncIom,.,ty Compony by Unonm_ C..-.t do.ad .. 01 Fobruoty 28. 1 aa4 ond by tho Executivo - ,,"""'i.
Commin.. 01 tho 8_d 01 Oiroc1... of l\.oIianco Suoty ComptlT'f by Unonim_ Conoo<'II d..ad · of MOl"" 31. 1 all4.
'Rooo/vad !Nt the ~not\I.. 01 ouch di.ecton ond offi___ _ tho Mol 01 tho ComptlT'f m.., be affixad to tIT'f ouch Pow.. 01 Att"'noy '" tIT'f conil;..... rolo.inQ _",0 by
fa<;llimil4i,rd *"Y JIUCh Pow.. of AnOfTWY Of cenifica-t8 bowing IUCh fllaHTw~ eiQMtll. 01/ fac:aimi!.e .... Iit\IIII be yefid ..-.d btnding upon ttw ComPwrf end IITf IUCh Po....... ao
LXoaAad _..,.;r.... by '~ilo~" _ lacsimila .01 _ be vond _ birding upon tho Compony. in tho lun.ro with roopo<;t '0 tIT'f bond '" undot1""nQ to wnich "..
ottactwd,'
IN WITNESS WHEREOF. the Companies have caused these presents to be signed and their corporate seals to be hereto affixed, this July 1, 1999.
On this, July 1, 1999. before me, Velencia WOrlham, personally appeered David T. Ak.,... who acknowledged himself to be the Senior Vie
President of the Reliance Suraty Company. and the Vice President of Raliance Insurance Company. United Pacific Insurance Company, af
Reliance Nationel Indemnity Company and that 8S such, being authorized to do so, executed the foregoing instrument for the purpose thara'
contained by signing the name of the corporation by himself as its duly authorized otficar.
In witnesa whereot, I hereunto set my hand and official seal.
ST ATE OF Pennsylvania
COUNTY OF Philadelphie
No:arial Seal .
Vale')!';!3 ',t./or-,nam, Not~ry Public
Philcde!o~ia, F~i,aoelphla COUl"ty
My Ccrnrnlss.on Expires Nav, 1 B. 2000
RELIANCE SURETY COMP A.,.."
RELIANCE lNSURANCE COMPAN'
UNITED PACIFIC lNSURANCE COMPAN'
'lJ~:;::;U;~;Z:::
I. Anita Zippert. Sacratary of RELIANCE SURETY COMPANY. RELIANCE INSURANCE COMPANY, UNITED PACIFIC INSURANCE COMPANY. a
REUANCE NATIONAL INDEMNITY COMPANY do hereby cerlify that the above and foregoing is 8 true and correct copy of the Power of Attorn
executed by said Companies, which i8 still in full force and eHact.
IN WITNESS WHEREOF, I have hereunto sat my hand and affixad the seals of said Companies thi;ND day of DECEMBER 1999.
- ~~ /J ~
sO'""", ~
f~~"<<vm-a,~
Notary Public in and for the State ot Pennsylvanie
Residing at Philadelphia
" 1 "a'; '. ::. ;:1 '~~,,-: T': : :;': ..:~.
,:1 =l: I,~.. ;-(O);:II I: i~"111.[..II' I~; 11la{0); I ;,11 ~'-...".: f,'; III;; lei ,~, ",,-',".' l::l; I'''' ;1,8: ['l Ii If" .,1 ~',1~ (C111 =!II 'olltj i::l,','-
I..
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
01/04/2000 09:10 4237455252 J C H^REt.1 0.ll
91-G3-SD ~4;40 G~AN~TON ROB~RT50N wn ~ rl · ~
I TnnrrRST Ipu7Sfi7223379
PAGE 1::1::
PE/2/&2
..,
Sf:CTION ~
PROPOSA.l,
D....1E:~tJntlu.-( ,c2, lCjCf/
- I
--
Gen[l~m~n:
II1 compliance: \\'jth your in\.ltntion for bEds. th~ undcrsisn;:d h~r~b:: pr{\p0S~S lO t\.lo\l5h all
hjbor. <:qui);JnL.;nt nnd l11<ltcri<ils, :lnd iO perform aH \-york for the p"Qje~1 r~fen"t;d (0 herein L\":;:
-I
.-\UGUST."" \VA TER SYSTEM J:vIPROVE~'lE?'JTS
MORG.-\~ ROAD GROUND STOF'_.:..GE TA~K & PU~.{P STA TiO;-";
in strict :\Cl;Qrd::mc<= wlch the C ol1trnct Documents and in consic~r~tiQI1 ot' the u]'l)i)uniS S1'10\\';1 on tht!
bid sch~dl\1c <\ttuch.::d h~reto and w(JIing:
~ N\~\\;~~
. lie;!
S~'I \-{\'..1ndved ~i'L~\\JGlh-i.6Ond
n 00 1;)olbrs ( 'J 1d;:6" 1 CC_C' )
Tll-= 11l1cersigl'lt:d hereby ",~.';<:$ th::tt.l.lpon \\"Iit\~11 (If;Ccpt:\na oitht3. bid. he: \~:\l\ wi{hit'. 10
d..ys of...<..:dp~ of such l1~tke e;':~"i.e :1 f{)m'.I~i coni.l'Z.lCt (\~r~o::m~nr ,,-jdl th~ O\\~I~t'. (l,1d th~t h~ ,,,'in
p(ovide th~ bond or 1;U~a'!'.,.;:es'..~q\.llred by the Conrr;;ict DOC\lmeniS. .
Th~ ul1d~rsig.11~ b~r~b~- ::l~r~.e:5 i.bt. if ~\\'ard~d th~ conn....ct. h.,;; will commi;l~CC !!1~ work
\\'llhin J.;n (lQ) Cl'.knd~.. d:a}'s i!n~r the d~le of the wrir\~n nOl:c~ to pro~c~:i. nnd th;J,~ he \,'tH
cQmpl~(e dIe work \\'irhtl1 .J2n~ h'.lr:dr~d Ei2ht~ U.~.Q) calencM d:\ys :'If,er tl~~ dute of such not\{;~.
1!~c tmdersl~ned <1cknQwleciges receipt of the foUo'win'!!. &:!.denda:
\ Arll~ndU!ll ~o. 1 ;'Jnd i'o.... 'Po; TI A~"~~ri""Q ,\!" '{ ~
. . . , - :J - 00
~
-l
!
1 Enclosed. is n bid g:,t3rnnw:. CO!1Si5tin~ of Q.., b; cl e.~.,.:d
-+( 1\ (JL ,e. ~ r:-+ () ~ -+ u ~ d. ~^--t-
1
in ;he ~H110lUit of
Resp<=ctfuUy S1.lbmiu~d.
J~ S. 4Ct(?'rl C.orntOJ..t1'---1
f'ltl..\( i'i.'\:' i ~ ^' ) "
]2, \;JQ.Ytfbo+,n Mt? v-r-+-rlJ 1(.., , j/1)
u -I.'51...'-S~., DDD "'~'L
t::l' I :~:. ;).-.. 1" l:._.J
~~
TlTLE: ~eSIcL.Iif'"
BY:
P-l
fH-1S4-IHI lSl9:1S5
TO:CRAN5TON ROBERT50N WHITEHUR5T
PlSl2
FROM:4237455252
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
SECTION P
PROPOSAL
D..l. TE:OeClrrtbu. ,;2, /qo/J
,
Gentlemen:
In compliance with your 1l1\'itation for bids, the undersigned hereby proposes to furnish all
labor. equipment and materials. and to perform all work for the project referred to herein as:
-I
AUGUSTA \VATER SYSTEM Hv[PROVEiv[ENTS
MORGAN ROAD GROUND STORAGE TANK & PUi\.lP STATION
in strict accordance \\'irh the Contract Documents and in consideration ofrhe amounts shown on the
bid schedule attached hereto and totaling:
Qr\Q., W\~ \ \ ion S;'! \-\undved ~i\L+-t f=:\irc..T~d
. and /1 00 Dollars ( ,) lc~ I ccC> )
The undersigned hereby agrees that. upon written acceptance of thls bid. he will \\'ithin 10
days of receipt of such notice c>:ecute a formal contract agreement \\'ith the Owner. and that he \\'ill
provide the bond or guarantees required by the Contract Documents.
The undersigned hereby agrees that, if a\\'arded the contract. he will commence the work
within Ten (.lj2) calendar days after the date of the written notice to proceed. and that he \\'ill
complete the \\'ork \\'ithin One Hundred EiQhtv (180) calendar days after the date of sLlch notice.
The tll1dersigned ad:.no\\'ledges receipt of the following addenda:
. I ..Enclosed is a bid guarantee. consisting of Cl.. b, c1 b~
-r( f\ '(J,Lrc.e rrt u~ -f-u bd ~td-
in the amotmt of
Respectfully submitted.
J, s. f+a ((J(1 CIJmfJJilLI
FIR \ I N ,.\ \ I E ^ , I. . -A )
--12 -, v..:a Y1~ ~ ('r Ave) tt:tnL I1:s "J1JL
BliSI7\ESS ,ADDRESS
~~
TITLE: Pr-t:SicL.nr
BY:
P-1
I
I
I
I
I.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
BID SCHEDULE
MORGAN ROAD GROUND STORAGE
TANK & PUMP STATION
99-234.31
TO ACCOMPANY THE PROPOSAL OF
BIDDER j. 3, ~Q.feJl Co~I1LL-
p.3 WasnM~-Mtl ..A{.Q.~
~('\~L 'TN 373Q~
ITEM NO. DESCRIPTION, QUANTITY, UNIT. AND UNIT PRICE
1.
2.
..,
.J.
4.
5.
6.
7.
s.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.
17.
STREETS
lvlobi I ization
Lump Sum
Clearing & Grubbing
Lump Sum
Site Grading
L llln p S lun
r..'liscellaneous Concrete
Lump Sum
6" Graded Aggregate Base & 2" Asphalt
Lump Sum
Double 14' Chain Link Gate \vl Barbed Wire
Lump Sum
6' Chain Link Fence with Barbed Wire
Lump Sum
8' Wooden Privacy Fence
Lump Sum
DIP Yard Piping Complete \vith Appurtenances
Lump Sum
DIP Pump Station Piping Complete with Appurtenances
Lump Sum
Storm Drainage System Complete
Lump Sum
Altitude Valve & Vault Complete with Appurtenances
Lump Sum
Flow lvleter & Vault Complete with Appurtenances
Lump Sum
Pumps Installed Complete with Starters and All Appurtenances
:2 LA, @ $ 20~{::L-X) IE.A.
Pump Control Valves. Complet w1th All Appurtenances
:2 E.A. @ $ 7) 5/) l) IE.A.
Liquid Level Monitoring Device
Lump Sum
Pump Station Building Complete
Lump Sum
P-2
AMOUNT
s qeJooo
s~\OCO
\C.- . ,
S I :~+ \ Ll r.~'
)
s ~ )cx:J:)
\,-~ ./YlJF\
S~~
S 2 (~/\ (-:--.....
I _" '_ ./
I -
S j d- ~u
)
S3,U0U
,
s J I u 000
S b0/OU0
S ;;u) ) 000
s l81000
sJePD
:..b
s "9, Dei:)
s )~ {Y'JO
~ 1 DQC)
S I ~s ' 7'o-j--.,,-......
. j~
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
ITEM NO. DESCRIPTION, OUANTITY, UNIT, AND UNIT PRICE
18.
19.
20.
21.
Ground Storage Tank Complete with Accessories & Pipes
Lump Sum
Electrical
Lump Sum
Grassing
Lump Sum
Soil Erosion and Sedimentation Control Measures
Lump Sum
GRAND TOTAL
AMOUNT
s YJes ,CCiD
,
$~
-
S ~ J [)()(")
$~\OC::O
$ \) ((:Ie;) l('ri~'
Additional Items of Construction to Be Performed If So Required by the Engineer:
STATE UNIT PRICES:
1.
2.
"
.J.
4.
5.
NOTE:
Asphalt Replacement. per Sq. Yd.
Overcut Excavation and Removal of Unsuitable Material. and
Select Backtil1. per Cu, Yd.
Imported Select Backtill, per Cu. Yd.
Trench Rock Excavation. per Cu. Yd.
Mass Rock Excavation. per Cu. Y d,
. QC;)
5> ~~5 -
3~'O~
s .... ,
s /9'~
$ 7;::' .~
s 6D"~
FAILURE TO QUOTE REASONABLE PRICES FOR ADDITIONAL ITEMS
MA Y CAUSE THE BID TO BE REJECTED.
P-3
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
CERTIFICA TE OF OWNER'S ATTORNEY
I, the undersigned James B. Wall , the duly authorized and acting legal representative of
Augusta. Georuia, do hereby certify as follows:
I have examined the attached Contract(s) and surety bonds and the manner of execution
thereof, and I am ofthe opinion that each ofthe aforesaid agreements has been duly executed by the
proper parties thereto acting through their duly authorized representatives; that said representatives
have full power and authority to execute said agreements on behalf of the respecti ve parties named
thereon; and that the foregoing agreements constitute valid and legally binding obligations upon the
parties executing the same in accordance ,",vith the terms, conditions and provisions thereof.
DATE:
CA-I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
m
SECTION A
AGREEMENT
THIS AGREEMENT, made on the 1~ of ~t!;~, 19 'If
by and between
AUGUSTA COMMISSION
party of the first part, hereinafter called the OWNER, and
J. S. HAREN COMPANY
party of the second part, hereinafter called the CONTRACTOR.
WITNESSETH, that the Contractor and the Owner, for the considerations hereinafter named, agree
as follows:
ARTICLE I - SCOPE OF THE WORK
The Contractor hereby agrees to furnish all of the materials and all of the equipment
and labor necessary, and to perform all of the work shown on the plans described in the specifications
for the project entitled:
AUGUST A UTILITIES WATER SYSTEM IMPROVEMENTS
MORGAN ROAD GROUND STORAGE TANK & PUMP ST A nON
and in accordance with the requirements and provisions of the Contract Documents as defined in the
General and Special Conditions hereto attached which are hereby made a part of this agreement.
ARTICLE II - TIME OF COMPLETION -- LIOUIDA TED DAMAGES
The work to be performed under this Contract shall be commenced within ten cun
calendar days after the date of written notice by the Owner to the Contractor to proceed. The work
shall be completed within ONE HUNDRED EIGHTY (180) calendar days after the date of such
notice and with such extensions of time as are provided for in the General Conditions.
It is hereby understood and mutually agreed, by and between the Contractor and the
Owner, that the date of beginning, rate of progress and the time for completion of the work to be
done hereunder are ESSENTIAL CONDITIONS of this Contract. Contractor agrees that said work
shall be prosecuted regularly, diligently, and uninterruptedly at such rate of progress as will insure
full completion there of within the time specified. It is expressly understood and agreed by and
between the Contractor and the Owner, that the time for the completion of the \\-ork described herein
A-I
I
I
I
I
I
-
m
I
I
o
U
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
is a reasonable time for the completion of the same, taking into consideration the average climatic
range and construction conditions prevailing in this locality,
IF THE CONTRACTOR SHALL NEGLECT, FAIL OR REFUSE TO COMPLETE
THE WORK WITHIN THE TIME HEREIN SPECIFIED, then the Contractor does hereby agree,
as a part of the consideration for the awarding of this contract, to pay to the Owner the sum of Five
Hundred Dollars ($500.00), not as a penalty, but as liquidated damages for such breach of contract
as hereinafter set forth, for each and every calendar day that the Contractor shall be in default after
the time stipulated in the contract for completing the work.
The said amount is fixed and agreed upon by and bet\\een the Contractor and the
Owner because of the i mpracticabi I i ty and extreme difficul ty of tixing and ascertai ning the actual
damages the Owner would, in such event, sustain, and said amounts shall be retained from time to
time by the O\-vner from current periodical estimates,
It is further agreed that time is of the essence of each and every portion of this contract
and of the specifications wherein a definite portion and certain length of time is fixed for the
performance of any act whatsoever; and where under the contract an additional time is allowed for
the completion of any work, the new time limit fixed by extension shall be the essence of the
Contract.
ARTICLE IIl- PAYMENT
A. THE CONTRACT SUM
The Owner shall pay to the Contractor for the performance of the Contract the amounts
determined for the total number of each of the units of \vork in the attached schedule
completed at the unit price stated. The number of units contained in this schedule is
approximate only, and the final payment shall be made for the actual number of units that are
incorporated in or made necessary by the work covered by the Contract.
B. PROGRESS PAYMENTS
The Owner will pay to the Contractor in the manner and at such times as set forth in the
General Conditions such amounts as required by the Contract Documents.
ARTICLE IV - ACCEPTANCE AND FINAL PAYMENT
A, Upon receipt of written notice that the work is ready for final inspection and acceptance, the
Engineer shall within 10 days make such inspection, and when he finds the work acceptable
under the Contract and the Contract fully performed he will promptly issue a final certi ficate,
over his o\-vn signature, stating that the work required by the Contract has been completed
and is accepted by him under the terms and conditions thereof. and the entire balance found
to be due the Contractor, including the retained percentage, shall be paid to the Contractor
by the Owner within 15 days after the date of said final certificate.
A-2
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
g
I
I
I
I
B.
o
o
o
I
H
I
Before final payment is due the Contractor shall submit evidence satisfactory to the Engineer
that all payrolls, material bills, and other indebtedness connected with the work have been
paid, except that in case of disputed indebtedness or liens the Contractor may submit in lieu
of evidence of payment a surety bond satisfactory to the Owner guaranteeing payment of all
such disputed amounts when adjudicated in cases where such payment has not already been
guaranteed by surety bond,
C.
The making and acceptance of the final payment shall constitute a waiver of all claims by the
Owner other than those arising from unsettled liens, from h1ldty work appearing within 12
months after final payment, from requirements of the specifications, or from manufacturers'
guarantees, It shall also constitute a waiver of all claims by the Contractor except those
previously made and still unsettled,
D.
If after the work has been substantially completed. full completion thereof is materially
delayed through no fault of the Contractor, and the Engineer so certities, the Owner shall
upon certificate of the Engineer, and without terminating the Contract, make payment of the
balance due for that portion of the work fully completed and accepted,
Such payment shall be made under the terms and conditions governing tinal payment. except
that it shall not constitute a waiver of claims,
A-3
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
g
I
I
I
o
I
I
U
I
IN WITNESS WHEREOF the parties hereto have executed this Agreement, the day and year first
\VTitten above,
v
~
~
o ViNER
BY:
~
WITNESS:
~Cf~
t
.'
J. S, HAREN COMPANY:-
CONTRtCTQR
WITNESS:
~~
?rP5'icb. tit/-'
BY:
TITLE
,
l(J\XYL ~
A-4
I
I
I
I
-
I
I
I
I
o
D
o
o
I
0,
I
I
o
\1
\
"
Cranston, Robertson & Whitehurst, P.C.
ENGINEERS PLANNERS SURVEYORS
OLD ENGINE COMPA.."IY NO.1
452 ELLIS STREET
POST OFFICE BOX 25016
AUGUSTA. GEORGiA 30903.2546
TELEPHONE (706) 722.1588
TELECOPIER (706) 722.8379
E.MAIL CRWPC@CRWPC,COM
JOHN T, ATTAWAY, R.L.S,
WAYNE SWANN, R.L.S.
~nCHAELS,BERGLUND
STEVEN M. BRYA.'iT
DWIGHT E, FUNDERBURK. 11
PATRICK W, HUTTO
KEITH A. LAWRENCE
KELVIN G. OGLESBY
J, CRAIG CRANSTON. P.E,. R.L.S,
THOMAS H, ROBERTSON, P.E" R.L.S,
ELDRIDGE A. WHITEHURST, JR., P.E.
JAMES B, CRANFORD, JR,. P.E.
DENNIS J. WELCH. P.E,
.I.S. Haren Company
\ 2.3 Wash ington A venue
Athens. Tennessee 37303
'f
Re: Notice of Award
Augusta Utilities Water System Improvements
Morgan Road Ground Storage Tank & Pump Station
Augusta-Richmond County Bid Item No. 99-130
Gentlemen:
The O\vner has considered the BID submitted by you for the above described WORK in response to its
Invitation for Bids and Information for Bidders,
You are hereby notified that your BID has been accepted for items in the amount of $\ ,665.000.00
You have agreed in your Proposal to execute the Agreement and furnish the required Contractor's
Performance Bond, Payment Bond and Insurance within Ten UQ) calendar days from the date of this Notice to you.
If you fail to execute said Agreement and to furnish said Bonds and Insurance within Ten UQ) days from the
date of this Notice, said OWNER will be entitled to consider all your rights arising out of the OWNER'S acceptance
ofyollr BID as abandoned, The OWNER will be entitled to such other rights as may be granted by law.
You are required to return an acknowledged copy of this NOTICE OF AWARD to the OWNER,
Dated this 151h day of December, 1999,
Sincerely,
CRANSTON, ROBERTSON & WHITEHURST, p,c.
D.-
g, W~~
Dennis J. Welch. P.E,
ACCEPTANCE OF NOTICE
Receipt of the above NOTICE OF AWARD is hereby acknowledged on this _ day of
19
-
TITLE: 7ies;r.f.vtJ-
E:',t\t\.CORRESI'ONDENCE< I ')')1)"')')2..~..11 MORGAN RO..\D Speciticaliol1$\NoliccofAwa..d.JSHa..el1,wl'd
~~
BY:
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
g
I
I
I
o
I
I
o
o
o
SECTION PB
PERFORMANCE BOND
(NOTE:
TI-IIS BOND IS ISSUED SIMULTANEOUSLY WITI-I P A YtvlENT BOND ON
PAGE PB-3. IN FAVOR OF THE OWNER CONDITIONED FOR THE
PA YMENT OF LABOR AND MATERIAL.)
KNO'vV ALL r-./lEN BY THESE PRESENTS:
ThatJ ,S, !1DJtf\ t~m(b(l~
Contractor, and KeJI'a.Jl. <.. '€..- '--:r;n '5ut'ance
as Principal, hereinafter called
(I A) rn.p Q/("v~
a corporation organized and existing under the laws of the State of Pef)()Sy/V(1n{L4
withitsprincipaloflice in the City ofVh\ Io.Jel?h~!} , State of 1?enn5Cj)\Ar1t4,
.
as Surety, hereinafter called Surety, are held and firmly bound unto the Augusta Commission.
Augusta, Georgia, as Obligee, hereinafter called the Owner, in the penal amount of
a~ n^.jllltr\ SiX hu flclf(!.rJ S;l X-+y ~~ ~GLPfl(lcl
Dollars
($ I/libjo.'X), ) for the payment whereof Contractor and Surety bind themselves, their heirs,
executors, administrators, successors, and assigns,jointly and severally, firmly by these presents for
the faithful performance of a certain written agreement.
WHEREAS, Contractor has by said written agreement dated
entered into a contract with Owner for the construction of Augusta Utilities Water System
Improvements, Morgan Road Ground Storage Tank & Pump Station, Augusta, Georgia, in
accordance with the drawings and specifications issued by the utilities Department and the Augusta
Commission, Augusta, Georgia 'vvhich contract is by reference made a part hereof, and is hereinafter
referred to as the CONTRACT.
NOW, THEREFORE. the condition ofthis obligation is such that, if Contractor shall
, ~
promptly and faithfully perform said CONTRACT, then this obligation shall be null and void;
otherwise it shall remain in full force and effect.
The Surety hereby waives notice of any alteration or extension of time made by the
Owner.
Whenever Contractor shall be, and declared by Owner to be in default under the
CONTRACT, the Owner having performed Owner's obligations thereunder, the Surety may promptly
remedy the default. or shall promptly
(I) Complete the CONTRACT in accordance with its terms and conditions, or
PB-l
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
1-
m
u
I
o
I
D
I
o
D
I
D
(2) Obtain a bid or bids for completing the Contract in accordance with its terms and
conditions, and upon determination by Surety ofthe lowest responsible bidder. or, if
the Owner elects, upon determination by the Owner and the Surety jointly of the
lowest responsible bidder, arrange for a contract between such bickler and Owner, and
make available as Work progresses (even though there should be a default or a
succession of defaults under the contract or contracts of completion arranged under
this paragraph) sufficient funds to pay the cost of completion less the balance of the
contract price; but not exceeding, including other costs and damages for which the
Surety may be liable hereunder, the amount set forth in the tirst paragraph hereof
The term "balance of the contract price," as used in this paragraph, shall mean the
total amount payable by Owner to Contractor under the Contract and any
amendments thereto, less the amount properly paid by Owner to Contractor.
Any suit under this bond must be instituted before the expiration of two (2) years from the
date on which fmal payment under the CONTRACT falls due,
No right of action shall accrue on this bond to or for the use of any person or
corporation other than the Owner named herein or the heirs, executors, administrators or successors
of the Owner.
Signed and sealed this
day of
A.D, 199_,/::' _
Witness LhuYL V<.cck j.J
Att~cd ~W^--
i
\ J. S. flo(ef\ UJrn(Jfl/.J 9-. . ~.~i{~~
(Contl:af.~OI:) "._.:.___
~~
-p.eSl d.P /L~
(Seal)
(Title)
By
Witness
RELIANCE INSURANCE COMPANY
3 PARKWA'Y . iOTH rlOOR
PHILACELPHIA. PA 19102
(?1 5) 864-4000
Attest
fpower of -f1Jt-,;;n8~---Atlach9d1
PB-2
I
I
I
I
m
I
I
I
o
n
o
o
o
I
I
o
I
I
I
SECTION PB
LABOR AND !VIA TERIAL PAYMENT BOND
(NOTE:
THIS BOND IS ISSUED SIMUL T ANEOUSL Y WITH PERFORMANCE BOND
ON PAGE PB-1. IN FAVOR OF THE OWNER CONDITIONED FOR THE
PERFORMANCE OF THE WORK.)
KNOW ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENTS:
That J,5, /-){)(~f1 Cofh(lJ(l L/
as Principal,
hereinafter called Contractor, and R-e-llrtYlU2..- ~su..raflCQ, ~(Y1.fXJ fti..{
a corporation organized and existing under the laws of the State of (~..lIt\Jf l \11 ni+l
. with its
principal office in the City of Ph\l~dei vh,-A
, State of /(ennscIIVtln/-IJ ,as Surety,
hereinafter called Surety, are held and firmly bound unto the Augusta Commission, as Obligee,
hereinafter called the Owner, for the use and benefit of claimants as hereinbelow detined in the
amount of ()(\~ mi It;~ :s) rx. h( Ifldtecl
~. cff1ttD (]v rJ
3iY-kt
, Dollars
($ I( l.p(P5) ttD. - ) for the payment whereof Contractor and Surety bind themselves, their heirs,
executors, administrators, successors, and assigns, jointly and severally, firmly by these presents.
WHEREAS, Contractor has by written agreement dated
entered
into a contract with Owner for the construction of Augusta Utilities Water System Improvements,
Morgan Road Ground Storage Tank & Pump Station, in accordance with drawings and specifications
issued by Augusta Commission, Augusta, Georgia, which contract is by reference made a part
hereof, and is hereinafter teferred to as the CONTRACT.
NOW, THEREFORE, the condition of this obligation is such that if the Contractor
shall promptly make payment to all claimants as hereinafter defined, for all labor and material used
PB-3
I
I
I
I
I
I
o
o
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
or reasonably required to use in the performance of the CONTRACT, then this obligation shall be
void; otIH~l'\vise it shall remain in full force and effect, subject. however, to the following conditions:
(I) A claimant is defined as one having a direct contract with the Contractor or with a
subcontractor of the Contractor for labor, material, or both, used or reasonably
required for use in the performance of the contract. labor and material being
construed as to include that part of water, gas, power. light. heat, oil, gasoline,
telephone service or rental of equipment directly applicable to the CONTRACT.
(2) The above named Contractor and Surety hereby jointly and severally agree with the
Owner that every claimant as herein defined, who has not been paid in full before the
expiration of a period of ninety (90) days after the date on which the last of such
claimant's work or labor was done or performed, or materials were furnished by such
claimant, may sue on this bond for the use of such claimant, prosecute the suit to final
judgement for such sum or sums as may be justly due claimant. ancl have execution
thereon, The Owner shall not be liable for the payment of any costs or expenses of
any such suit.
(3) No suit or action shall be commenced hereunder by any claimant.
(a) Unless claimant, other than one having a direct contract \\ith the Contractor,
shall have given written notice to any two of the following: The Contractor,
the Owner, or the Surety above named, within ninety (90) clays after such
claimant did or performed the last of the work or laboL or furnished the last
of the materials for which said claim is made, stati ng wi th substantial accuracy
the amount claimed and the name of the party to whom the materials were
furnished, or for whom the work or labor was done or performed, Such
notice shall be served by mailing the same by registered mail or certified mail,
postage prepaid, in an envelope addressecl to the Contractor, Owner or
Surety, at any place where an office regularly maintained for the transaction
of business, or served in any manner in which legal process may be served in
the state in which the aforesaid project is located, save that such service need
not be made by a public officer.
(b) After the expiration of one (1) year following the date on which Contractor
ceased work on said CONTRACT, it being understood, however, that if any
limitation embodied in this bond is prohibited by any law controlling the
construction hereof, such limitation shall be deemed to be amended so as to
be equal to the minimum period of limitation permitted by such law.
(c) Other than in a state court of competent jurisdiction in and for the county or
other political subdivision of the state in which the project, or any part
thereof, is situated, or in the United States District Court for the district in
which the project, or any part thereof. is situated, and not elsewhere,
(4 )
The amount of this bond shall be reduced by and to the extent of any payment or
payments made in good faith hereunder. inclusive of the payment by Surety of
PBA
-I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
\
I
\
I
\
I
\
I
I
mechanics' liens which may be filed of record against said improvement, whether or
not claim for the amount of such lien be presented under and against this bone\.
Signed and sealed this
day of
A.D, 199 ,.
--~-..._--
Witness Cf{1f1l
JJ
~ _ ~al f
(Contl~l~t l)~. '"':; ...-.-
.......... -...-...-.......
. P-" -
By
~~(Seal)
'VreslcUll-t (Title)
RELIANCE INSURANCE COMPANY
3 PARKWll. Y - 10TH FLOOR
PHILADELPHiA, PA 19102
(215) 8644000
Attest
. ,.'."/ "'1o......""'u~d.J
~~~~~~~\J.J___-~
-J
,01
PB-5
',.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
D
o
D
I
B
I
U
U
m
I
GC-O 1,
GC-02.
GC-03.
GC-04,
GC-O 5,
GC-06,
GC-07,
GC-08.
GC-09.
GC-IO,
GC-Il.
GC-12.
GC-I3.
GC-I4.
GC-15,
GC-16.
GC-I 7.
GC-18.
GC-19.
GC-20,
GC-21.
GC-22.
GC-23.
GC-24.
GC-25.
GC-26,
GC-27.
GC-28,
GC-29.
GC-30.
GC-31.
GC-32.
GC-33.
GC-34.
GC-35,
GC-36.
GC-37.
GC-38.
GC-39.
SECTION GC
GENERAL CONDITIONS
INDEX TO ARTICLES OF GENERAL CONDITIONS
Section
Page No,
Definitions .. , . . . . . , , . . . . . . . . , . . , . . , , , , , , , . . , , . . . , , . . . . , . . . , . , . . . . 1
Additional Instructions and Detail Drawings. . . . . . . , , , . . . , , , , , . . . . . . . , , . , 5
Schedules, Reports and Records ...",.""",.",.,..,..,.,.,...,',., 5
Dra\vings and Specifications "",.............".",..,.,' , , , , , . , , , . . 6
Shop Drawings, , . . , . , , , , , . . , . , , , , . , . , , , , , . , . . . . . , , . . . . , . . , . , , , , , , . 6
Materials, Services and Facilities. , . . . . . , . . . . . . , , . , , , , . . , , . . . . , . , . , , , , . 7
Inspection and Testing. , , , , . . . , . . , , . . . . , , , . . , , , . , , . , . , . . . . , . . , , . . , , . 7
Substitutions, , , , , . . . . . . . . . . . . , . . . , , , , . , , , . . . . , . . . , , . . , . , , . , , . . . , , . 8
Patents ,...,:..,.........,.,..........."..,."".".,..,',...". 9
Surveys, Permits and Regulations .' , , , . . . , , . . . , , . . . , , , , . . . . . , . , , , . . . , . 9
Protection of Work, Property and Persons, . , , , , , . , , . . , . , . . . . , , , . , , , , . . , 10
Supervision by Contractor. , . , , . . . , , . . . . , , . . . , , . . , . , , . . . . , . , , , , , . , . , 10
Changes in the Work "..,....."."."",.....,.,..,",."..,",.. 11
Changes in Contract Price "",..",........."."".,"',...,..., '..' 11
Time for Completion and Liquidated Damages, , . . . , , . . . . . . , . . , , . . . , , , . , 11
Correction of Work .....,..,....,......,..,.,..".,....,.,..,..,.. 12
Subsurface Conditions, , , . . , . , . . , , , . . . . , , . . . , , , . , . , , . , . , , . . . , . . , , , . 13
Suspension of Work, Termination and Delay .,.....,.,..,.".,....".., 13
Payments to Contractor .,."..,..........."".."".".,...,.".,' 15
Acceptance of Final Payment as Release. . , , . . . , , , . . , , , . . . . . , . . , . , . . . , . 16
1 nsurance ,.".,.......,...."...."..,.,..."...,",...,....,.,. 16
Contract Security .. , , . , , , . . . . . . . . . . . . . , , . . , , , . , , , , . . . . . . . . . . . . , , , . 18
Assignments . . , . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . , . , , . . , . . . , . . . . , , . . . . . . . . , , , , . . . 19
IndeInnification ..........,..,...,......."..",...."....,.."... 1 9
Separate Contracts , . . . . . . . . . . . , . . . , . . , , . . . . , . . . . , . . , . . , . , . . . . . . . , . 19
Subcontracting . . . . . . , . . , . , , . , . . . . . , , . . . , , . . . , . . . . , . , , . , . . . , , . , . . . 20
Engineer's Authority ............,.....,..",.",.,.,...,.."..,.,. 20
Land and Rights-of-Way ...........,..,..........,.".,...,.....". 21
Guarantee . . . . , . , , . . . . . . . . . . . , . . . . . . . . . , , . . . , , , . . . , , . . , . . . , . , , . . . 21
Taxes ....."....,..,...........,..,...,..,"',..........,.,.,., 21
Work Adjacent to Railway or Other Property . . . . . . , . . . . . . . . . . . . . , . . . , . , 21
Order and Discipline ............,......."..."..,.....,...,....,. 22
Warning Devices and Signs. . . . . . . . . . . . , . , . , . , , . . , , , . . . , . . . . . . . . . . , ,22
Special Restrictions .......,.............,......,..,',..,.."..,',. 22
As-Built Drawings, , . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . , . . . . , . . " . , . . . . . . . . . , . . . , 22
Contractor Notto Hire Employees of the Owner. , , , . , , . , . , . . . . , . , , . , , . , .22
Dnnvings .....,."."..,........,.,...,...."".,............,.. 22
Field Office Facilities. . . . . . . , . . , . . . . . . . . . . , . . , . , , . . . . , . . . . , . , , . , . , .23
Rights-of- Way ,.,....,..............".""",...",.,.......".. 23
GC-I
I
I
I
I
I
U
o
o
D
I
D
o
o
I
o
I
I
I
I
GC-40.
GC-41 .
GC-42.
GC-43.
GC-44.
GC-45.
GC-46,
GC-47.
GC-48.
GC-49,
GC-50,
Estimate of Quantities .........,......".".,.,......."....,....., 23
Existing Structures and Utilities ,......".......,...",....."......, 23
Contractor's Breakdown of Lump Sum Payment Items, , , . . . . , , , . . , . . . , , . . 24
Prior Use By Owner, . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . , , , , , . . . . . . . . . , . , , . , . , . , , , . .24
Cleaning Up . . . . , , . . . . , , , , . , . . . , , . . . , . . . . . . , , , . . , , . , . , . . , . , . , . . . . 24
Maintenance of TraHic . . . . . . , . , , . . . . . . . , . , , , , . . , , . . . . . . . , , . . , . , . . , , 24
Maintenance of Access "..,...,."...",...,..."......".,',.,.,. 24
Erosion Control and Restoration of Property. . . , , . . , . . . , , . , . . , . , . . . . , . . . 25
Bypassing Sewage. . . . . . . , . . . . . . , , , . . , . , , . . , . , , , , , , . , , . , . , . , . , , . . .26
Safety and Health Regulations . . . , . . . , , , . . . . . . , , , , , , , , , . . . . , , , . , , . . , . 26
Pre-Construction Conference , , , , . . , . . . , . , , , , , . , , , . . , , . . , , , , , . , . . , . . , 26
GC-2
I
-
I
m
I
I
I
I
o
o
I
I
o
o
o
I
I
U
I
GC-Ol.
DEFINITIONS:
Wherever used in the Contract Documents, the following terms shall have the
meanings indicated which shall be applicable to both the singular and plural thereof.
I. ADDENDA: Written or graphic instruments issued prior to the execution of the
Agreement which modify or interpret the Contract Documents. Drawings and
Specifications~by addition, deletion, clarifications or corrections.
2, BID: The offer or proposal of the Bidder submitted on the prescribed form setting
forth the prices for the work to be performed,
3. BI DOER: Any person, firm or corporation submitting a bid for the \vork,
4. BONDS: Bid, Performance and Payment Bonds and other instruments of security
furnished by the Contractor and his Surety in accordance with the Contract
Documents,
5. CHANGE ORDER: A written order to the Contractor authorizing an addition,
deletion or revision in the work within the general scope of the Contract Documents
or authorizing an adjustment in the contract price or contract time,
6, CONTRACT DOCUMENTS: The contract including Advertisement for Bids,
Information for Bidders, Proposal, Bid Bond, Notice of award, Agreement,
Performance Bond, Payment Bond, Notice to Proceed, Change Order, General
Conditions, Supplemental General Conditions, Special Conditions, Technical
Specifications, Drawings and Addenda.
7. CONTRACT PRICE: The total monies payable to the Contractor under the terms
and conditions of the Contract Documents,
8, CONTRACT TIIvIE: The number of calendar days stated in the Contract Documents
for the completion of the work.
9. LIFE OF THE CONTRACT: The total duration of the col1tract from Notice to
Proceed to completion of all the work.
10, CONTRACTOR: The person, firm or corporation with whom the O\vner has
executed the Agreemel1t.
11, DRAWINGS: The part of the Contract Documents which show the characteristics
and scope of the work to be performed and which have been prepared or approved
by the Engineer.
12. ENGINEER: The person, firm or corporation named as such 111 the Contract
Documents.
GC-3
I
I
I
I
I
U
o
o
B
o
I
o
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
13.
14,
15,
16.
17,
18.
20.
FIELD ORDER: A written order effecting a change in the work not involving an
adjustment in the contract price or an extension of the contract time issued by the
Engineer to the Contractor during construction.
NOTICE OF A WARD: The written notice of the acceptance of the Bid from the
Owner to the successful Bidder.
NOTICE TO PROCEED: Written communication issued by the Owner to the
Contractor authorizing him to proceed with the work and establishing the date of
commencement of the work.
OWNER: A public or quasi-public body or authority. corporation, association,
partnership or individual for whom the work is to be performed.
PROJECT: The undertaking to be performed as provided in the Contract Documents.
RESIDENT PROJECT REPRESENTATIVE: The authorized representative of the
Owner who is assigned to the project site or any part thereof.
19,
SHOP ORA WINGS: All drawings, diagrams, illustrations, brochures, schedules, and
other data which are prepared by the Contractor, a Subcontractor, Manufacturer,
Supplier or Distributor, which illustrate how specific portions of the work shall be
fabricated or installed.
SPECJFICA TIONS: A part of the Contract Documents conslst1l1g of \vritten
descriptions of a technical nature or materials, equipment, construction systems,
standards and workmanship.
21.
SUBCONTRACTOR: An individual, firm or corporation having a direct contract
with the Contractor or any other Subcontractor for the performance of a part of the
work at the site.
22.
SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION: That date as certified by the Engineer when the
construction of the project or a specified part can be utilized for the purposes for
which it is intended.
j"
_J.
SUPPLEMENTAL GENERAL CONDITIONS: Modifications and/or additions to
the General Condi tions of a specific nature generally ai med at the specific contract of
which it is a part.
24.
SUPPLIERS: Any person, supplier or organization who supplies materials or
equipment for the work, including that fabricated to a special design, but who does
not perform labor at the site.
j~
-).
WORK: All labor necessary to produce the construction required by the Contract
Documents and all materials and equipment incorporated or to be incorporated in the
project.
GC-4
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
U
D
o
o
I
D
o
I
I
I
26.
GC-02.
2.
GC-03.
GC-04.
WRITTEN NOTICE: Any notice to any party of the Agreement relative to any part
of this Agreement in writing and considered delivered and the service thereof
completed, when posted by certified or registeredmai I to the said party at his last
gi ven address or delivered in person to said party or his authorized representative on
the work.
ADDITIONAL INSTRUCTIONS AND DETAIL DRA \VINGS:
1.
The Contractor may be furnished additional instructions and detail drawings, by the
Engineer, as necessary to carry out the work required by the Contract Documents,
The additional drawings and instructions thus supplied will become a part of the
Contract Documents, The Contractor shall carry out the work in accordance with the
additional detail dra\vings and instructions.
SCHEDULES, REPORTS AND RECORDS:
1.
The Contractor shall submit to the Owner such schedule of quantities and costs,
progress schedules, payrolls, reports, estimates, records and other data as the Owner
may request concerning the work performed or to be performed.
2,
Prior to the first partial payment estimate, the Contractor shall submit schedules
showing the order in which he proposes to carryon the work, including dates at
which he will start the various parts of the work, estimated date of completion of each
part and as applicable:
2.1 the dates at which special detail drawings \vill be required; and
2,2 respective dates for submission of shop drawings, the beginning of
manufacture, the testing and the installation of materials, supplies and
equipment.
...,
,).
The Contractor shall also submit a schedule of payments that he anticipates he wi 11
earn during the course of the work,
ORA \VINGS AND SPECIFICATIONS;
1.
The intent of the drawings and specifications is that the Contractor shall furnish all
labor, materials. tools, equipment and transportation necessary for the proper
execution of the work in accordance with the Contract Documents and all incidental
work necessary to complete the project in an acceptable manner. ready for lise,
occupancy or operation by the Owner.
2.
[n case of conll ict between the drawings and speci fications. the speci fications shall
govern. Figure dimensions on dra\vings shall govern over general drawings.
GC-5
m
I
I
I
I
I
g
I.
I
I
I
I
I
g
I
I
g
I
I
\
..,
.:l.
4.
GC-05.
Any discrepancies found between the draw'ings and speci fications and site conditions
or any inconsistencies or ambiguities in the drawings or specifications shall be
immediately reported to the Engineer, in writing, who shall promptly correct such
inconsistencies or ambiguities in writing. Work done by the Contractor after his
discovery of such discrepancies, inconsistencies or ambiguities shall be done at the
Contractor's risk.
All work that may be called for in the specifications and not shown on the drawings,
or shown and not called for in the specifications, shall be executed and furnished by
the Contractor as ifdescribed in both these \vays and should any work or material be
required which is not detailed in the specifications or drmvings. either directly or
indirectly, but \vhich is nevertheless necessary for the proper carrying out of the intent
thereof, the Contractor is to understand the same to be implied and required and shall
perform all such work and furnish any such material as fully as if they were
particularly delineated or described,
5,
It is understood and agreed that the Contractor, by careful examination, has satisfied
himselfas to the nature and location of the work, the conformation of the ground. the
character, qual ity and quantity of the materials to be encountered, the character of
equipment and facilities needed preliminary to and during the prosecution of the \vork,
the general and local conditions and all other matters \vhich can in any way affect the
work under this contract. No verbal agreement or conversation with any ofticer,
agent or employee of the Owner, either before or after the execution of this contract,
shall affect or modify any of the terms or obligations herein contained.
SHOP DRAWINGS:
1.
The Contractor shall provide shop drawings as may be necessary for the prosecution
of the work as required by the Contract Documents, The Engineer shall promptly
review all shop drawings. The Engineer's approval of any shop drmvings shall not
release the Contractor from responsibility for deviations from the Contract
Docuillents. The approval of any shop drawing which substantially deviates from the
requirement of the Contract Documents shall be evidenced by a Change Order.
2,
When submitted for the Engineer's review, shop drawings shall bear the Contractor's
certification that he has reviewed, checked and approved the shop drawings and that
they are in con formance with the requirements of the Contract Documents.
..,
.:l,
Portions of the work that require shop drawing or sample submission shall not begin
until the shop drawing or submission has been approved by the Engineer. A copy of
each approved shop drawing and each approved sample shall be kept in good order
by the Contractor at the site and shall be available to the Engineer.
GC-6
I
I
I
I
U
o
o
o
o
D
I
I
o
U
I
U
m
m
m
GC-06.
GC-07.
MATERIALS, SERVICES AND FACILITIES:
1.
It is understood that, except as otherwise specifically stated in the Contract
Documents, the Contractor shall provide and pay for all materials, labor, tools,
equipment, water, light, power, transportation, supervision. temporary construction
of any nature and all other services and facilities of any nature whatsoever necessary
to execute, complete and deliver the work within the specified time,
2,
Materials and equipment shall be so stored as to insure the preservation of their
quality and fitness for the work, Stored materials and equipment to be incorporated
in the work shall be located so as to facilitate prompt inspection,
...,
_L
Manul~lCtured articles, materials and equipment shall be applied. installed. connected,
erected, used. cleaned and conditioned as directed by the manufacturer.
4,
Materials, supplies or equipment shall be in accordance with samples submitted by the
Contractor and approved by the Engineer.
5,
rvlaterials, supplies or equipment to be incorporated into the work and purchased by
the Contractor of the Subcontractor will be subject to a chattel mortgage or under a
conditional sale contract or other agreement by which an interest is retained by the
seller.
INSPECTION AND TESTING:
1.
All materials and equipment used in the construction of the project shall be subject to
adequate inspection and testing in accordance with generally accepted standards.
2,
The Contractor shall provide, at his expense, the necessary testing and inspection
services required by the Contract Documents, unless otherwise provided,
...,
-'.
The Owner shall provide all other inspection and testing services required by the
Contract Documents,
4.
If the Contract Documents, laws, ordinances, rules, regulations or orders of any
public authority having jurisdiction require any work to specifically be inspected,
tested or approved by someone other than the Contractor, the Contractor wi II gi ve
the Engineer timely notice of readiness, The Contractor \vill then furnish the
Engineer the required certificates of inspection, testing or approval.
5.
Neither observation by the Engineer nor inspections, tests or approvals by persons
other than the Contractor shall relive the Contractor from his obligations to perform
the work in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents,
GC-7
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
o
I
I
n
GC-08.
m
m
I
o
I
I
6,
The Engineer and his representatives will at all times have access to the work, In
addition, authorized representatives and agents of any participating Federal or State
Agency shall be permitted to inspect all \vork, materials, payrolls, records of
personnel, invoices of materials and other relevant data and records, The Contractor
wi 11 provide proper facilities for such access and observation 0 f the work and also for
any inspection or testing thereof.
7.
If any work is covered contrary to the written request of the Engineer; it must. if
requested by the Engineer, be uncovered for his observation and replaced at the
Contractor's expense,
8,
I I' any work has been covered which the Engineer has \lot speci fically requested to
observe prior to its being covered or if the Engineer considers it necessary or
advisable that covered work be inspected or tested by others, the Contractor at the
Engineer's request will uncover, expose or otherwise make available for observation,
inspection or testing as the Engineer may require, that portion of the \vork in
question, furnishing all necessary labor, materials, tools and equipment. Ifit is found
that such \vork is defective, the Contractor will bear all the expenses of such
uncovering, exposure; observation, inspection and testing and of satisL1ctory
reconstruction, [f, however, such work is not found to be defective, the Contractor
will be allowed an increase in the contract price or an extension of the contract time,
or both, directly attributable to such uncovering, exposure, observation, inspection,
testing and reconstruction and an appropriate change order shall be issued.
9,
The Contractor shall give the Engineer 24 hours notice of starting any new work, No
work shall be done or materials used without suitable supervision and inspection by
the Engineer. The Contractor shall furnish the Engineer with necessary samples of
material for testing purposes,
SUBSTITUTIONS:
1.
When a material, article or piece of equipment is identified on the drawings or
specifications by reference to brand name or catalogue number, the performance or
other salient requirements and that other products of equal capacities, quality and
function shall be considered. The Contractor may recommend the substitution of a
material, article or piece of equipment of equal substance and function for those
referred to in the Contract Documents by reference to brand name or catalogue
number and if, in the opinion of the Engineer, such material, article or piece of
equipment is of equal substance and function to that specified, the Engineer may
approve its substitution and use by the Contractor. Any cost differential shall be
deducted from the contract price and the Contract Documents shall be appropriately
modi tied by change order. The Contractor \varrants that if substitutes are approved,
no major changes in the function or general design of the project wi II result.
OC-8
I
I
I
I
I
GC-09.
I
I
I
GC-IO.
m
I
I
I
I
I
I
g
I
I
'1
I ncidental changes or extra component parts required to accommodate the substitute
wi II be made by the Contractor without a change in the contract price or contract
time.
2.
Notwithstanding any provIsIOn of the General Conditions, there shall be no
substitution of materials that are not determined to be equivalent to those indicated
or require in the contract documents without an amendment to the contract.
PATENTS:
1.
The Contractor shall pay all applicable royalties and license fees, He shall defend all
sui ts or claims for infringement of any patent rights and save the Owner harmless from
loss on account thereof except that the Owner shall be responsible for any such loss
\vhen a particular process, design or the product of a manufacturer or manufacturers
is specified, but if the Contractor has reason to believe that the design, process or
product specitied is an infringement ofa patent, he shall be responsible for such loss
unless he promptly gives such information to the Engineer.
SURVEYS, PERMITS AND REGULATIONS:
I.
The Owner shall furnish all land surveys and establish all base lines for locating the
principal component parts ofthe work together with a suitable number of benchmarks
adjacent to the work as shown in the Contract Documents, From the information
provided by the Owner, unless otherwise specified in the Contract Documents, the
Contractor shall develop and make all detail surveys needed for construction such as
slope stakes, batter boards, stakes for pile locations and other working points, lines,
elevations and cut sheets,
2,
The Contractor shall carefully preserve benchmarks, reference points and stakes and
in case of willful or careless destruction, he shall be charged with the resulting
expense and shall be responsible for any mistakes that may be caused by their
unnecessary loss or disturbance,
..,
.J.
Permits and licenses ofa temporary nature necessary for the prosecution of the work.
shall be secured and paid for by the Contractor. Permits. licenses and easements for
permanent structures or permanent changes in existing facilities shall be secured and
paid for by the Owner, unless otherwise specified, The Contractor shall give all
notices and comply with all laws, ordinances, rules and regulations bearing on the
conduct of the work as drawn and specified. If the Contractor observes that the
Contract Documents are at variance therewith. he shall promptly notify the Engineer
. in writing and any necessary changes shall be adjusted as provided in Section 13,
Changes in the Work.
GC-9
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
GC-ll.
I
o
I
I
U
.1
GC-12.
PROTECTION OF WORK. PROPERTY AND PERSONS:
1.
The Contractor will be responsible for initiating. maintaining and supervising al \ safety
precautions and programs in connection with the work. He will take all necessary
precautions for the safety of and \vill provide the necessary protection to prevent
damage, injury or loss to all employees on the work and other persons who may be
affected thereby, all the work and all materials or equipment to be incorporated
therein, whether in storage on or off the site or other property at the site or adjacent
thereto, including trees, shrubs, lawns, walks. pavements. roadways. structures and
utilities not designated for removal, relocation or replacement in the course of
construction,
2.
The Contractor wi II comply with all applicable laws, ordinances, rules, regulations and
orders of any public body havingjurisdiction, He will erect and maintain, as required
by the conditions and progress of the work, all necessary safeguards for safety and
protection. He will notify the owners of adjacent utilities when prosecution of the
\vork may affect them. The Contractor will remedy all damage, injury or loss to any
property caused, directly or indirectly, in whole or in part, by the Contractor, and
subcontractor or anyone directly or indirectly employed by any of them or anyone for
whose acts any of them are liable, except damage or loss attributable to the bult of
the Contract Documents or to the acts or omissions of the Owner or the Engineer or
anyone employed by either of them or anyone for \-vhose acts either of them may be
liable and not attributable, directly or indirectly, in whole or in part. to the fault or
negligence of the Contractor.
"
.),
I n emergencies affecting the safety of persons or the \vork or property at the si te or
adjacent thereto, the Contractor, without special instructions or authorization from
the Engineer or Owner, shall act to prevent threatened damage, injury or loss. He will
give the Engineer prompt written notice of any significant changes in the work or
deviations from the Contract Documents caused thereby and a Change Order shall be
issued covering the changes and deviations involved.
4.
The work under this Contract in every respect shall be at the risk of the Contractor
until finished and accepted, except to damage or injury caused directly by the Owner's
agents or employees.
SUPERVISION BY CONTRACTOR:
1.
The Contractor will supervise and direct the work. He will be solely responsible for
the means, methods, techniques, sequences and procedures of construction, The
Contractor will employ and maintain on the work a qualified supen'isor or
superintendent who shall have been designated in \vriting by the Contractor as the
Contractor's representative at the site. The supervisor shall have full authority to act
GC-IO
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
D
I
I
GC-13.
GC-14.
I
I
I
I
m
I
GC-15.
on the behalf of the Contractor and all communications given to the supervisor shall
be as binding as if given to the Contractor. The supervisor shall be present on the site
at all times as required to perform adequate supervision and coordination of the work.
CHANGES IN THE WORK:
I.
The O\vner may at any time as the need arises, order changes within the scope of the
work without invalidating the Agreement. I f such changes increase or decrease the
amount due under the Contract Documents or in the time required for performance
of the work, an equitable adjustment shall be authorized by Change Order.
2.
The Engineer, also, may at any time, by issuing a field order, make changes in the
details of the work, The Contractor shall proceed with the performance of any
changes in the work so ordered by the Engineer unless the Contractor believes that
such tield order entitles him to a change in the contract price or time or both, in which
event he shall give the Engineer written notice thereof within ten (10) days after the
receipt of the ordered change pending the receipt of an executed change order or
further instruction from the Owner.
CHANGES IN CONTRACT PRICE:
1.
The contract price may be changed only by a change order. The value of any work
covered by a change order or of any claim for increase or decrease in the contract
price shall be determined by one or more of the following methods in the order of
precedence listed below:
1,1 Unit prices previously approved.
1,2 An agreed lump sum.
1.3 The actual cost for labor, direct overhead, materials, supplies, equipment and
other services necessary to complete the work. In addition there shall be
added an amount to be agreed upon but not to exceed fifteen (15) percent of
the actual cost of the work to cover the cost of general overhead and profit.
TIME FOR COMPLETION AND LIQUIDATED DAMAGES:
1.
The date of beginning and the time for completion of the work are essential conditions
of the Contract Documents and the work embraced shall be commenced on the date
speciJied in the Notice to Proceed.
2.
The Contractor will proceed with the work at such rate of progress to insure full
completion within the contract time. It is expressly understood and agreed. by and
between the Contractor and the Owner, that the contract time for the completion of
the work described herein is a reasonable time, taking into consideration the average
GC-11
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
m
I
I
I
I
m
I
I
GC-16.
cI imatic and economic conditions and other factors prevailing in the locality of the
work.
...,
.J,
Ifthe Contractor shall fail to complete the work within the contract time or extension
of time granted by the Owner, then the Contractor will pay to the Owner the amount
for liquidated damages as specified in the bid for each calendar day that the
Contractor shall be in default after the time stipulated in the Contract Documents,
4,
The Contractor shall not be charged with liquidated damages or any excess cost when
the delay in completion of the work is due to the following and the Contractor has
promptly given written notice of such delay to the Owner or Engineer.
4, I To any preference, priority or allocation order duly issued by the Owner.
4.2 To unforeseeable causes beyond the control and without the bult of
negligence of the Contractor, including but not restricted to, acts of God or
of the public enemy, acts of the O\vner. acts of another Contractor in the
performance of a contract with the Owner, fires, /loods, epidemics, quarantine
restrictions, strikes. freight embargoes and abnormal and unforeseeable
weather; and
4,] To any delays of subcontractors occasioned by any of the causes specified in
Paragraphs 4.] and 4.2 of this Article,
CORRECTION OF WORK:
1.
The Contractor shall promptly remove from the premises all work rejected by the
Engineer for failure to comply with the Contract Documents, whether incorporated
in the construction or not and the Contractor shall promptly replace and re-execute
the work in accordance with the Contract Documents and without expense to the
Owner and shall bear the expense of making good all work of other Contractors
destroyed or damaged by such removal or replacement.
2.
All removal and replacement work shall be done at the Contractor's expense, If the
Contractor does not take action to remove such rejected work within ten (10) days
after receipt of written notice, the Owner may remove such \\'ork and store the
materials at the expense of the Contractor.
...,
.J.
Any omissions or failure on the part of the Engineer to disapprove or reject any work
or material shall not be construed to be an acceptance of any defective \york or
material. The Contractor shall remove, at his own expense and shall rebuild and
replace same without extra charge and in default thereof the same may be done by the
Owner at the Contractor's expense or in case the Engineer shall not consider the
GC-12
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
GC-17.
GC-18.
I
I
I
I
I
I
defect of sufficient importance to require the Contractor to rebuild or replace any
imperfect work or material, he shall have the power and is hereby authorized to make
an equitable deduction from the stipulated price,
SUBSURFACE CONDITIONS:
1.
The Contractor shall promptly and before such conditions are disturbed, except in the
event of an emergency, notify the Owner by written notice of:
1.1 Subsurbce or latent physical conditions at the site differing materially from
those indicated in the Contract Documents,
1.2 Unknown physical conditions at the site, of an unusual nature. differing
materially from those ordinarily encountered and generally recognized as
inherent in work of the character provided for in the Contract Documents.
2,
The Owner shall promptly investigate the conditions and if he finds that such
conditions do so materially differ and cause an increase or decrease in the cost of, or
in the time required, for performance of the \vork, an equitable adjustment shall be
made and the Contract Documents shall be modified by a Change Order. Any claim
of the Contractor for adjustment hereunder shall not be allowed unless he has given
the required written notice; provided that the Owner may, ifhe determines the facts
so justify, consider and adjust any such claims asserted before the date of final
payment.
SUSPENSION OF THE WORK, TERMINATION AND DELAY:
I.
The Owner may, at any time and without cause, suspend the work or any portion
thereof for a period of not more than ninety days or such further time as agreeelupon
by the Contractor, by written notice to the Contractor. The Engineer shall fix the elate
on which work shall be resumed. The Contractor will resume that work on the date
so fixed. The Contractor will be allowed an increase in the contract price, an
extension of the contract time, or both, directly attributable to any suspension.
2,
]1' the Contractor is adjudged bankrupt or insolvent. or if he makes a general
nssignment for the benefit of his creditors or if a trustee or receiver is appointed for
the Contractor or for any of his property or ifhe tiles a petition to take advantage of
any debtor's act to reorganize under the bankruptcy or applicable laws or if he
repeatedly fails to supply sufficient skilled workmen or suitable materials or
eq ui pment, or if he repeatedly fails to make prompt payments to subcontractors or for
labor. materials or equipment or ifhe disregards laws, ordinances. rules, regulations
or orders of any public body 'having jurisdiction of the work or if he disregards the
authority of the Engineer, or if, in the opinion of the Engineer, the Contractor fails to
GC-13
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
make satisfactory progress in prosecuting the work, or if he otherwise violates any
provision of the Contract Documents, then the Owner may, without prejudice to any
other right or remedy and after giving the Contractor and his Surety a minimum often
(10) days from delivery of a written notice, terminate the services of the Contractor
and take possession of the Project and of all materials. equipment. tools, construction
equipment and machinery thereon owned by the Contractor and finish the work by
whatever method he may deem expedient. [n such case, the Contractor shall not be
entitled to receive any further payment until the work is finished. If the unpaid
balance of the Contract Price exceeds the direct ancl indirect costs of completing the
Project, including compensation for additional professional services. such excess shall
be paid to the Contractor. If such costs exceed such unpaid balance. the Contractor
will pay the difference to the Owner. Such costs incurred by the O'vvner will be
determined by the Engineer and incorporated in a Change Order.
....
.."
The Contractor must obtain permission from the Engineer before any equipment can
be removed from the job site, In the event such equipment is removed without the
Engineer's approval, the job \vill be terminated until such time as the equipment is
returned to the project and any time and money lost by the Contractor as a result of
moving the equipment shall be absorbed by the Contractor.
4.
Where the Contractor's services have been so terminate by the Owner. said
term i nation shall not affect any right of the Owner against the Contractor then ex isting
or \vhich may thereafter accrue, Any retention or payment of monies by the Owner
due the Contractor will not release the Contractor from compliance with the Contract
Documents,
5.
After ten (10) days from delivery of a written notice to the Contractor and the
Engineer, the Owner, may, without cause and without prejudice to any other right or
remedy, elect to abandon the Project and terminate the Contract. In such case, the
Contractor shall be paid for all work executed and any expense sustained plus
reasonable prolit.
5.
I f, through no act or fault of the Contractor, the work is suspended for a period of
more than ninety (90) days by the Owner or under an order of court or other public.
authority of the Engineer fails to act on any request for payment within thirty (30)
days after it is submitted or the Owner fails to pay the Contractor substantially the
sum approved by the Engineer within thirty (30) days orits approval and presentation,
then the Contractor may after ten (10) days from delivery of a written notice to the
Owner and the EngiHeer, terminate the Contract and recover from the Owner payment
for all work executed and all expenses sustained, In addition, and in lieu of
terminating the Contract, if the Engineer has failed to act on a request for payment or
irthe Owner has failed to make any payment as aforesaid. the Contractor may. upon
ten ( 10) clays notice to the Owner and the Engineer. stop the work unti I he has been
GC-14
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
GC-19.
I
I
I
I
I
I
paid all amounts then due, in which event and upon resumption of the work, Change
Orders shall be issued for adjusting the contract price or extending the contract time
or both to compensate for the costs and delays attributable to the stoppage of the
work.
6.
If the performance of all or any portion of the work is suspended, delayed, or
interrupted as a result ofa failure of the Owner or the Engineer to act w'ithin the time
specified in the Contract Documents, or ifno time is specitied, within reasonable time,
an adjustment in the contract price or an extension of the contract time or both. shall
be made by Change Order to compensate the Contractor for the costs and delays
necessarily caused by the failure of the Owner or the Engineer.
rA YMENTS TO THE CONTRACTOR:
1.
Between the first (I st) and the tifth (5th) of each month. the Contractor will submit
to the Engineer a partial payment estimate filled out and signed by the Contractor on
an approved form covering the work performed during the period covered by the
partial payment estimate and supported by such data as the Engineer may reasonably
require, If payment is requested on the basis of materials and equipment not
incorporated in the work but delivered and suitably stored at or near the site, the
partial payment estimate shall also be accompanied by such supporting data,
satisfactory to the Owner, as will establish the O\vner's title to the material and
equipment and protect his interest therein, including applicable insurance. The
Engineer wilL within ten days after receipt of each partial payment estimate. either
indicate in writing his approval of payment and present the partial payment estimate
to the Owner, or return the partial payment estimate to the Contractor indicating in
writing his reasons for refusing to approve payment. In the latter case, the Contractor
may make the necessary corrections and resubmit the partial payment estimate. The
Owner will, within ten days of presentation to him of an approved partial payment
estimate, pay the Contractor a progress payment on the basis of the approved partial
payment estimate, The Owner shall retain ten (J 0%) percent of the amount of each
payment until final completion and acceptance of all work covered by the Contract
Documents. The Owner at any time, however, after tifty (50%) percent of the work
has been completed, ifhe finds that satisfactory progress is being made, shall make
payment on the current and remaining estimates, in full. so that the retained
percentage at the completion of the work \vill be approximately five (5%) percent.
On completion and acceptance of a part of the work on which the price is stated
separately in the Contract Documents, payment may be made in full, including
retained percentages, less authorized deductions,
2.
The request for payment may also include an allowance for the cost of such major
materials and equipmei1t which are suitably stored either at or near the site,
GC-15
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
..,
.),
I
I
I
I
I
~.I
All work covered by partial payment shall thereupon become the sole property of the
Owner, but this provision shall not be construed as rei ieving the Contractor of the sole
responsibility for the care and protection of the work upon which payments have been
made or the restoration of any damaged work, or as a waiver of the right of the
Owner to require the fultillment of all terms of the Contract Documents,
4,
Upon completion and acceptance of the work, the Engineer shall issue a certificate
attached to the final payment request that the work has been accepted by him under
the conditions of the Contract Documents, The entire balance found to be due the
Contractor, including the retained percentages shall be paid to the Contractor. except
such sums as may be lawfully retained by the Owner Ic)!' saving the Owner or the
Owner's agents harmless from all claims growing out of the lawful demands of
Subcontractors. laborers, workmen, mechanics, materialmen and furnishers of
mach i nery and parts thereof, equipment, tools and supp lies, incurred in the
furtherance of the performance of the work. The Contractor shall. at the Owner's
request furnish satisfactory evidence that all obligations of the nature designated
above have been paid, discharged, or waived. I f the Contractor hlils to do so, the
Owner may, after having notified the Contractor, either pay unpaid bills or withhold
from the Contractor's unpaid compensation a sum of money deemed reasonably
sufficient to pay any and all such lawful claims until satisbctory e\idence is furnished
that all liabilities have been fully discharged whereupon payment to the Contractor
shall be resumed. in accordance with the terms of the Contract Documents. but in no
event shall the provisions of this sentence be construed to impose any obligations
upon the Owner to either the Contractor, his Surety, or any third party. In paying any
unpaid bills of the Contractor, any payment so made by the Owner shall be considered
as a payment made under the Contract Documents by the Owner to the Contractor
and the Owner shall not be liable to the Contractor for any such payments made in
good faith.
5.
If the Owner htils to make payment 30 days after approval by the Engineer, in
addition to other remedies available to the Contractor. there shall be added to each
such payment, interest at the maximum legal rate commencing on the first day after
said payment is due and continuing until the payment is received by the Contractor.
GC-16
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
GC-20.
GC-21.
ACCEPTANCE OF FINAL PAYMENT AS RELEASE:
1.
The acceptance by the Contractor of final payment shall be and shall operate as a
release to the Owner of all claims and all liability to the Contractor other than claims
in stated amounts as may be specifically excepted by the Contractor for all things done
or furnished in connection with this \vork and for every act and neglect of the Owner
and other relating to or arising out of this \vork, Any payment however. tinal or
otherwise, shall not release the Contractor or his Sureties from any obligations under
the Contract Documents or the Performance Bond and Payment Bonds.
INSURANCE:
1.
The Contractor shall purchase and maintain during the life of this Contract such
insurance as will protect him from claims set forth below which may arise out of or
result from the Contractor's execution of the work, whether such execution by himself
or by any Subcontractor or by anyone directly or indirectly employed by any of them
or by anyone for whose acts any of them may be liable.
1.1 Claims under Workman's Compensation, disability benefit and other similar
employee benefit acts,
1,2 Claims for damages because of bodily injury. occupational sickness or disease
or death of his employees,
1.3 Claims for damages because of bodily injury, sickness or disease or death of
any person other than his employees,
1.4 Claims for damages insured by usual personal injury liability coverage which
are sustained (I) by any person as a result of an offense directly or indirectly
related to the employment of such person by the Contractor or (2) by any
other person; and
1.5 Claims for damages because of injury to or destruction of tangible property,
including loss of use resulting therefrom,
2,
Certificates of I nsurance acceptable to the Owner shall be ti led wi th the Owner prior
to commencement of the work, These Certificates shall contain a provision that
coverages afforded under the policies will not be canceled unless at least fifteen (15)
days prior written notice has been given to the Owner.
....
-) .
The Contractor shall procure and maintain, at his own expense. during the life of the
Contract, liability insurance as hereinafter specified,
GC-17
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
3.1
Contractor's General Public liability and Property Damage insurance including
vehicle coverage issued to the Contractor and protecting him from all claims
for personal injury, including death, and all claims for destruction of or
damage to property, arising out of or in connection with any operations under
the Contract Documents, \vhether such operations be by himself or by any
Subcontractor under him or anyone directly or indirectly employed by the
Contractor or by a Subcontractor under him, Insurance shall be written with
a limit of liability of not less than $200,000 for all damages arising out of
bodily injury, including death, at any time resulting therefrom, sustained by
anyone person in anyone accident; and a limit of liability of not kss than
$500,000 foI' any such damages sustained by two or more persons in anyone
accident. Insurance shall be written \vith a limit of liabilitv of not less than
" ..
$100,000 for all property damage sustained by anyone person in anyone
accident; and a limit ofliability of not less than $200.000 for any such damage
sustained by two or more persons in anyone accident.
" ')
-, .-
The Contractor shall acquire and maintain, if appl icable, Fi re and Extended
Coverage insurance upon the Project to the full insurable value thereoffor the
benefit of the Owner, the Contractor and Subcontractor as their interest may
appear. This provision shall in no way release the Contractor or Contractor's
Surety from obligations under the Contract Documents to fully compkte the
Project.
4.
The Contractor shall procure and maintain, at his own expense, during the life of the
Contract, in accordance with the provisions of the laws of the state in which the work
is performed, Workman's Compensation Insurance, including occupational disease
provisions, for all of his employees at the site of the project and in case any work is
sublet, the Contractor shall require such Subcontractor similarly to provide
Workman's Compensation Insurance, including occupational disease provision for all
ofthe latter's employees unless such employees are covered by the protection atlorded
by the Contractor. I n case any class of employees engaged in hazardous work under
this Contract at the site of the Project is not protected uncleI' \Vorkman's
Compensation statute, the Contractor shall provide and shall cause each
Subcontractor to provide adequate and suitable insurance for the protection of his
employees not otherwise protected,
5,
The Contractor shall secure, ifapplicable, "All Risk" type Builder's Risk Insurance for
work to be performed, Unless specifically authorized by the Owner, the amount of
such insurance shall not be less than the contract price totaled in the bid, The policy
shall cover not les's than the losses due to fire, explosion. hail, lightening, vandalism,
malicious mischief, wind, collapse, riot, aircraft and smoke during the contract time
and until the work is accepted by the Owner. The policy shall name asthe insured the
Contractor, the Engineer and the Owner.
GC-I8
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
.1
GC-22.
GC-23.
GC-24.
CONTRACT SECURITY:
1.
The Contractor shall, within ten (10) days after the receipt of the Notice of Award,
furnish the Owner with a Performance Bond and a Payment Bond in penal sums equal
to the amount of the contract price, conditioned upon the performance by the
Contractor of all undertakings, covenants, terms, cond i lions and agreements of the
Contract Documents and upon the promptpayment by the Contractor to all persons
supplying labor and materials in the prosecution of the work provided by the Contract
Documents. Such bonds shall be executed by the Contractor and a corporate bonding
company licensed to transact business in the state in which the work is to be
performed anclnamed on the current list of "Surety Companies Acceptable on Federal
Bonds" as published in the Treasury Department Circular Number 570. The expense
of these bonds shall be borne by the Contractor. I I' at any time a Surety on any such
bond is declared a bankrupt or loses its right to do business in the state in which the
work is to be performed or is removed from the list of Surety Companies accepted on
Federall3onds, Contractor shall within ten (10) days after notice from the Owner to
do so, substitute an acceptable bond (or bonds) in such form and sum and signed by
such other Surety or Sureties as may be satisfactory to the Owner. The premiums on
such bonds shall be paid by the Contractor. No further payments shall be deemed due
nor shall be made until the new Surety or Sureties shall have furnished an acceptable
bond to the Owner.
ASSIGNMENTS:
1.
Neither the Contractor nor the Owner shall sell. transfer. assign or othen-vise dispose
of the Contract or any portion thereof, or his right, title or interest therein. or his
obligations thereunder, without written consent of the other party.
INDEMNIFICATION:
1.
The Contractor wi II indemnify and hold harmless the Owner and the Engi neeI' and
their agents and employees from and against all claims, damages, losses and expenses
including attorney's fees arising out of or resulting from the performance of the work,
provided that any such claim, damage, loss or expense is attributable to bodily injury,
sickness, disease or death, or to injury to or destruction of tangible property, including
the loss of use resulting therefrom; and is caused in whole or in part by any negligent
or willful act or omission of the Contractor and Subcontractor. anyone directly or
indirectly employed by any of them or anyone for whose acts any of them may be
liable.
2.
In any and all claims against the Owner or the Engineer or any of their agents or
employees, by an employee of the ContractoL SubcontractoL anyone directly or
indirectly employed by any of them, or anyone for whose acts any of them may be
GC-19
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
,I
.1
GC-25.
GC-26.
liable, the indemnification obligation shall not be limited in any way by any limitation
on the amount or type of damages, compensation or benefits payable by or for the
Contractor or any Subcontractor under Workman's Compensation acts, disability
benefit acts or other employee benefits acts,
"
.),
The obligation of the Contractor under this paragraph shall not e:\tend to the I iabi] ity
of the Engineer. his agents or employees arising out of the preparation or approval of
maps, drawings. opinions, reports, surveys, change orders. design or specifications.
SEP ARA TE CONTRACTS:
t.
The Owner reserves the right to let other contracts in connection with this Project.
The Contractor shall afford other contractors reasonable opportunity for the
introduction and storage of their materials and the execution of their work and shall
properly connect and coordinate his work with theirs. If the proper execution or
results of any part of the Contractor's work depends upon the \vork of any other
Contractor, the Contractor shall inspect and promptly report to the Engineer any
defects in such work that render it unsuitable for such proper execution and results,
2,
The O\vner may perform additional work related to the Project by himself or he may
let other contracts containing provisions similar to these. The Contractor will afford
the other Contractors who are parties to such contracts (or the Owner, if he is
. performing the additional work himself), reasonable opportunity for the introduction
and storage of materials and equipment and the execution of the work and shall
properly connect and coordinate his work with theirs,
"
.),
I f the performance of additional work by other Contractors or the Owner is not noted
in the Contract Documents prior to the execution of the Contract, written notice
thereof shall be given to the Contractor prior to starting any such additional work,
I fthe Contractor believes that the performance of such additional work. by the Owner
or others involves him in additional expense or entitles him to an e:\tension of the
contract time. he may make a claim therefor as provided in Sections GC-13 and GC-
14,
SUBCONTRACTING:
1.
The Contractor may utilize the services of specialty Subcontractors on those parts of
the work which, under normal contracting practices. are performed by specialty
Subcontractors,
2.
The Contractor shall not award work to Subcontractor(s). in excess of tiftv (50%)
percent of the Contract Price, without prior wri tten approval of the Owner.
GC-20
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
4,
GC-27.
GC-28.
-.
.),
The Contractor shall be fully responsible to the Owner for the acts and omissions of
his Subcontractors, and of persons either directly or indirectly employed by them, as
he is for the acts and omissions of person directly employed by him.
The Contractor shall cause appropriate provisions to be inserted in all subcontracts
relative to the work to bind the Subcontractors to the Contractor bv the terms of the
Contract Documents insofar as applicable to the work of Subcontractors and to give
the Contractor the same power as regards terminating any subcontract that the Owner
may exercise over the Contractor under any provision of the Contract Documents,
5.
Nothing contained in this Contract shall create any contractual relation bet\veen any
Subcontractor and the Owner.
ENGINEER'S AUTHORITY:
1.
The Engineer shall act as the Owner's representative during the construction period.
He shall decide questions which may arise as to quality and acceptability of materials
furnished and work performed, He shall interpret the intent of the Contract
Documents in a fair and unbiased maImer. The Engineer will make visits to the site
and determine if the work is proceeding in accordance with the Contract Documents,
2.
The Contractor will be held strictly to the intent of the Contract Documents in regard
to the quality of materials, 'vvorkmanship and execution of the work. Inspections may
be made at the factory or fabrication plant or the source of material supply,
..,
.).
The Engi nee l' wi II not be responsible for the construction means, controls, techniques,
sequences, procedures, or construction safety,
4,
The Engineer shall promptly make decisions relative to interpretation of the Contract
Documents,
LAND AND RIGHTS-OF-WAY:
1.
Prior to issuance of Notice to Proceed, the Owner shall obtain all land and rights-of..
way necessary for carrying out and for the completion of the work to be performed
pursuant to the Contract Documents, unless otherwise mutually agreed,
2.
The Owner shall provide to the Contractor information which delineates and describes
the lands owned and rights-of-way acquired,
..,
.).
The Contractor shall provide at his own expense and without liability to the Owner
any additional land and access thereto that the Contractor may desire for temporary
construction 1~1cilities, or for storage of materials.
GC-21
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
GC-29.
GC-30.
GC-31.
GC-32.
GC-33.
GUARANTEE:
1.
The Contractor shall guarantee all materials and equipment furnished and work
performed for a period of one (1) year from the date of substantial completion, The
Contractor warrants and guarantees for a period of one (I) year ti'om the date of
substantial completion of the system that the completed system is free from all defects
due toj~1ulty materials or workmanship and the Contractor shall promptly make such
corrections as may be necessary by reason of such defects including the repairs orany
damage to other parts of the system resulting from such defects, The Owner will give
notice of observed defects with reasonable promptness. In the event that the
Contractor should bil to make such repairs, adjustments or other work that may be
necessary by such defects, the Owner may do so and charge the Contract01' the cost
thereby incurred, The Performance Bond shall remain in full force and effect though
the guarantee period,
TAXES:
1.
The Contractor will pay all sales, consumer, use and other similar taxes required by
the law of the place where the work is performed,
\-YORK AD.JACENT TO RAIL\-YAY OR OTHER PROPERTY:
1.
Whenever the work embraced in this Contract is near the tracks, structures or
buildings of the Owner or of other railways, persons, or property, the work shall be
so conducted as not to interfere with the movement of trains or other operations of
the railway, or, ifin any case such interference be necessary, the Contractor shall not
proceed until he has first obtained specific authority and directions therefor from the
proper designated officer of the Owner and has the approval of the Engineer.
ORDER AND DISCIPLINE:
1.
~rhe Contractor shall at all times enforce strict discipline and good order among his
employees and any employee of the Contractor who shall appear to be incompetent,
disorderly or intemperate or in any other way disqual ified for or unfaithful to the work
entrusted to him, shall be discharged immediately on the request of the Engineer and
he shall not again be employed on the work with the Engineer's written consent.
\-Y ARNING DEVICES AND SIGNS:
1.
The Contractor shall furnish, erect, paint and maintain warning devices when
construction is onor liear public streets for the protection of vehicular and pedestrian
traffic. Such devices will be in accordance with the Georgia Manual on Uniform
GC-22
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
GC-34.
GC-35.
GC-36.
GC-37.
Traffic Control Devices for Street and Highways, July, 1962, "Traffic Control for
Highway Construction and Maintenance Operations," Section Ill-I through 1[[-75,
2,
On a 20" x 30" sign, mounted on a solid post, 8 feet above the ground, indicating the
name and night phone number ofthe Contractor in 4" letters, shall be erected at each
end of the project throughout the construction and maintenance periods, The
Contractor may remove the sign follovling the maintenance period,
SPECIAL RESTRICTIONS:
I.
No work shall be allowed after the hours of darkness or on Sunday \vithout
permission of the Owner.
AS-BUILT DRAWINGS:
I.
The Contractor shall furnish to the Engineer three (3) sets of markedupdrmvings for
an "As-built" record showing all deviations from the Contract Dnl\\ings, The marked
up sets shall include actual dimensions from permanent markers accurately locating
all underground pi pi ng,
CONTRACTOR NOT TO HIRE EMPLOYEES OF THE OWNER:
I.
The Contractor shall not employ or hire any of the employees of the Owner.
DRA'VINGS:
The Owner will furnish to the Contractor, free of charge, all copies of drawings and
specifications reasonably necessary for the execution of the work, Location of all features of the
work included in the Contract are indicated on the Contract Drawings, The following drawings
comprise the plans for the Contract:
Note:
GC-38.
The Contract Drawings are listed under Special Condition SC-02., LIST OF
ORA WINGS:,
FIELD OFFICE FACILITIES:
The Contractor shall provide, at a point convenient to the work. suitable otlice
facilities for housing records, plans and contract documents. A telephone shall be provided at the
Contractor's office for expediting the work and be made available for the use of the Engineer. A
complete and up-to-date set of the plans and specifications shall be available at the tield office at all
times that the work is in progress.
GC-23
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
GC-39.
RIGHTS-OF-'VAY:
The Owner will furnish all land and rights-of-way necessary for the carrying out of this
contract and the completion of the work herein contemplated and will use due diligence in acquiring
said land and rights-of-way as speedily as possible, But it is possible that all land and rights-of-way
may not be obtained as herein contemplated before construction begins. in which event the Contractor
shall begin his \vork upon such land and rights-of-way as the Owner may have previously acquired
and no claim for damages whatsoever will be allowed by reason of the delay in obtaining the
remaining lands and rights-of-way, Should the Owner be prevented or enjoined from proceeding with
the work or from authorizing its prosecution, either before the commencement. by reason of any
litigation or by reason of its inability to procure any lands or rights-of-\vay for the said work, the
Contractor shall not be enti tied to make or assert any clai m for damage by reason 0 f said delay or to
withdrmv 1'I-om the contract except by consent ofthe Owner; but time for completion of the work will
be extended to compensate for the time lost by such delay; such determination to be set forth in
writing and approved by the Owner.
GC-40.
ESTIMATE OF QUANTITIES:
The estimated quantities of work to be done and materials to be furnished under this
contract ifshown in any of the docmnents including the bid are given only for use in comparing bids
and to indicate approximately the total amount of the contract and the right is especially reserved
except as herein othenvise specifically limited to increase or diminish them as may be deemed
reasonably necessary or desirable by the Owner to complete the \vork contemplated by this contract
and such increase or diminution shall in no way vitiate this contract nor shall any such increase or
diminution give cause for claims or liability for damages.
GC-41.
EXISTING STRUCTURES AND UTILITIES:
The existence and location of structures and underground utilities indicated on the
plans are not guaranteed and shall be investigated and verified in the field by the Contractor before
starting work, The Contractor shall be held responsible for any damage to and for maintenance and
protection of existi ng uti I ities and structures.
GC-42.
CONTRACTOR'S BREAKDOWN OF LUMP SUM PAYMENT ITEMS:
The Contractor shall, immediately after the contract has been awarded, submit to the
Engineer for his approval, a breakdown showing estimates of all costs apportioned to the major
elements of equipment, material and labor comprising the total work included under any of the lump
sum items shown in the proposal. These estimates as approved wi 11 serve as the basis for esti mating
of payments due on all progress estimates.
GC-24
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
GC-43.
PRIOR USE BY O\VNER:
Prior to completion of the work, the Owner may take over the operation and/or use
of the incompleted project or portions thereof. Such prior use of the facilities by the Ow'ner shall not
be deemed as acceptance of any work or relieve the Contractor from any of the requirements of the
Contract Documents.
GC-44.
CLEANING UP:
The Contractor shall keep the premises free from the accumulation of waste material
and rubbish anclupon completion of the work, prior to final acceptance of the completed project by
the Owner. he shall remove from the premises all rubbish, surplus materials. implements. tools. etc"
anclleave his work in a clean condition, satisfactory to the Engineer.
GC-45.
MAINTENANCE OF TRAFFIC:
In any work within the public right-of-way. the Contractor shall provide adequate
warning and protection for pedestrian and vehicular trat1ic from any hazard arising out of the
Contractor's operations and will be held responsible for any damage caused by negligence on his part
or by the improper placing of or t:1ilure to display danger signs and road lanterns. All traftic lanes,
sidewalks and driveways will be kept open and clear at all times except as provided belm\', The
Contractor shall not block traftic on any street more than 30 minutes or without written permission
from such agency, Before leaving the work each night, it shall be placed in such condition as to cause
the least possible hazard therefrom. Should the Contractor fail to comply with the provisions ofthis
paragraph, the Owner may, with his own forces, provide signs, flagmen, barricades and/or
passageways or clear the pavement and deduct the cost thereof from sums due to the Contractor.
GC-46.
MAINTENANCE OF ACCESS:
The Contractor will be required to maintain access to business establishments during
all time they are open for business, to churches, schools and other institutions during the time they
are open and to all residential and other occupied buildings or facilities at all times. Bridges across
open trenches and work areas will be required to provide vehicular and pedestrian access, Bridges
with handrail protection will be required for crosswalks at street intersections, It is recogniud that
it will be necessary to ren'iove bridges and to block cross traffic while equipment is in operation, The
Contractor shall, however, plan and pursue his operations so as to minimize the time that direct
entrance is blocked.
GC-47.
EROSION CONTROL AND RESTORATION OF PROPERTY:
The Contractor will be required to schedule his work and perform operations in such
a manner that siltation and bank erosion will be minimized during all phases of construction, Any
areas disturbed during the course of construction shall be restored to a condition equal or better than
the original condition,
OC-25
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
GC-48.
BYPASSING SE\VAGE:
The Contractor will be required to schedule and coordinate construction sequences
and to use temporary construction and other approved methods which will minimize the bypassing
of sewage during construction of the sewer facilities, The diversion of sewerage to open ditches or
streams \vill not be permitted.
GC-49.
SAFETY AND HEALTH REGULATIONS:
The Contractor shall comply with the Department of Labor Safety and Health
Regulations for construction promulgated under the Occupational and Health Act of 1970 (PL31-
596) and under Section 107 of the Contract Work Hours and Safety Standards Act (PL91-54),
GC-50.
PRE-CONSTRUCTION CONFERENCE:
A pre-construction conference shall be held at an acceptable time to the O\vner and
the Contractor prior to the "Notice to Proceed" to coordinate the work and satisf): all requirements
of the Contract Documents,
GC-26
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
SECTioN SC-O
INDEX TO SPECIAL CONDITIONS
SECTION
TITLE
SC-O 1.
SC-02,
SC-03.
SC-04,
SC-05,
SC-06,
SC-07,
SC-OS.
SC-09,
SC-lO,
SC-I1.
SC-12.
SC-13.
SC-14,
SC-15.
SC-16.
SC-17.
SC- (S,
SC-19,
SC-20.
SC-21.
SC-22,
SC-23,
Scope
List of Drawings
Bonds
Project Sign
Protection of the Environment
Temporary Toilets
Plans and Specifications Furnished
Record Drawings
Shop Drawings
Existing StrLlctures
Sal vage Material
Referenced Specifications
Traffic Control
Surveys
Construction Order and Schedule
Consulting Engineers
Inspection and Testing of Work
Site Access
Tree Save
Georgia Prompt Pay Act
Disputes
Interest Not Earned on Retainage
Equivalent Materials
SC-O
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
SC-O 1.
SCOPE:
SECTION SC-O
SPECIAL CONDITIONS
The project referred to in the Agreement shall consist offurnishing all materials, labor,
machinery, etc, necessary to install approximately one five million gallon ground storage tank and
pump station with all related appurtenances.
SC-02.
LIST OF DRAWINGS:
The following drawings, prepared by Cranston, Robertson & Whitehurst. P,C"
Augusta, Georgia, comprise the plans for the project:
SHEET
NO.
CI-O
Cl-I
C2-1
C2-2
C2-J
C2-4
C3-1
C4-1
C4-2
C5-1
C5-2
S- 1
S-2
S-3
S-4
S-5
E-l
E-2
TITLE
Cover Sheet
Construction Notes
Site Plan
Soil Erosion & Sedimentation Control Plan
Staking Plan & Yard Piping Elevations
Green Space & Tree Planting Plan
Pump Station Piping Plan, Elevations & Sections
Ground Storage Tank Plan & Sections
Ground Storage Tank Details
Site Details
Site Vaults - Details
General Structural Notes
Foundation & Roof Framing Plan
Building Elevations & Building Sections
Structural Details
Crane Rail & Hoist Details
Electrical Site Plan
Electrical Plan. Lighting and Power
SC-I
DATE
ORIGINAL
REVISED
9/28/99
9/28/99
9/28/99
9/28/99
9/28/99
9/28/99
9/28/99
9/28/99
9/28/99
9/28/99
9/28/99
9/28/99
9/28/99
9/28/99
9/28/99
9/28/99
9/28/99
9/28/99
I
I
I
I
I
I
I,
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
SC-03.
BONDS:
The Contractor will include in the lump sum payment for mobilization the cost of his
performance and payment bonds.
SC-04.
PROJECT SIGN:
The Contractor wi II furnish and install two (2) project signs at prom inent locations on
the construction site as directed by the Engineer. The signs will carry in a prominent manner the
names of the project. the Ow'ner. and the names of the Contractor and the Engineer. The sign shall
be constructed and erected on wood posts in a substantial manner. The full size stencil shall be
approved along with colors before fabrication, The Contractor shall include the cost of the project
sign in the lump sum bid item for iVlobilization,
SC-05.
PROTECTION OF THE ENVIRONMENT:
The Contractor wi II carefully schedule his work so that a minimum amount of exposed
earth will be subject to erosion by rainfall or wind, and he will provide means satisfactory to the
Engineer to minimize the transportation of silt and other deleterious material into the stream beds of
water courses adjacent to the project.
All chemicals used during project construction or furnished for project operation,
whether herbicide, pesticide, disinfectant, polymer, reactant or of other classification, must sho\v
approval of either EP A or USDA. Use of all such chemicals and disposal of residues shall be in
conformance with printed instructions,
SC-06.
TEMPORARY TOILETS:
Contractor shall provide temporary toilet facilities on the site for workmen employed
in the construction work. Toilets shall be adequate for the number of men employed and shall be
maintained in a clean and sanitary condition, Workmen shall be required to use only these toilets.
At completion of the work, toilets used by Contractor shall be removed and premises left in the
condition required by the Contract.
SC-07.
PLANS AND SPECIFICATIONS FURNISHED:
The Contractor will be furnished, free of charge, by the Owner up to five (5) sets of
direct black line prints together with a like number of complete bound specifications for construction
purposes. Additional sets of plans and/or specifications will be furnished to the Contractor at the cost
of reproduction upon his written request.
SC-08.
RECORD DRA'VINGS:
The Contractor will maintain in his office one complete set ofdrawings (including any
supplemental sketches) pertaining to the project upon which, at the end of each day's \\'ork any
deviations from the construction lines shown thereon and all changes ordered by the Engineer will
SC-2
I
I
'I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
be shown accurately in red pencil. Ifnecessary, supplemental drmvings will be made to show details
of deviations or changes, and these will be kept with the marked set. The drawings will be avai lable
to the Engineer for inspection during construction, Satisfactory progress toward the preparation of
the record drawings shall be a condition of approval of monthly payment estimates, At the
completion of construction, prior to submitting his estimate for final pavment. and as a condition for
payment thereof. three copies of the record drawings, satisfactorily completed. will be transmitted
to the Engineer.
SC-09.
SHOP ORA \VINGS:
The Contractor shall submit to the Engineer for his review shop drawings. cuts,
diagrams, bar lists, steel details, and other descriptive data on every item, where required on the
drawings or herein, The Contractor shall check all submittals and so indicate on each copy thereof.
Five copies of such shop drawings shall be submitted to the Engineer before ordering
of the material. Submittals which have not been checked by the Contractor will not be reviewed by
the Engineer. Reviews by the Engineer of submittals will cover only general conformity with the.
project requirements, while responsibility for detailed conformity shall remain with the Contractor.
The Contractor wi II be notified by mai I of the results of the subm i ttal reviews wi thin ten (10) days of
the receipt by the Engineer thereof.
SC-IO.
EXISTING STRUCTURES:
Where sidewalks, street signs, private signs, walls, sidewalks, fences, etc, are removed
in accomplishing the work, each and every item will be replaced in the same or better manner or
condition than that in which it was before construction began, The Contractor will protect and hold
harmless the Owner from any suit, action, or dispute whatever arising from the Contractor's work
adjacent to private property.
SC-l1.
SALVAGE MATERIAL:
All existing installations to be removed, including but not limited to masonry and
concrete rubble, asphalt, pipe, etc, will be disposed of at an approvecllocation by the Contractor.
SC-12.
REFERENCED SPECIFICATIONS:
Where specifications or standards of trade organizations and other groups are
referenced in these specitications, they are made as much a part of these specitications as if the entire
standard or specification were reprinted herein, The inclusion of the latest edition or revision of the
referenced specitication or standard is intended.
SC-13.
TRAFFIC CONTROL:
Traftic control shall conform to the Manual on Uniform Traff'ic Control Devices
(MUTCD) of the Federal Highway Administration, latest edition, The Contractor shall give prior
written notitication to and shall obtain the approval of the Augusta Fire Department. Police
SC-3
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Department, Emergency Medical Services, and the Augusta Traffic Engineering Department of any
street closures.
SC-14.
SURVEYS:
The Engineer has established base lines for locating the principal component parts of
the work, together with a suitable number of bench marks adjacent to the work. From the
information thus provided, the Contractor shall develop and make all detail surveys needed for
construction lines and elevations. The Contractor shall emplov on Iv Reld,istered Land Survevors or
Registered Professional Engineer to perform all detail surveys,
The Contractor will diligently preserve and maintain the position of all stakes,
reference points and bench marks after they are set and, in case of willful or careless destruction, he
shall be charged with the resulting expense and shall be responsible for any mistakes that may be
caused by their unnecessary loss or disturbance,
SC-15.
CONSTRUCTION ORDER AND SCHEDULE:
1.
The Contractor shall be responsible for the detailed order, schedule, and methods of
construction activities within the general guidelines specified for maintenance and
protection of highway and pedestrian, traffic; utility lines; drainage ways; adjacent
properties; and as otherwise specified,
2.
After notice to proceed and prior to the first payment on the contract the Contractor
shall submit the following for review:
A. Breakdown of contract price into units of cost for each item required to
complete the total work; this breakdown will be the basis for judging the
percentage complete at any time.
B. A statement of the order of procedure to be followed that will result in the
required protection and completion of the work within the overall contract
time,
C. A bar chart showing the percentage of each item schedules against time and
so scheduled that Contractor's order of construction is clearly shown,
3, With each request for payment the Contractor shall submit two copies of the bar chart
clearly marked to show the work completed at the date of the payment requested.
4. Progress Schedule.Requirements
A. Bar Chart Schedule: Prepare on maximum II inch by 17 inch sheet size for
each separate stage of Work as specified and shown, to include at least:
SC-4
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I, Identification and listing in chronological order of those activities
reasonably required to complete work, including, but not limited to,
subcontract work, major equipment design, factory testing, and
delivery dates, move-in and other preliminary activities, testing and
startup activities, Project close out and cleanup and specified work
sequences, constraints, and milestones, including Substantial
Completion date(s). Listings to be identified by Speci tication section
number.
2. Identify: (i) horizontal time frame by year, month, and week, (ii)
duration, early-start, and completion of each activity and sub-activity
and (iii) critical activities and Project tloat.
3. Provide sub-schedules to further define critical portions of the \vork,
4. Monthly schedule submissions: shO\v overall percent complete,
projected and actual, and completion progress by listed activity and
sub-activity.
5. Identify the critical path on the schedule,
B,
General:
l. Schedule(s) shall reflect work logic sequences, restraints, delivery
windows, review times, contract times and milestones set forth in the
Agreement, and shall begin with the date of Notice to Proceed and
conclude with the date of Final Completion.
2, The schedule requirement herein is the minimum required, Contractor
may prepare a more sophisticated schedule if such wi II aid Contractor
in execution and timely completion of work.
3. Base schedule on standard 5-day work week,
4.
When bar chart or network analysis schedules are specified. use
Primavera Project Planner (P3),. SureTrak latest version or a
compatible and approved soft'vvare.
5.
Adjust or confirm schedules on a monthly basis as follows:
Contractor shall submit to Engineer for acceptance proposed
adjustments in the progress schedule that will not change the contract
times (or milestones). Such adj ustments will conform generally to the
progress schedule then if effect and additionally will comply with any
provisions of the General Requirements applicable thereto.
SC-5
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Proposed adjustments in the progress schedule that will change the
contract times(or milestones) may only be made by a Change Order.
Use offloat suppression techniques such as preferential sequencing or
logic, speciallead/lag logic restraints, and extended activity times are
prohibited, and use of float time disclosed or implied by use of
alternate float-suppression techniques shall be shared to proportionate
benefits of Owner and Contractor.
Pursuant to above float-sharing requirement, no time extensions will
be granted nor delay damages paid until a delay occurs which (i)
impacts project's critical path, (ii) consumes available noat or
contingency time, and (iii) extends work beyond contract completion
clate,
SC-16.
CONSULTING ENGINEERS:
The Owner has engaged consulting engineers to assist the Director of Utilities. defined
herein as the Engineer, by preparing plans and specifications for the work and by providing certain
services during the bidding and construction phases of the project. The consulting engineer,
Cranston, Robertson & Whitehurst; P.C. are authorized to represent the Director of Utilities within
the limits of the various duties delegated and assigned to the firm by the Director. Nevertheless the
Director of Uti I ities remains the tinal authority hereunder and is the" Engineer" as used throughout
the Contract Documents,
SC-17.
INSPECTION AND TESTING OF \-YORK:
The Owner shall provide sufficient competent engineering personnel for the technical
observation and testing of the work.
The Engineer and his representatives shall at all times have access to the work
whenever it is in preparation or progress, and the Contractor shall provide proper facilities for such
access, and for inspections.
Inspectors shall have the power to stop work on account of a workman's
incompetency, drunkenness, or willful negligence or disregard of orders. An inspector may stop the
\.york entirely if there is not a sufficient quantity of suitable and approved materials or equipment on
the ground to carry it out properly or for any good and sufficient cause, Inspectors may not accept
on behalf of the Owner any material or workmanship which does not conform fully to the
requirements of the contract and they shall give no orders or directions under any possible
circumstances not in accordance with the Specifications. The Contractor shall furnish the inspector
with all required assistance to facilitate thorough inspection or the culling over or removal of
defective materials or for any other purpose requiring discharge of their duties for \vhich service no
additional allowance shall be made, The inspector shall, at all times, have full permission to take
samples of the materials that mayor may not be used in the work.
SC-6
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Any inspection provided by the Engineers is for the purpose of determining
compliance with provisions of the contract specifications and is in no \va)' a guarantee of the methods
or appliances use by the Contractor, nor for the safety of the job,
If the specifications? the Engineer's instructions, laws, ordinances, or any public
authority require any work to be specially tested or approved, the Contractor shall give the Engineer
timely notice of its readiness for inspection, and if the inspection is by an authority other than the
Engineer, of the date fixed fCll' such inspection, Inspections by the Engineer shall be made promptly,
and where practicable at the source of supply. If any work should be covered up without review or
consent of the Engineer, it must. if required by the Engineer, be uncovered for examination and
properly restored at the Contractor's expense,
Re-examination of any work may be ordered by the Engineer, and, if so ordered, the
work must be uncovered by the Contractor. If such work is found to be in accordance with the
Contract Documents, the Owner shall pay the cost of re-examination and replacement. If such work
is not in accordance \vith the Contra'ct Documents, the Contractor shall pay such cost.
The Owner will employ a qualified materials testing laboratory, hereinafter referred
to as the Laboratory, to monitor more fully on the Owner's behalf the quality of materials and work,
and to perform such tests as may be required under the Contract Documents as conditions for
acceptance of materials and work, The Laboratory will be solely responsible to and paid separately
by the Owner. The timing of the work of the Laboratory will be coordiriated by the Engineer through
his duly authorized inspector.
The Owner wi II bear the cost of testing a particular material or area of the work once,
Where retesting is required following corrective measures or under other circumstances, the
Contractor shall reimburse the Owner for the cost of additIonal testing.
SC-18.
SlTE ACCESS:
In order to minimize damage to existing paving, and landscaping, access to the site
for the Contractor's personnel and equipment will be restricted to the routes designated by the
Owner, The Contractor will be required to use only these routes unless prior written approval is
given by the Owner.
SC-19.
TREE SAVE:
Prior to beginning grading operations, the Contractor is to notify the Owner and the
Engineer so that those trees which are to be saved can be marked in the tield. Once these trees are
marked, the Contractor shall take every precaution, including tree protection fence, to save these
trees,
SC-20.
GEORGIA PROMPT PAY ACT:
This Agreement is intended by the Parties to, and does, supersede any and all
provisions of the Georgia Prompt Pay Act, O.C.G.A. Section 13-11-1. et seq. In the event any
SC-7
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
provision of this Agreement is inconsistent with any provision of the Prompt Pay Act, the provision
of this Agreement shall control.
SC-21.
DISPUTES:
All claims, disputes and other matters in question between the Owner and the
Contractor arising out of or relating to the Agreement, or the breach thereof, shall be decided in the
Superior' Court of Richmond County, Georgia. The Contractor, by executing this Agreement,
specifically consents to venue in RiclU110nd County and waives any right to contest the venue in the
Superior Court of Richmond County, Georgia,
SC-22.
INTEREST NOT EARNED ON RETAINAGE:
Notwithstanding any provision of the law to the contrary, the parties agree that no
interest shall be due to the Contractor on any sum held as retainage pursuant to this Agreement and
Contractor specifically waive any claim to same,
SC-23.
EQUIVALENT MATERIALS:
Notwithstanding any provision of the general conditions, there shall be no substitution
of materials that are not determined to be equivalent to those indicated or required in the contract
documents \vithout an amendment to the contract.
SC-8
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
INDEX TO TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
SECTION
TITLE
NO. OF PAGES
00220 Soil Investigation
02110 Clearing and Grubbing 2
02160' Shoring and Sheeting 2
02200 Grading 5
02210 Removal of Water 2
. 02220 Excavating and Backfilling for Structures 4
02221 Excavating, Trenching and Backfilling for Pipe Lines 5
02270 Erosion Control Measures ..,
-'
02510 Yard Piping 10
02513 Bituminous Paving and Base ..,
.)
02520 Miscellaneous Concrete 5
02721 Storm Sewer System 4
02831 Chain Link Fences and Gates 10
02930 Grassing (Bern'iuda) ..,
.)
03300 Cast-In-Place Concrete 10
04200 Unit Masonry 13
05120 Structural Steel 5
05310 Steel Deck ..,
.)
05600 Pre-Engineered Light Gauge Metal Truss Frames ..,
.)
07411 Manufactured Roof Panels 6
07620 Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim 5
08110 Steel Doors and Frames 5
INDEX -I
I
I SECTION TITLE NO. OF PAGES
I 08710 Door Hardware ....
.)
I 09900 Painting and Caulking 5
11500 Centrifugal Pumps 4
I 13414 Prestressed Concrete Ground Storage Tank 10
15100 Pump Control Valves ....
I .)
15200 Altitude Valves 2
I 15900 Pump and Valve Controls 2
16000 General 9
I 16010 Lighting and Power ....
.)
16015 Fuses 2
I 16020 Raceways 6
16030 Conductors ....
I .)
16040 Outlets 2
I 16050 Wiring Devices and Device Plates 4
16060 Lighting Fixtures and Lamps 2
I 16070 Disconnect Switches 2
1.6080 Dry Type Transformers 2
I 16090 Photo Control and Contractor 2
I 16100 Pull Boxes and Junction Boxes and Fittings
] 611 0 Grounding 6
I ]6]20 Equipment Identification
16130 Telephone Conduit and Outlet System
I 16160 Transient Voltage Surge Suppressor 4
16190 Engine Generator Set 8
I 16220 Construction Reviews Inspection and Testing 2
I
I INDEX -2
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
SECTION 00220
SOIL INVESTIGATION
PART 1 - GENERAL:
1.1 INVESTIGATION REPORT:
A. Soil and subsurface investigations were conducted at the site by CSRA Testing and
Engineering Co., Inc., the results of which are to be found in report CSRA Project
Number B-06599, dated September 1,1999, a copy of which is located in Appendix
"A" of these specifications.
1.2 INTERPRETATION:
A. Data concerning subsurface materials or conditions which is based upon surroundings,
test pits, or test borings, has been obtained by the Owner for the Engineer's use in
designing the project. Its accuracy or completeness is not guaranteed by the Owner
or the Engineer, and neither the Owner nor Engineer will be responsible in any way
for additional compensation for excavation work performed under the contract due
to Contractor's assumptions based on soil investigation data prepared solely for
Engineer's use.
00220-1
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
SECTION 02110
CLEARING AND GRUBBING
PART - GENERAL
1.1 SCOPE:
A. Clearing and grubbing shall consist of the removal and disposal of all trees, brush,
stumps, logs, grass, weeds, roots, decayed vegetable matter, posts, fences, stubs,
rubbish and all other objectionable matter resting on or protruding through the
original ground surface and occurring within the construction limits or rights-of-way
of any excavation, borrow area, or embankment.
1.2 CONSTRUCTION METHODS:
A. CLEARING: Clearing shall consist of the felling and cutting up, or the trimming of
trees, and the satisfactory disposal ofthe trees and other vegetation together with the
down timber, snags, brush and rubbish occurring within the areas to be cleared. Trees
and other vegetation, except such individual trees, groups of trees, and vegetation, as
may be indicated on the drawings to be left standing, and all stumps, roots and brush
in the areas to be cleat"ed shall be cut off one foot above the original ground surface.
Individual trees and groups of trees designated to be left standing within cleared areas
shall be trimmed of all branches to such heights and in such manner as may be
necessary to prevent interference with the construction operations. All limbs and
branches required to be trimmed shall be neatly cut close to the whole of the tree or
to main branches, and the cuts thus made shall be painted with an approved tree
wound paint. Individual trees, groups of trees, and other vegetation, to be left
standing, shall be thoroughly protected by barriers or by such other means as the
circumstances require. Clearing operations shall be conducted so as to prevent
damage by falling trees to trees left standing, to existing structures and installations,
and to those under construction, and so as to provide for the safety of employees and
others.
B. GRUBBING: Grubbing shall consist of the removal and disposal of all stumps, roots
and matted roots from the site as indicated on the drawings. In foundation areas,
stumps, roots, logs or other timber, matted roots, and other debris not suitable for
foundation purposes shall be excavated to a depth of not less than 18 inches below
any subgrade,shoulder or slope. All depressions excavated below the original ground
surface for or by the removal of stumps and roots, shall be refilled with suitable
material and compacted to make the surface conform to the surrounding ground
surface.
02110-1
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 DISPOSAL OF CLEARED AND GRUBBED MATERIAL:
A. Saw logs, pulp wood; cord wood or other merchantable timber removed incidental
to clearing and grubbing shall become the property of the Contractor and may be sold
by him, provided such disposal is otherwise in accordance with these specifications.
All incombustible matter removed shall be hauled away and deposited at locations
approved by the Engineer. Combustible matter may be burned if permitted by City
Officials or may be disposed of as stated above. Burning shall be done at such time
and such manner as to prevent fire from spreading and to prevent any damage to
adjacent cover and shall further be subject to all requirements of City, State and
Federal Governments pertaining to the burning. No burning will be allowed on the
site unless all fires are kept under constant attendance by persons having equipment
necessary to prevent the spreading of fire. Such equipment shall include, at the
minimum, a bulldoz,er or front end loader, and an approved pump and hose connected
to an acceptable source of water. Disposal by burning shall be kept under constant
attendance until all fires have burned out or have been extinguished.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT:
A. Payment shall be made according to the lump sum price as shown in the bid schedule
for Clearing and Grubbing.
02110-2
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
SECTION 02160
SHORING AND SHEETING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUBMITTAL:
A. The work covered in this section includes the necessary design and installation of
shoring, bracing, sheeting, sheet piling, or combinations thereof to protect existing'
structures adjacent to the excavations for the pipe line and drainage structures; and
to protect workmen and the public.
B. The Contractor is solely responsible for the shoring materials, means and methods and
the sequences and procedures for employing them. Such measures shall meet or
exceed O.S.H.A. requirements.
1.2 SYSTEM DESIGN AND INSTALLATION:
A. The Contractor will employ a qualified professional engineer, registered to practice
in the State of Georgia, to provide the necessary engineering services to design and
inspect the iristallation of necessary shoring systems. The design, materials, and
installation of the system must adequately prevent the subsidence or collapse of, or
damage to, adjacent materials and structures, and permit the installation of the
proposed improvements in conformity with other sections of the specifications.
B. The support systems shall be the sole responsibility of the Contractor and his
engineer. The plans of systems, stamped and signed by the Contractor's engineer,
shall be submitted to the Owner for his records, but not for his approval.
C. The system design may be based on the soils report attached as Appendix" A", but
shall not be limited by this information. The Owner makes no warranty, expressed or
implied, of the accuracy of the data given in the soils report. The Contractor and his
engineer shall satisfy themselves of the existing conditions and shall procure any
additional testing or information needed to design and install an adequate shoring
system.
D. Any installation adjacent to or within a State Right-of-Way or easement will be
subject to review and inspection of the Georgia Department of Transportation. The
Contractor shall notify and coordinate his activities with their representative.
02160-1
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS AND WORKMANSHIP:
A. The Contractor shall execute the shoring plan in conformity with the submitted plans
and to the satisfaction of his engineer and other approving authorities.
B. The Contractor shall employ only skilled craftsman experienced with the system or
systems to be utilized.
C. The Contractor will utilize materials of substantial substance and quality to insure a
sound system.
P ART 3 - EXEC UTI ON
3.1 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT:
A. Work under this section will be subordinate to other items of the specifications and
no separate payment will be made therefor.
02160-2
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
SECTION 02200
GRADING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SCOPE:
A. This section covers 'grading for the roadways, parking areas, drives and/or \valks,
including all excavations, formation of embankments, preparation of subgrade for
pavements and finishing and dressing of graded earth areas, shoulders, and ditches.
Work in connection with excavation, trenching, and backfi lling for uti I ity lines is
specitied under the section entitled "Excavating, Trenching and Backfilling for Pipe
Lines."
1.2 CONSERVATION OF TOPSOIL:
A. Except where otherwise noted on the plans, topsoil shall be removed without
contamination with subsoils and spread on areas already graded and prepared for
topsoil, or shall be transported and deposited in storage piles convenient to areas that
are to receive application of topsoil later, or at locations indicated. Topsoil shall be
stripped to a depth of 3 to 6 inches and, when stored, shall be kept separate from
other excavated materials and piled free of roots, stones, and other undesirable
materials.
1.3 EXCAVATION:
A. The term "excavation" used hereinafter is defined as "unclassified excavation."
Excavation of every description regardless of material encountered within the grading
limits of the project, shall be performed to the lines and grades indicated. Suitable
excavated material shall be transported to and placed in fill areas within the limits of
the work. When directed, unsuitable material encountered within the limits of the
\york shall be excavated below the grade shown and replaced with suitable material.
Materials considered unsuitable are those conforming to Classes PT, OH" CH, MH,
OL, CL, or ML as described under the Unified Soil Classification System. Rock
encountered in the grading process that is not gradable using conventional equipment
(including rippers) shall be blasted. Blasted rock shall be considered mass rock
excavation and payment will be in accordance with the per unit price shown in the Bid
Schedule. Such material removed and the select material ordered as replacement shall
be included in excavation. Unsuitable and surplus excavation material not required
for fill shall be disposed of in designated waste or spoil areas. During construction,
excavation and tilling shall be performed in a manner and sequence that will provide
drainage at all times. Material required for fills in excess of that produced by
02200-1
I
I.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
.1
I
I
I
I
I
excavation within the grading limits shall be excavated from the borro\-v areas
indicated or from other approved areas selected by the Contractor, as specified herein.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 SELECTION OF BORROW MATERIAL:
A. GENERAL: Borrow material shall be selected to meet the requirements and
conditions of the particular fill for which it is to be used. The material shall consist
of sandy soils or sand-clay soils capable of being readi Iy shaped and compacted to the
req ui red densi ties arId shall be free of roots, trash and any other de leterious material.
Any necessary clearing, grubbing, disposal of debris and satisfactory trimming and
drainage of the borrow areas shall be considered incidental to operations of the
borrow excavation and shall be performed by the Contractor at no additional cost to
the Owner. Unless specifically provided, no borrow shall be obtained within the limits
of the project site without written approval.
B. BORROW AREA(S): Borrow material shall be furnished by the Contractor from
private sources selected by the Contractor and shall consist of a suitable material of
the type mentioned above. The Contractor shall obtain from the Owners the right to
procure material, shallpay all royalties and other charges involved, and shall bear all
the expenses of developing the sources, including rights-of-way for hauling.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXCA V ATION OF DITCHES AND GUTTERS:
A. Ditches and gutters shall be cut accurately to the cross-sections and grades indicated
by the drawings. All roots, stumps, and other foreign matter in the sides and bottom
of ditches and gutters shall be cut one foot below finish grade. Care shall be taken not
to over-excavate ditches and gutters below the grades indicated. Any excessive ditch
and gutter excavation due to removal of roots, stumps, etc., or due to over-
excavation shall be backfilled to grade either with suitable material, thoroughly
compacted, or with suitable stone or cobble to form an adequate gutter paving, as
directed. The Contractor shall maintain all ditches and gutters excavated under this
specification free from detrimental quantities of leaves: sticks, and other debris until
final acceptance of the work. Suitable earth material excavated from ditches and
channel changes shall be placed in embankments. Excavated material shall not be
deposited within a distance from the edge of any excavation ofless than 11'2 times the
depth of the excavation. When storm drain pipe terminates in a new ditch. the
heachvall or end section together with ditch pavement shall be constructed
immediately as called for on the plans. Ditch slopes and disturbed earth areas shall
02200-2
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
.1
I
I
I
I
I
3.2
., .,
J.J
3.4
3.5
be grassed as required under the section entitled "Grassing." The Contractor shall be
responsible for maintaining these newly constructed ditches and take immediate action
subject to approval to keep erosion of the ditch bottom and slopes to a minimum
during the life of the contract. No additional compensation will be given to the
Contractor for the required maintenance.
PREPARATION OF GROUND SURFACE FOR STRUCTURES:
A. At a minimum the top two feet ofloose sand as noted in the Geotechnical Report shall
be removed and replaced with acceptable fill material so as to provide a suitable
subgrade for the proposed improvements.
PROTECTION OF EXISTING SERVICE LINES AND UTILITIES STRUCTURES:
A. Existing utility lines that are shown on the drawings or the location of which are made
known to the Contractor prior to excavation that are to be retained, as well as utility
lines constructed during excavation operations, shall be protected from damage during
excavation and backfilling, and if damaged, shall be repaired by the Contractor at his
expense. ]n the event that the Contractor damages any existing utility lines that are
not shown, or the locations of which are not known to the Contractor, report thereof
shall be made immediately to the Engineer. If determined that repairs are to be made
by the Contractor. such repairs will be ordered under the clause of the GENERAL
CONDITIONS of the Contract entitled Changes.
BACKFILL ADJACENT TO STRUCTURES:
A. Backfill adjacent to structures shall be placed and compacted. uniformly in such
manner as to prevent wedging action or eccentric loading upon or against the
structures. Slopes bounding or within areas to be backfilled shall be stepped or
serrated to prevent sliding of the fill. During backfilling operations and in formation
of the embankments, equipment that will overload the structure in passing over and
compacting these tills shall not be used. Backtill for storm drains and subclrains,
including the bedding, shall conform to the additional requirements as specified.
PREPARATION OF GROUND SURFACE FOR FILL:
A. All vegetation, such as roots, brush, heavy sods, heavy growth of grass, and all
decayed vegetable matter, rubbish and other unsuitable material within the area upon
which fill is to be placed shall be stripped or otherw'ise removed before the till is
started. In no case will unsuitable material remain in or under the till area. Sloped
ground surfaces steeper than 1 vertical to 4 horizontal on which fill is to be place shall
be plowed, stepped or benched, or broken up as directed, in such manner that the fill
material will bond with the existing surface. Prepared surfaces on which compacted
till is to be placed ,shall be wetted or dried as may be required to obtain the
compaction specified.
02200-3
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
3.6
3.7
3.8
-I
I
I
I
I
I
FILL:
A. Fills and embankments shall be constructed at the locations and to lines and grades
indicated. The completed fill shall correspond to the shape of the typical section
indicated or shall meet the requirements of the particular case. Suitable material
removed from the eXcavation shall be used in forming the till. Fill material shall be
reasonably free from roots, other organic material and trash. and from stones have
maximum dimension greater than 6 inches. No frozen material will be permitted in
the fill. Stones ha\/ing a maximum dimension larger than 4 inches shall not be
permitted in the upper 6 inches offill or embankment. The material shall be placed
in successive horizontal layers of 8 inches to 12 inches in loose depth for the full
\vidth of the cross section and shall be compacted as required.
COMPACTION:
A. OVERALL OR OVERLOT AREAS: Each layer of the fill or embankment except
in areas indicated as not requiring compaction, shall be compacted by rolling with an
approved tamping roller, heavy rubber-tired roller, three steel wheeled power roller,
vibratory roller or other compaction equipment, whichever is best suited for the types
of soil encountered to at least 95 percent of maximum density at optimum moisture
content.
B. FIELD CONTROL: In all fill areas field density tests will be performed in sufficient
number (minimum of one test on each alternate lift or as recommended by the
Engineer) to insure that the specified density is being obtained. These tests will be
made at the expense of the Contractor and will be in accordance with AASHO
Standard T-14 7.
FINISHED EXCAVATION, FILLS, AND EMBANKMENTS:
A. All areas covered by the project, including excavated and filled sections and adjacent
transition areas, shall be uniformly smooth graded. The finished surface shall be
reasonably smooth, compacted, and free from irregular surface changes. The degree
of finish shall be that ordinarily obtainable from either bladegrader or scraper
operations, supplemented with hand raking and finishing, except as otherwise
specitied. The finished surface shall be not more than 0.10 foot above or below the
established grade or approved cro.ss section. Ditches and gutters shall be finished so
as to permit adequate drainage. The surface of areas to be grassed shall be finished
to smoothness suitable for the application of grassing materials. The surface of
embankments. or excavated areas for road construction or other areas to be paved on
w'hich a base course or pavement is to be placed shall not vary more than 0.05 foot
from the established grade and approved cross section. In areas where the bulking of
soil as a result of grassing operations will tend to retard surbce drainage along the
edge of pavements, the finished grades shall be len 0.1 foot below grade prior to
grassmg.
02200-4
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
3.9
3.10
3.11
-I
I,
I
I
I
I
3.12
DISPOSAL OF WASTE MATERIAL:
A. All vegetation, roots, brush, sod, broken pavements, curbs and gutter, rubbish. and
other unsuitable or surplus material stripped or removed from the limits of
construction shall be disposed of off the site, except where otherwise approved in
writing by the Engirieer. The material shall be dumped, spread. and leveled to drain.
Surplus excavation shall be hauled to, compacted in accordance with overall and
overlot areas, and sloped to drain in the disposal area where directed. The unsuitable
material shall be leveled to drain and firmed under the normal operation of spreading
and hauling equipment. Any trees, stumps, brush, down timber, etc. in the area to be
used for disposal shall be cleared by cutting (to within six (6) inches of the ground)
and shall be disposed of by burning, removal from the property or a combination of
both. Clearing and disposal of trees, stumps, etc. shall comply vlith the applicable
portions of the clearing and grubbing specifications.
PLACEMENT OF TOPSOIL:
A. Topsoil shall be placed on all shoulders, slopes, ditches, and other earth areas graded
under this contract, excluding borrow areas, unless otherwise specified on the plans.
Topsoil shall be uniformly placed on these areas to a compacted depth of not less than
three (3)inches or more than four (4) inches. The material shall be free from clods
of soil. matted roots,roots grater than Y2 inch in diameter. and any other objectionable
material which might hinder subsequent grassing and mowing operations. The
material shall be placed, leveled, and lightly compacted with at least one pass of a
cultipacker or light pneumatic-tired roller, to required cross sections, but shall be left
one-tenth (0.10) of a foot below the finished earth grade.
PROTECTION:
A. Newly graded areas shall be protected from traftic and ft'om erosion, and any
settlement or washing away that may occur ft'om any cause, prior to acceptance, shall
be repaired and grades re-estab1ished to the required elevations and slopes, at no
additional expense to the Owner.
MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT:
A. Payment shall be made at the lump sum price for Site Grading as shown in the bid
schedule, except as hereinafter noted.
B. When made at the direction of the Engineer, blasted rock excavation and backtill to
compensate for rock, will be made at the Unit Contract Price for Mass Rock
Excavation per cubic yard measured in place.
02200-5
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
,I
I
I
I
I
I
SECTION 02210
REMOVAL OF WATER
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SCOPE:
A. The work shall consist of the removal of surface water and ground water as needed
to perform the required construction in accordance with the specifications. It shall
include (1) building and maintaining all necessary temporary impounding works,
channels, and diversions; (2) furnishing, installing and operating all necessary pumps,
piping and other facilities and equipment; and (3) removing all such temporary works
and equipment after they have served their purposes.
1.2 DIVERTING SURFACE WATER:
A. The contractor shall build, maintain, and operate all cofferdams, channels, flumes,
sumps, and other temporary diversion and protective works needed to divert
streamflow and other surface water through or around the construction site and away
from the construction work while construction is in progress.
B. Unless otherwise specified, the contractor shall furnish to the Engineer, his plan for
diverting surface \vater before beginning the construction work for which the
diversion is required. Acceptance of this plan will not relieve the contractor of
responsihility for completing the work as specified.
1.3 DEWATERING THE CONSTRUCTION SITE:
A. Foundations, and other parts ofthe construction site shall be dewatered and kept free
of standing water or excessively muddy conditions as needed for proper execution of
the construction work. The Contractor shall furnish, install, operate and maintain all
drains, sumps, pumps, and other equipment needed to perform the dewatering as
specified.
B. Unless otherwise specified, the contractor shall furnish to the Engineer, his plan for
dewatering before beginning the construction work for which the dewatering is
required. Acceptance of this plan will not relieve the contractor of responsibility for
completing the work as specified.
1.4
REMOV AL OF TEMPORARY WORKS:
A. After the temporary works have served their purposes, the contractor shall remove
02210-1
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
.1
I
I
I
I
I
them to the extent required to present a sightly appearance and to prevent any
obstruction of the flow of water or any other interference with the operation of or
access to the permanent works.
PART 2 - EXECUTION
2.1 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT:
A. Work under this section will be subordinate to other items of the specifications and
no separate payment will be made therefor.
02210-2
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
SECTION 02220
EXCA V A TING AND BACKFILLING FOR STRUCTURES
PART I - GENERAL
1.1 SCOPE:
A. This section covers excavating, filling and backtilling for building construction work
and miscellaneous strllctures incidental thereto.
1.2 DEFINITIONS:
A. Unsatisfactory materials incl~lde those conforming to classes PT, OH, CH. MI-I, or
OL. or as described in the Unified Soil Classification System, as adopted by the Corps
of Engineers and the Bureau of Reclamation in January 1952.
B. COHESIONLESS AND COHESIVE MATERIALS: Cohesionless materials include
graveL gravel-sand mixtures, sands, and gravelly sands. Cohesive materials include
clayey and silty gravel, gnivel-silt mixtures, clayey and silty sands, sand-clay mixtures,
clay silts, and very fine sands. When results of compaction tests for moisture-density
relations are recorded on graphs, cohesionless soils will show straight lines or reverse-
shaped moisture density curves and cohesive soils will show normal moisture-density
curves.
1.3 SITE PREPARATION:
A. The work area shall be stripped of all topsoil, vegetation, timber, debris and other
rubble. Loose soil from stump removal shall be removed from stump holes. Where
required, stump holes shall be backfilled with clean earth and compacted as specified
on the dravvings.Areas containing soft, organic or other objectionable material shall
be removed as directed by the Engineer.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 EXCAVATION:
A. GENERAL: The excavation shall conform to the dimensions and elevations indicated
for each building and structure, except as specified hereinafter. Excavation shall
extend a sufficient distance from walls and footings to allow for placing and removal
of forms, installation of services, and for inspection, except where the concrete for
walls and footings is authorized to be deposited directly against excavated surfaces.
Excavations carried below indicated depths will not be permitted except to remove
02220-1
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
unsatisfactory material. Unsatisfactory material shall be excavated below the grades
shown, as directed, and replaced with satisfactOlY material. Excavation methods shall
generally meet or exceed Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA)
construction industry standards.
Material removed qelow the depths indicated without specific direction of the
engineer shall be replaced, at no additional cost to the Owner, to the indicated
excavation grade with satisfactory materials placed and compacted as speci fied except
that concrete footings shall be increased in thickness to the bottom of overdepth in
earth excavation and overbreak in rock excavation.
B.
DRAINAGE: Excavation shall be performed in such manner that the area of the site
and the area immediately surrounding the site will be continually and effectively
drained by gravity. Water shall not be permitted to accumulate in the excavation.
The excavation shall be drained by satisfactory methods to prevent softening of the
foundation bottom, undercutting of footings, or other actions detrimental to proper
construction procedures.
c.
SHORING: Shoring, including sheet piling, shall be furnished and installed as
necessary to protect workmen, banks, adjacent paving, structures, and utilities.
Shoring, bracing, and sheeting shall be removed as excavations are backfi lied, in a
manner to prevent caving.
D.
BORROW: Where satisfactory materials are not available in sufficient quantity from
required excavations, approved materials shall be obtained from the borrow areas
from approved sources off Owner-controlled land at the Contractor's responsibility.
The necessary clearing and grubbing of borrow area disposal and burning of debris
therefrom, the development of sources including any access roads for hauling and the
necessary right-of-way, and the satisfactory drainage of the borrow areas shall be
considered as incidental items to borrow excavation. Borrow areas shall be neatly
trimmed and trained after borrow excavations are completed.
E.
EXCA V A TED MATERIALS: Satisfactory excavated material required for backfill
shall be placed in the proper section of the permanent work required under this
section, or shall be separately stockpiled ifit cannot be readily placed. Satisfactory
excavated material in excess of that required for the work under this section shall be
made available for use in other portions of the permanent overall site work required'
for the contract project. Satisfactory material in excess of that required for the
permanent work and unsatisfactory material shall be disposed of in designated spoil
areas or hauled off site and legally disposed of as a part of the Contractor's
responsibility. No satisfactory material shall be wasted or used for the convenience
of the Contractor unles.s so authorized. Stockpiles shall be placed, graded, compacted
and shaped for proper drainage.
02220-2
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
F. FINAL GRADE: Care shall be taken not to disturb the bottom of the excavation, and
excavation to final grade shall not be made until just before concrete is to be placed.
2.2 COMP ACTION OF FILLS:
A. All fills shall be compacted in layers not thicker than eight inches by rolling, tamping,
vibrating, or combination thereof. When material varies from optimum moisture
content, it shall be tFeated as follows:
B. When wet, moisture shall be reduced by scarifying and aerating the soil until optimum
moisture is obtained.
C. When dry, moisture shall be added by sprinkling, and thoroughly mlxlIlg to
incorporate into the uncompacted soil.
D. Fill and cut areas will be sloped so as to drain properly and prevent accumulation of
water.
E. When existing or cut areas are to be covered with less than one foot oUill, the surface
shall be scarified toa depth of eight inches and compacted to the same density as
adjacent areas. The compaction obtained shall be no less than 95 per cent of the
Standard Proctor Maximum. The top 12 inches of all filled areas shall be compacted
to 100 per cent of the Standard Proctor Maximum.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 FIELD DENSITY DETERMINATIONS:
A. Field density determinations may be made to determine the compaction of the fill..
These tests will be made in each two foot lift of the fill, and in sufticient number
laterally to give complete coverage and assure proper compaction of the entire fill.
3.2.
BACKFILLING:
A. Backfilling shall not begin until construction below finish grade hasbeen approved,
underground utility systems have been inspected, tested, and approved. forms
removed, and the excavation cleaned of trash and debris. Backfill shall be brought to
indicated finish grade. Backfill shall not be placed in wet or frozen areas. Backfill
shall be of satisfactory materials placed and compacted as specified. Heavy equipment
for spreading and compacting backfill shall not be operated closer to foundation or
walls than a distance equal to the height of back fill above the top offooting; the area
02220-3
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
.., ..,
J.J
3.4
remaining shall be compacted by power-driven hand tampers suitable for the material
being compacted. Backfill shall be placed carefully around pipes to avoid damage to
coatings. Backfill shall not be placed against foundation walls prior to 7 days after
completion of the walls. As far as practicable, backfill shall be brought up evenly on
each side of the wall and sloped to drain away from the wall.
PROTECTION:
A. Settlement or washing that occurs in graded or backfilled areas prior to acceptance
of the work shall be repaired and grades re-established to the required elevations and
slopes.
MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT:
A. No separate measlll'ement or payment will be made for excavation and backfill
performed under this section. Payment therefore wi II be included in the contract price
for the structure or installation to which such excavation and bacldill is incidental.
02220-4
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
"
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
SECTION 02221
EXCA V A TING. TRENCHING AND BACKFILLING FOR PIPE LINES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SCOPE:
A. This section covers all excavation, trenching and backfilling for pipe lines, complete.
1.2 EXISTING IMPROVEMENTS:
A. The Contractor shall maintain in operating condition and protect from damage all
existing improvements including utilities, roads, streets. sidewalks. drives, power and
telephone lines, gas lines, water lines, sewers, gutters and other drains encountered,
and repair to the satisfaction of the Engineer any aerial, surface or subsurface
improvements damaged during the course of the \vork. Where and if shown on the
plans, the locations and existence or nonexistence of underground utilities are not
guaranteed. The Contractor shall contact the various uti I ity companies to determine
and/or verify such information prior to proceeding with the work. He shall make
reasonable and satisfactory provisions for the maintenance oftraftic on streets, drives,
walkways and at street crossings and if necessary to provide temporary walkways and
bridges for crossing of the open trench as directed.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 EXCAVATION:
A. All excavation of every description and of whatever substances encountered shall be
performed to the depths indicated on the drawings or as specified herein. Excavation
shall be made by the open cut method except as otherwise specified or shown on the
drawings. Excavation methods shall generally meet or exceed Occupational Safety
and Health Administration (OSHA) construction industry standards.
B.
All excavated materials not required for fill or backfill shall be removed and wasted
as directed. The banks of shallow trenches shall be kept as nearly vertical as
practicable and where required shall be properly sheeted and braced. Except where
otherwise indicated, trench bottoms shall be not less than 12 inches wider nor more
. .
than 16 inches wider than the outside diameter of the pipe to be laid therein, and shall
be excavated true to line, so that a clear space of not less than 6 inches nor more than
8 inches in width is provided on each side of the pipe. The bottom of trenches shall
be accurately graded to provide uniform bearing and support for each section of the
pipe on undisturbed soil at every point along its entire length, except for portions of
02221-1
I
I
I
I
I
the pipe sections where it is necessary to excavate for bell holes and for the proper
sealing of pipe joints. Bell holes shall be dug after the trench bottom has been graded.
Bell holes shall be excavated only to an extent sufficient to permit accurate work in
the making of the joints and to insure that the pipe, for a maximum of its length will
rest upon the prepared bottom of the trench. Depressions. for joints other than
mechanical shall be made in accordance with the recommendations of the joint
manufacturers for the particular joint used. Excavation for structures and other
accessories shall be sufficient to leave at least 12 inches in the clear between their
outer surfaces and the embankment or timber which may be used to hold the bank and
protect them. \Vhere damage is liable to result from \vithdrawing sheeting, the
sheeting will be ordered to be left in place. Except at locations \vhere excavation of
rock from the bottoms of trenches is required. care shall be taken not to excavate
below the depths indicated. Where rock excavation is required, the rock shall be
excavated to a minimum overdepth of 4 inches below the normal required trench
depth. The overdepth rock excavation and .all excess trench excavation shall be
bacldilled with loose, moist earth, thoroughly tamped. Rock is detined as materials
which are so hard 01: cemented that the excavation of such material requires blasting.
The excavation shali proceed in a conventional mani1er with satisfactory effort made
to remove hard materials before the Engineer makes a determination of need for
blasting. Predrilling and blasting will be allowed, if the Contractor can provide
evidence for the Engineer's review that boring logs can and wi II show that the material
can or cannot be excavated. Evidence will be provided for the Engineer's review and
approval before predrilling and blasting is undertaken. The excavation and removal
of isolated boulders or rock fragments larger than one cubic yard in volume
encountered in materials of common excavation shall be classi fied as rock excavation.
Whenever wet or otherwise unstable soil that is incapable of properly supporting the
pipe, as determined by the Engineer or indicated on the drawings, is encountered in
the trench bottom, such soil shall be removed to a depth required for the lengths
designated by the Engineer, and the trench backtilled to trench bottom grade, as
herein specified, with coarse sand, fine gravel, or other suitable material. Backtill with
earth under structures will not be permitted and any unauthorized excess excavation
below the levels indicated for the foundation of such structures shall be filled with
sand, gravel, or concrete, as directed.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
'1
I
I
I
(1 )
GRADING AND STACKING: All grading'in the VIC1l11ty of trench
excavation shall be controlled to prevent surface ground water from-flowing
into the trenches. Any water accumulated in the trenches shall be removed by
pumping or by other approved methods. During excavation, material suitable
for backfilling shall be stored in an orderly manner a minimum distance of one'
and one-half times the depth of the excavation back from the edges of
trenches to avoid overloading and prevent slides or cave-ins. Material
unsuitable for backfilling, as determined by the Engineer, shall be removed
from the job site and disposed of by the Contractor in a manner as approved
by the Engineer.
02221-2
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
2.2
(2)
SHORING AND SHEETING: All shoring, sheeting, and bracing required to
perform and protect the excavation and to safeguard employees and the public
shall be performed. The failure of the Engineer to direct the placirig of such
protection shall not relieve the Contractor of his responsibility for damage
resulting from its omission.
Whenever sheeting is driven to a depth below the elevation of the top of the
pipe, that portion of the sheeting below the elevation of the top of the pipe
shal t not be disturbed or removed. Sheeting left in place shall be cut off not
less than 1 foot below finished grade. No sheeting shall be removed until the
excavation is substantially backfilled as hereinafter specified.
(3)
\V A TER REMOVAL: Where water is encountered, it shall be prevented
from accumulating in excavated areas by pumping, well-pointing and
pumping, or by other means approved by the Engineer as to capacity and
effectiveness. Water removed from excavations shall be discharged at points
where it will not cause injury to public or private property, or the work
completed or in progress. Under no circumstances shall trench bottoms be
prepared, pipes laid, or appurtenances installed in water. Water shall not be
allowed to rise in unbackfilled excavations after pipe or structures have been
placed.
(4)
BLASTING: Explosives are to be used only within legal limitations. Before
explosives are used, all necessary permits for this work shall be secured and
all precautions taken in the blasting operations to prevent damage to private
or public property or to persons. The Contractor shall assume full liability for
any damage that may occur during the use of explosives. No blast shall be set
off within 50 feet of pipe already laid in the trench.
(5)
TREE PROTECTION: Care shall be exercised to protect the roots of trees
to be left standing. Within the branch spread of the tree, trench shall be
opened only when the work can be installed immediately. Injured roots shall
be pruned cleanly and backfill placed as soon as possible.
BACKFILLING:
A. Trenches and other excavations shall not be backfi lied unti I all required tests are
performed and the work has been approved by the Engineer. The trenches shall be
carefully backfilled with the excavated materials approved for backfilling consisting
of earth, loam, sandy clay, sand and gravel, soft shale, or other approved materials.
No material shall be used for backfilling that contains mulch, otherunstable materials,
stones, blasted rock, broken concrete or pavement, or other hard materials having any
dimension greater than 4 inches; or large clods of earth. debris, frozen earth or earth
with an exceptionally high void content.
02221-3
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
B. For backfill up to a level 1 foot over the top of pressure pipelines and 2 feet above the
top of gravity pipelines, only selected materials shall be used. Select materials shall
be finely divided material free from debris, organic material and stone, and may be
suitable job excavated material or shall be provided by the Contractor from other
sources. The backfill shall be placed in uniform layers not exceeding 6 inches in
depth. Each layer shall be moistened and carefully and uniformly tamped with
mechanical tampers or other suitable tools. Each layer shall be placed and tamped
under the pipe haunches with care and thoroughness so as to eliminate the possibility
of voids or lateral displacement.
C. The remainder oCthe backflll i11aterial shall then be placed and compacted above the
level specified above. In areas not subject to traffic, the backtill shall be placed in 12
inch layers and each layer moistened and compacted to a density approximating that
of the surrounding earth. Under roadways, driveways, paved areas, parking lots,
along roadway shoulders and other areas subject to tratlic, the backtill shall be placed
in 6 inch layers and each layer moistened and compacted to density at least equal to
that of the surrounding earth so that traffic can be resumed immediately after
backfilling is completed. Any trenches which are improperly backfilled, or where
settlement occurs, shall be reopened to the depth required for proper compaction,
then retilled and compacted with the surface restored to the required grade
compaction. Alorig all portions of the trenches not located in roadways, the ground
shall be graded to a reasonable unifol111ity and the mounding over the trenches left in
a neat condition satisfactory to the Engineer.
D. Sheeting not specified to be left in place shall. be removed as the backfilling
progresses. Sheeting shall be removed in such a manner as to avoid caving of the
trench. Voids left by. the removal of sheeting and shoring shall be carefully filled and
compacted. Where, in the opinion of the Engineer, damage is liable to result from
withdrawing sheeting, the sheeting will be ordered to be left in place.
2.3 BORING AND JACKING:
A. Where required by the drawings, the pipeline will be installed in a steel casing, placed
by boring and jacking. Where boring is required under highways, the materials and
workmanship will be in accordance with the standards of the State Highway
Department or local authority. Boring and jacking under railroads will be governed
by the latest A.R.E.A. standards and those of the railroad involved. The steel casing
shall be in accordance with ASTM A252 to the thicknesses shown on the drawings.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PAVEMENT REMOVAL AND REPLACEMENT:
A. Where necessary existing pavements shall be ):emoved and replaced, the applicable
standards of the State Highway Depm1ment or local authority shall govern this \vork.
02221-4
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
'"\ ?
.J._
Joints shall be sawed, unless joints equally uniform in the opinion of the Engineer
result from other means. All pavement repairs shall consist of a concrete slab no less
than 6 inches thick or compacted graded aggregate at least 9 inches thick, as indicated
on the drawings. Where the parent pavement is concrete, the slab surface shall be
smoothly finished f1ush with the surrounding pavement. Where the parent pavement
is asphalt, the concrete slab shall be raked finished and topped with 1 inch of surface
mix asphalt paving rolled flush with the surrounding pavement.
MEAS UREMENT AND PAYMENT:
A. Excavation and bacldilling for pipelines and appurtenances, except as hereinafter
provided for, wi II be considered as incidental to the construction of the various
elements of the installation it is associated with, and no separate payment wi II be made
therefor.
B. When made at the direction of Engineer, overcut, rock excavation and backfill to
compensate for rock. "vill be made at the unit contract price for Trench Rock
Excavation per cubic yard measured in place.
C. When made at the direction of the Engineer, overcut and backfill to compensate for
inadequate foundation will be paid for at the unit contract price for Overcut
Excavation and Removal of Unsuitable Material and S'elect Backfill, per cubic yard.
D. Joints in pavements and pavement removal and replacement will be considered
incidental to the construction of the various elements of the installation it is associated
with, and no separate payment will be made therefor.
02221-5
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
SECTION 02270
EROSION CONTROL MEASURES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 DEFINITIONS
A. This section covers erosion control measures required on the job as shown on the
plans. These measures are minimum requirements and may be augmented by the
Engineer ifpositivecontrol is not established.
1.2 CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE
A. The initial construction on the site is tentatively scheduled to begin on or about
November 15, 1999. Final stabilization of the soils should be obtained by May 15,
2000.
1.3 EROSION AND SEDIMENT CONTROL PLAN:
A. The following steps for reducing erosion and containing sediment are recommended
for use during construction, and until the earth areas can be stabilized with vegetation.
1.4 GENERAL PROCEDURES:
A. Earth areas which are not to be paved shall be grassed at the earliest possible time
during the construction phase, so as to minimize exposure to rainfall and run-off.
B. Temporary berms, wherever possible, should be constructed at the end of each day
of grading, in order to contain sediment and slow down erosioi1 in the cut and fill
areas, should rainfall occur during the night. Berms shall also be constructed, where
needed, to prevent sediment from being transported onto areas outside the actual
construction limits.
C. Silt and erosion barriers of the type which tend to filter suspended solids from the
water flowing through thern shall be employed to the extent necessary to contain most
of the water-borne silt. Examples of this type of barrier include "si It" fence, windrows
of limbs and laps, and stone or rubble riprap.
D. Erosion due to wind is not likely to be of concern on this project, considering the
types of soils expected and the strip-like geometry of construction areas. However,
wherever possible, trees or groups of trees and bushes should be left standing to
serve as windbreaks.
02270-1
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
E. Sediment basins shall be constructed if shown on plans and removed when final
stabi lization is attained.
1.5
ELEMENTS OF THE PLAN:
A. The plans for the prevention of erosion and sedimentation for this site are depicted on
. Sheet C2-2 of the plans. The elements of the plan are discussed as follo\vs, and are
listed in chronological order, as far as is practical. The construction activities should
proceed in the order listed.
B. Remove all marketable timber from the rights-of-way, the utility easements, the
designated till areas, and other areas to be clear'ed.
C. Begin clearing and grubbing operations in the vicinity of the hay dams shown on the
drawings. Immediately after the area has been cleared for their placement, install
dams and berms consisting of hay or straw bales or limbs and laps as directed. to be
silt barriers as shown on the drawings. Care should be taken not to clear and grub
beyond the construction limit.
D. As grading operations commence, the topsoil shall be stripped and stockpiled in
mounds surrounded by berms. As mentioned above, berms or windrows should be
constructed each afternoon at approximately 100 foot intervals across the graded
areas, except in the low-lying areas of the project. This action will tend to check
erosion should rainfall be experienced during the night.
E. Construction on the sanitary and storm sewer lines should be commenced as soon as
grading operations have been substantially completed. The disturbed strip along each
line which is located outside of a street right-of-way should be grassed immediately
upon the completion of trench backfilling, as described below.
F. A graded depression around each catch basin on the siteshou1c1 be used to contain
sediment during construction. A ring of hay or straw bales, or silt fencing, secured
to the ground by mean of two No.3 reinforcement bars or other suitable anchoring
method, should be installed around each catch basin site as soon as the drainage pipes
have been laid. These should be spaced leaving a gap of approximately three inches
between each bale where hay is used.
G. As soon as the graded areas which are not to be paved, to be built upon, or receive
underground uti I ities have beeri. brollght to final grade, three or four inches of topsoil
shall be spread over these areas. Grassing operations should be begun immediately,
as described in the grassing specifications. Roadway shoulders and slopes should
receive a similar treatment as soon as the installation of the utilities has ended.
02270-2
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
H. All grassing will be performed in accordance with the section of the specifications
entitled "Grassing". Should seasonal limitations prevent the establishment of the
permanent grass cover, the area to be grassed shall be covered with temporary grass
cover; then the permanent grass will be established as soon as its growing season is
reached.
1. The hay bale dams and silt fencing described above should not be removed until the
surrounding pavement base material has been placed and is ready fOl' priming.
.1. All silt retention basis, traps, barriers, etc., should be inspected daily and cleaned at
least weekly.
K. All work shall be in accordance with good grading practice and shall conform to
accepted practices in Erosion Control.
p ART 2 - EXECUTI ON
2.1 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT:
A. Payment shall be made according to the lump sum price as shown in the Bid Schedule
for Soil Erosion and Sedimentation Control Measures.
02270-3
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
SECTION 02510
YARD PIPING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SCOPE:
A. This section covers the installation of all piping, fittings, valves and appurtenances for
yard piping and pump station piping complete.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS:
1. PIPE AND JOINTS:
A. General: Except as otherwise indicated on the drawings, all water pipe shall be
ductile iron pipe. Pipe thickness shall be Class 350 for 6" through 16" and Class 300
for 18" through 24" in accordance with ANSI A21.511 A WW A C 151.
B. Ductile iron pipe is to be manufactured in accordance with ANSI A21.51/A WW A
C 151-96 having a minimum 60,000 psi tensile strength, 42,000 psi minimum yield
strength and 10 percent elongation. Each pipe shall be pressure tested at 500 psi
minimum at point of manufacture.
C. All pipe and fittings shall have bituminous coating outside approximately 1 mil thick.
The coating shall be applied in accordance with ANSI A-2 1.5 11 A WW A C 151-96.
The pipe shall be cement mortar lined in accordance with the latest version of ANSI
A21.4/A WWA CI04.
D. The pressure class, net weight without lining and name of manufacturer shall be
clearly marked on each length of pipe. The letters "D.l." or "DUCTILE" shall be cast
or stamped on the pipe.
2.2 RESTRAINED JOINT PIPE AND FITTINGS:
A. Restrained joints in pipe and fittings shall be of the single gasket push-on type, and
shall conform to all applicable provisions of ANSI / A WW A Standard C 111.
Thickness of the pipe barrel remaining at grooves cut, ifrequired in the design of the
restrained end joints, shall not be less than the nominal thickness of equal sized non-
restrained pipe as specified above for the centrifugally cast ductile iron pipe. The
restraining components, when not cast integrally with the pipe and fittings, shall be
02510-1
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
.1
I
I
I
I
I
I
2.3
compact ductile iron or a high strength non-corrosive alloy steel. The proper number
of gaskets, bolts, nuts and all necessary joint material shall be furnished. Each thrust-
resistant joint and the pipe and fitting of which it is a part, shall be designed to
withstand the axial thrust from an integral pipeline pressure of at least 350 psi, 4 inch
through 24 inch; 250 psi, 30 inch through 48 inch; and, 150 psi, 54 inch and above,
at bulkhead conditions without reduction because of its position in the pipeline nor
for support from external thrust blocks. Restrained push-on joint pipe and littings
shall be capable of being deflected after assembly. Fittings for restrained joints shall
be manufacturer's standard to accommodate job conditions and shall be compact
ductile iron in accoi'dance with applicable requirements of ANSI A21.1 0/ A WW A
C 110 and/or A21.53/C 153 with the exception of manufacturer's proprietary design
dimensions. Restraint offield-cut pipe shall be provided in strict accordance \vith the
pipe manufacturer's field cutting and welding procedures or as specitied in
"Mechanical Joint Pipe and Fittings."
(I) Lining shall be as specified for balance of pipe and fittings as specified
elsewhere.
(2) Manufacturer shall furnish to the Owner, certitication that two pipes joined
by the restrainedjoint have been successfully tested to 700 psi, for sizes 4 inch
through 24 inch and/or 500 psi, for sizes 30 inch through 60 inch, without any
external support or blocking. Such testing and certification shall be witnessed
and attested by an independent approved testi ng laboratory.
(3) Restrained joint pipe and iittings shall be U. S. Pipe's "TR Flex" or
ACIPCO's "Flex Ring" or equal.
MECHANICAL JOINT PIPE AND FITTINGS:
A. Where pipe sizes 48 inches and less are called foron the plans, and where field cutting
of such pipe is required for installation, mechanicaljoint pipe and fittings may be used
with the approval of the engineer. However, all mechanical joints must be fully
. restrained and meet the same requirements of "Restrained Joint Pipe and Fittings"
above.
B. Fittings and accessories shall be mechanical joint in accordance with ANSI
A21.1 0/ A WW A C 11 0 and ANSI A21.1l! A WW A C 111. Fittings shall be ductile iron
Class 350 (4 inch through 24 inch) and Class 250 (30 inch through 48 inch). Fittings
will be cement lined in accordance with ANSI A21.4/A WWA C104. Fittings shall
have a bituminous outside coating in accordance with ANSI A21.1 0/ A W\V A C 104.
(1) The mechanical joint restraint shall be incorporated into the design of the
02510-2
I
I
I
I
I
o
U
B
U
o
o
o
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
2.4
2.5
2.6
follower gland. The restraining mechanism shall consist of individually
actuated \vedges that increase their resistance to pull-out as pressure or
external forces increase. The device shall be capable offull mechanical joint
detlection during assembly and the tlexibility of the joint shall be maintained
after burial.: The joint restraint ring and its wedging components shall be
made of l.!:rade 60-42-10 ductile iron conforming to ASTM A536-84. The
. ~, ~
wedges shall be ductile iron heat treated to a minimum hardness of370 BHN.
Dimensions of the gland shall be such that it can be used with the standardized
mechanical joint bell conforming to the latest revisions of ANSI
A21.11/AWWA C111 and ANSI A21.53/AvVWA C153. Torque limiting
twist-off nuts shall be used to insure proper actuation of the restraining
wedges. The mechanical joint restraint shall have a rated working pressure
of 350 psi. 16 inch and smaller and 250 psi, 18 inches to 48 inches. The
restraint shall be the Series 1100 MEGALUG restraint as produced by EBAA
Iron, Inc. or approved equal.
FLANGED PIPE AND FITTINGS:
A. Flanged pipe shall be in accordance with ANSI A21.15/ A WW A C] 15. Pipe barrels
and tlanges shalllwve a taper pipe thread (NPT) in accordance with B 1.20.1. with
thread diameters adapted to ductile iron pipe standard outside diameters.
B. Ductile iron pipe us~d for flanging shall be centrifugally cast and meet all requirements
of ANSI A21.51/AWWA C151.
C. Flanges and flanged fittings shall conform to the requirements specified in ANSI
A21.10/A WWA CI10 and ANSI A21.53/AWWA C153.
D. Bolts, gaskets and installation will conform to Appendix "A" of A WW A C 11 O.
SHOP DRA WINGS:
A. Shop dravvings shall be submitted for all pipes, valves and fittings for a complete job;
bends and deflections shown on the plans are approximate only and are to be checked
by the contractor prior to submitting shop drawings.
CONTROL VALVES:
A. All control valves shall be ofthe butterfly, gate and/or check valve type as sho\vn on
the plans and specified in Section 15100.
02510-3
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
2.7
BUTTERFL Y VALVES.
A. All butterfly valves shall be of the tight closing, rubber-seat type with rubber seats that
are securely fastened to the valve body and that fully comply with the latest revision
of A WW A C504. All valves shall be A WW A Class 15013 unless otherwise indicated
on the plans. Valves shall be bubble-tight at rated pressures in either direction. and
shall be satisfactory for applications involving throttl ing service and/or operation and
for appl ications involving valve operation after long periods of inactivity. Valve discs
shall rotate 900 from 'the full open position to the tight shut position. The
manufacturer shall have manufactured tight-closing, rubber-seat butterfly valves for
buried service for a ,period of at least ten (10) years.
B. All valve bodies shal'J be cast iron ASTM A-126 Class B. and shall have integrally cast
mechanical joint ends. Flange drilling shall be in accordance with ANSI B 16.1
standard for cast iron flanges. Body thickness shall be in strict accordance with
A WW A C504.
C. All valve discs shall be constructed of cast iron ASTM A-126 Grade B with Ni-
chrome seating edge. The disc shall not have any hollow chambers that can entrap
water. All surfaces shall be visually inspected and measurable to assure all structural
members are at full 'design strength. Disc and shaft connection shall be made with
stainless steel pins.
D. Valve shafts shall be turned, ground and polished and constructed of 18-8 Type 304
stainless steel. Shaft diameters shall meet minimum requirements established by latest
revision of A WW A C504 for class 150b.
E. All seats shall be ofa synthetic rubber compound. Valves 20 inches and smaller shall
have bonded seats. Bonded seats must be simultaneously molded in vulcanized and
bonded to the body. Seat bond must withstand 75 pounds pull under test procedure
ASTM 0-429, Method B. Manufacturer shall certify that rubber seat is field
replaceable.
F. All valve bearings shall be fitted with sleeve-type bearings. Bearings shall be
corrosion resistant and self-lubricating. Bearing load shall not e~ceed 1/5 of the
compressible strength of the bearing and shaft material. J
G. Valve operators shall conform to A WW A C504 and shall be of the traveling nut, self
locking type and shall be designed to hold the valve in any intermediate position
between fully open and fully closed without creeping or fluttering. All val ve operators
shall be of the manually operated link lever type with divine ground level position
indicator unless otherwise shown on the plans. A mechanical limit device to prevent
02510-4
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
2.8
overtravel of the disc in the open and shut positions shall be provided. Operators
located in vaults or underground shall be designed for buried/submerged service.
Operators shall be mounted in the positions indicated on the drawings. Valves shall
be provided with shaft extensions, and any other accessories or hardware required.
All valves north of the Gordon Highway shall open to the right and all valves south
of the Gordon highway shall open left.
H. The valve interior and exterior shall have the manufacturer's standard finish.
l. B utterily valves shall be Lineseal as manufactured by ivlueller Company, Decatur,
Illinois; M&H Valve Company Models 450 and 4500; or approved equal.
.J. The manufacturer flll;nishing valves under this speci fication shall be prepared to show
proof that the valves proposed meet the design requirements of A WW A C504.
GATE VALVES:
A. At the Contractor's option, either of the following types of gate valves can be used.
(1) Resilient Seated Type Gate Valves: Gate val ves, 4 inch to 12 inch, shall be
of the iron body, non-rising bronze stem, resilient seated wedge type
conforming to A WW A C509, latest revision. They shall have a working
pressure rating 01'200 psi with the valve body, bonnet, stuffing box and disc
castings manufactured of ASTM A-126 Class B grey iron. Valves shall be
provided with operating nut unless otherwise shown on the drawings and shall
open by counterclockwise rotation of the valve stem. They shall have a full
opening flow way of equal diameter of the normal size of connecting pipe.
End connections shall be furnished with all necessary joint materials. Stuffing
boxes shall have o-ring stem seals and shall be bolted and constructed so as
to permit easy removal of parts for repair.
(2) All internal ferrous metal surfaces shall be fully coated, holiday ti-ee, to a
minimum thickness of 4 mils with a two part thermosetting epoxy coating.
Said coating shall be non-toxic, impart no taste to water and protect all
seating and adjacent surfaces from corrosion and prevent buildup of scale or
tuberculation. The coating must be formulated from materials deemed
acceptable per the FOOD AND DRUG ADMINISTRATION DOCUMENT
TITLE 21 of the FEDERAL REGULATIONS ON FOOD ADDITIVES,
SECTION 121.2514 entitled, RESINS AND POLYMERIC COATINGS.
(3) Gate valves inside structures shall be supplied with handwheels, and shall have
flanged ends. Valves to be installed underground shall have mechanicalj oints
and be of one make. The manufacturer shall subject each valve to two
hydrostatic pressure tests:
02510-5
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
2.9
a. Seat Test: There shall be no leakage past the seat from either side of
the disc or at the bonnet flange or steam packing at 300 psi.
b. Shall (bulkhead) Test: There shall be no leakage through the metal,
bonnet flange or stem packing at 400 psi.
(2) Double-Disc Type Gate Valves: Gate valves shall be of the double-disc type
designed for working pressure 01'200 psi. All gate valves shall have a clear
waterway equal to the full nominal diameter of the pipe and shall be opened
by turning valve counterclockwise. Each valve shall have the initial of the
maker, pressure rating and year of manufacture, cast on the body. Prior to
shipment from the factory, each valve shall be tested by hydraulic pressure
equal to twice the specified working pressure. Valves to be operated by
handwheel or operating nut shall have an arrow cast in the metal indicating the
direction of opening, which shall be counterclockwise.
a. Unless otherwise shown on the drawings, valves 3 inches and larger
shall be iron body brass mounted and shall conform to the
Specific~tions for Gate Valves, 3 through 48 inch NPS, For Water and
Sewqge Systems, A WW A, C500. Valves to be installed underground
shall 'be non-rising stem type with 2 inch square operating nut with
mechanical joint ends. Gate valves located inside structures shall be
supplied with handwheels, and shall have flanged ends.
b. Valves smaller than 3 inches shall be all brass and shall conform to the
requirements of Federal Specification WW - V-54.
CHECK VALVES.
A. Check valves shall be designed for a working pressure of not less than 150 psi, or as
indicated or directed, with aclear waterway equal to the full nominal diameter of the
valve, conforming to A WW A C508, latest edition or equal.
(1) Valves shall be designed to permit flow in one direction, when the inlet
pressure is greater than the discharge pressure, and to close tightly to prevent
return flow when discharge pressure exceeds inlet pressure.
(2) Cast on the body of each valve shall be the manufacturer's name, initials, or
trademark by which he can be identified readily, valve size, working pressure,
and direction of flow.'
(3) Valves larger than 2 inches shall be' iron body, bronze mounted. with
mechanicaljoint by mechanical joint ends. Mechanicaljoint bell dimensions
shall conform to ANSI! A WW A C III / A21.ll. latest edition.
02510-6
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
2.10
2.11
2.12
2.13
2.14
(4) Internal wOI.-king parts shall be readily accessible and shall be replaceable
without removing the valve body from the pipeline.
(5) Check valves shall be swing-type check valves. .manufactured by Mueller
Company, Decatur, Illinois, or approved equal.
FIRE HYDRANTS:
A. Fire hydrants connected to 6 inch or larger mains shall comply with the requirements
of A \VW A C-502 and shall be of the Traffic f\/lodel Type. incorporating a break-mvay
feature. Hydrant shall be of the dry-barrel type suitable for 150 psi working pressure
with 5'1: inch valve opening and they shall be equal to i'dueller Catalog No. A-423.
Each hydrant shall have two 2Y2 inch hose nozzles and I steamer nozzle. Bury to
bottom of ditch shall be 3'-6".
B. Fire hydrants connected to 4 inch or smaller mains shall be of the dry-barrel type \vith
2 1Ja inch valve opening, suitable for 150 psi working pressure, similar to Mueller No.
A-411 with single 2'12 inch hose nozzle. Threads and other requirements shall be as
for 4Y~ inch hydrants.
. LIQUID LEVEL MONITORING DEVICE:
A. The contractor shall furnish, install and calibrate a liquid level monitoring device and
ultrasonic transducer. The monitoring device shall a "Hydroranger" as manufactured
by Milltronics or equal and the transducer shall be a Milltronics Model No. XPS-15
or equal.
VALVE BOXES:
A. A cast iron valve box similar and equal to RUSSCO 8-122 or B-I27 shall be installed
over each underground valve. The word "Water" shall be cast on the valve box
cover. Lengths shall be adjusted to match grade.
PIPE SUPPORTS:
A. Pipe supports shall be made of carbon steel primed for field painting. Supports shall
be adjustable and able.to support a maximum load of 5000 pounds. Pipe supports
shall be as manufactured by BERGEN-PATTERSON or equal.
PAINTING:
A. Val ves and accessories shall be black. All surfaces of the valve shall be clean, dry and
free from grease before p~inting. The valve interior and exterior sud~lces except for
seating shall be evenly coated with asphalt varnish in accordance with federal
specification TT-CA94A and A WW A Standard C504.
02510-7
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 WATER MAIN INSTALLATION:
A. HANDLING AND STORING MATERIALS: Unload pipe so as to avoid
deformation or other injury thereto. Place no pipe within pipe of a larger size. Store
pipe and fittings on sills above storm drainage level and deliver for laying after the
trench is excavated. Valves shall be drained and so stored as to protect them from
freezing.
.., ?
J._
PCPE LAYING - GENERA'L:
A. The interior of the pipe shall be clean and joint surfaces wiped clean and dry when the
pipe is lowered into trench. Lower each pipe, fitting and valve into the trench
carefully and lay true to line and without objectionable breaks in grade. The depth of
cover below finished grade shall be not less than 3 feet, or as shown on the drawings.
Give all pipes a uniform bearing on the trench bottom. Allow no trench water or dirt
to enter the pipe after laying. Insert a watertight plug in the open end of the piping
when pipe laying is not in progress.
B. Pipe installed inside vaults or buildings shall be of the flanged type. All pipe and
fittings shall be restrained joint.
3.3 LIQUID LEVEL MONITORING DEVICE:
A. Liquid level monitoring device and transducer shall be mounted through the 8 inch
dome probe flange on top of the ground storage tanK in accordance with
manufacturers recorl1mendations.
3.4 PRESSURE AND LEAKAGE TEST:
A. Before any work will be accepted for final payment, the Contractor will fill the piping
with water, open outlets as necessary to expel the entrapped air. Thereafter, furnish
the necessary equipment and test the piping in accordance with A WW A Standard
C600-93, under the supervision of the Engineer for a period of at least 2 hours.
I nspect all exposed pipe, fittings, and joints, and remedy to the satisfaction of the
Engineer any defects discovered. Continue the te~t until all visible leaks have been
eliminated from the part of the system undertest, and the pressure remains constant.
B. Conduct leakage test in accordance with A WW A Standard C-600-93, Section 4.1.
No pipe installation will be accepted until the leakage is less than the number of
gallons per hour as determined by the formula:
02510-8
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
3.5
3.6
I
I
I
I
I
I
3.7
L = [SD,fP]!l33,200
L = Allowable leakage in gallons per hour.
S = Length of pipe tested in feet
D = The nominal diameter of the pipe in inches.
P = The 'lverage test pressure during the leakage test in pounds per square
inch gauge.
STER1L1ZATION:
A. All piping complete with fittings and appurtenances shall be flushed until clean and
sterilized as specified in the applicable sections of A WW A Specification C65l,
"Disinfecting Water Mains." Piping and appurtenances shall be thoroughly tlushed
then chlorinated with not less than fifty parts per million (50 ppm). Calcium
hypochlorite can be used. Water from the existing distribution system or other source
of supply should be controlled so as to flow slowly into the newly laid pipeline duting
the application of chlorine. The solution should be retained in the pipeline for not less
than 24 hours anda chlorine residual of 10 ppm should be available at this time. The
system shall then be flushed with potable water and the sampling program started.
The provisions of this paragraph apply equally to new pipe and fittings and to existing
pipelines into which connections have been made or which may have been otherwise
disturbed to the extent that contamination may have occurred. All requirements of
the health authorities shall be observed in executing this work.
Two or more successive sets of samples, taken at 24 hour intervals and tested by a
State approved private lab, shall indicate bacteriologically satisfactory \vater and the
results submitted to the District Office.
AS-BUILT DRAWINGS:
A. As the work pl:ogresses, record on one set of utility drawings all changes and
deviations ti-om the contract drawings in sizes, lines or grade. Record also the exact
final location of water lines by offset distances to surface improvements such as edge
of existing pavement or to property lines, etc. at a maximum interval of 200 feet.
Make sufficient measurements to locate definitely all water lines etc., to permanent
points. The drawings will show references to all valves. tittings, pipe brand changes,
etc. Transfer accurately all such records in red pencil to white prints of the utility
drawings and deliver them to the Engineer with monthly payment estimate.
MEASUREiVIENT AND PAYMENT:
A. Payment will be made as follows:
(I) Buried pipelines, valves and fittings will be paid for at the lump sum price
02510-9
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
(2)
(3 )
(4)
(5)
amount as shown in the bid schedule for DIP Yard Piping Complete with
Appurtenances. The limits of this piping shall extend to within 5' of
structures.
Pipelines, valves and fitting in the pump station will be paid for at the lump
sum price an'lount as shown in the bid schedule for DIP Pump Station Piping
Complete with Appurtenances. The limits of this piping. shall extend 5'
outside of the structures.
Fire hydrant will be considered incidental and no separate payment will be
made therefor.
Flow meter and associated pipelines, valves, fittings and vault will be paid for
at the lump sum amount as shown in the bid schedule, for FIO\v Meter and
Vault Complete with Appurtenances.
Liquid Level Monitoring Device and Appurtenances will be paid for at the
lump sum amount shown in the bid schedule for Liquid Level Monitoring
Device.
02510-10
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
SECTION 02513
BITUMINOUS PAVING & BASE
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SCOPE:
A. This section covers the construction of pavement for all roads and parking areas,
complete.
B. Construction of the subgrade, base course and paving of the roadways and parking
areas shall be undertaken immediately after completion of all storm drain lines and
structures, all curbs and gutters, all yard piping, condui tsand other facilities passing
beneath paved areas, and all structural slabs and foundations required within or
adjacent to the paved areas.
1.2 SEASONAL LIMITATIONS:
A. No bituminous mixtures shall be applied for surface treatment between October 21 st
and April 10th, except as directed by the Engineer.
1.3 WEATHER LIMITATIONS:
A. Bituminous mixtures shall not be produced or placed during rainy weather, when the
subgrade or base course is frozen or shows any evidence of excess moisture nor when
the moisture on the surface to be paved would prevent proper bond nor when the air
temperature is less than 45 degrees F. in the shade away from artificial heat.
1.4 APPLICABLE SPECIFICATIONS:
A. All work and materials required under this section of the specifications shall conform
to the applicable sections of the Standard Specifications of the Georgia Department
of Transportation, latest edition.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 GRADED AGGREGATE BASE:
A. The graded aggregate base course shall conform to all applicable specifications of
Section 300 of the standard specifications for roads and bridges of the Georgia State
Department of Transportation, Latest Edition.
02513-1
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
B. The subgrade to receive the graded aggregate base course shall be constructed in
accordance with requirements of Section 209 ofthe standard specifications for roads
and bridges of the Georgia State Department of Transportation.
C. Materials and construction for the graded aggregate base course shall be in
accordance with Section 310 of the standard specifications for roads and bridges of
the Georgia State Department of Transportation.
2.2 SUBGRADE:
A. The subgrade shaH be prepared as specified under the sections of the above
specifications covering subgrade preparation, including but not limited to Section 209.
? "'
-.-'
CURBS AND GUTTERS:
A. After the subgrade has been compacted and approved by the Engineer, curbs and
gutters shall be placed where shown on the plans and constructed in accordance with
the requirements of the section, CURBS AND GUTTERS, CONCRETE.
2.4 PRIME COAT:
A. A prime coat of 0.3 to 0.8 gallons per square yard of medium curing cut-back asphalt
(RC-250 or emulsion. grades RS-2 or SS-I) shall be applied with a pressure
distributor at a temperature between 80 degrees F. and 140 degrees F. The prime
coat shall be applied to the previously prepared base course when the atmospheric
temperature is above 50 degrees F.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 SURFACE COURSE:
A. ASPHALT CONCRETE: The asphalt concrete mixture shall conform to the Georgia
Department of Transportation, Standard Specifications for Highway Construction, for
Type E asphalt concrete. The job mix shall be approved by the engineer and no
material shall be used until approved.
B. TRANSPORTATION AND DELIVERY: The mixture shall be transported from the
ri1ixing plant to the point of use in approved vehicles. Loads shall not be of such size
or weight as to interfere with the efficient operation of the spreader. Loads shall not
be sent out so late in the day as to prevent the completion of spreading and
compaction of the mixture during daylight, unless artiticiallight is provided. The
mixture shall be delivered at a temperature between 225 degrees F. and 325 degrees
F. and within 20 degrees F. of temperature set at the mixing plant.
02513-2
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
C. SPREADING: Upon arrival at the point of dumping, the mixture shall be dumped
into the hopper and spread by mechanical pavers, true to line, grade and cross section
specified and to the loose depth that will secure a compacted thickness of I y~ inches.
The hot mixture shall be free from lumps and shall be spread while it is in a workable
condition.
After the mixture has been screeded and before roller compaction is started, the
surface shall be checked, all fat spots and irregular areas removed and replaced with
satisfactory material. All irregularities in alignment and grade along the outside edge
shall also be corrected by the addition or removal of mixture before the edge is rolled.
D. COMPACTION: While the mixture is hot, it shall be compacted thoroughly and
uniformly by rolling. The surface of the compacted )11ixture shall be smooth. and true
to crown and grade. Any mixture that becomes loose or broken. mixed with dirt, or
is in any way defective, shall be removed and replaced with fresh hot mixture which
shall be immediately compacted to conform to the surrounding area. Any area
showing an excess of bituminous materials shall be removed and replaced. and the
edges shall be kept to a reasonable straight line and trimmed.
. The density after compaction shall be at least 98 percent of the laboratory-determined
density.
E. PROTECTION OF PAVEMENT: The newly finished pavement shall be protected
from vehicular traffic of any kind until the pavement has cooled and hardened and in
no case less than 6 hours.
F. TOLERANCE: The finished surface shall not vary more than 1/a inch in 10 feet from
the true profile and cross section.
3.2
TESTS:
A. The above work will be subject to thickness and compaction tests as deemed
necessary by the Engineer. Such tests will be at the expense of the Contractor.
., .,
j.j
MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT:
A. Payment will be made at the lump sum amount shown in the bid schedule under 6"
Graded Aggregate Base and 2" Asphalt.
02513-3
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
SECTION 02520
MISCELLANEOUS CONCRETE
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SCOPE:
A. This section covers constructionlreconstruction of Portland cement concrete
sidewalks, curbs, curbs and gutters, valley gutter, exterior slabs, steps, ramps, etc. on
a prepared subgrade in accordance with these specifications and conforming to the
existing dimensions and cross-sections, unless otherwise shown on the plans, and to
the existing I ines and grades, complete.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS:
A. PORTLAND CEMENT CONCRETE: Concrete and the equipment, workmanship
and materials therefor shall conform to the applicable requirements of the section
"CAST-TN-PLACE CONCRETE" of these specifications, except as hereinafter
modified. The maximum size of coarse aggregate shall be 1 Y2 inches and not less than
1 inch. Concrete shall have a slump of nor more than 3 inches. The concrete
mixtures shall have an air content by volume of 4.5 percent, plus or minus 1.5 percent,
based on measurement made on concrete immediately after discharge from the mixer.
B. EXP ANSION JOINT MATERIAL: Expansionjoint filler, unless otherwise specified,
shall conform to ASTM Standard D 1751-60 or D 1752-60 or shall be resin-
impregnated fiberboard conforming to the physical requirements ofASTM Standard
C 1752-60.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 CONSTRUCTION REQUIREMENTS:
A. SUBGRADE: The subgrade shall be constructed true to grade and cross section.
The subgrade shall be of materials equal in bearing quality to the subgrade under the
adjacent roadway or stl'eet and shall be placed, compacted and tinished to a smooth,
firm surface. The subgrade for curb and gutter shall extend in all cases at least 1 foot
in width behind the curb or gutter or valley pavement. The subgrade 'shall be
maintained in a smooth, compacted condition, in conformity with the required section
and established grade, and shall be moist at the time the concrete is placed. 1 n cold
weather, the subgrade shall be prepared and protected so as to produce a subgrade
02520-1
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
free from frost when the concrete is deposited. Any concrete that settles after
placement shall be removed and replaced by section, as directed by the Engineer,
without any additioBal compensation.
B.
FORMS: Forms shall be of wood or steel, straight, and of sufficient strength to resist
springing during depositing and consolidating the concrete. The forms shall have a
height equal to the full depth of the concrete course. Forms shall be held l~igidly in
place by the use of stakes placed at intervals not to exceed 4 feet. Clamps. spreaders,
and braces shall be UlSed where required to insure rigidity in the forms.
(1) The inside form for curbs shall have batter equal to the existing curb or as
indicated and shall be securely fastened to and supported by the outside form.
Flexible or curved forms may be used on curves as necessary to prevent a
chord effect in the alignment of the finished work, or when grade changes
occur in the return. Curb forms shall be carefully set to alignment and grade
and to conform to the dimensions of the curb.
(2) Forms shall remain in place until the exposed surfaces have been tinished as
specified in the Finishing paragraph. The forms on the front of curbs shall be
removed not less than 2 hours nor more than 6 hours after the concrete has
been placed. Gutter forms shall not be removed for 12 hours after the
concrete has,been placed. Forms for all work shall not be removed while the
concrete is sufficiently plastic to slump in any direction.
(3) Forms shall be cleaned and coated with form oil each time before concrete is
placed. Wood forms may, instead, be thoroughly \yetted with water before
concrete is placed, except that with probable freezing temperatures, oiling is
mandatory.
c.
RECONSTRUCTION: Where the plans provide for reconstruction of existing curb,
combination curb and gutter, sidewalk, or driveway and the limit of new work
specified does not fall on ajoint, the entire section shaII be removed and the new curb,
combination curb and gutter, sidewalk, or driveway shall join the old work at the first
joint line beyond the specified limit.
D.
PLACING CONCRETE: The faces and adjacent edges of abutting rigid pavements
and structures shall be painted with an approved bituminous material prior to placing
concrete. Concrete shall be placed in the forms to the specified depth in 6 inch layers
and thoroughly consolidated by tamping and spading to that there are no rock pockets
at forms, and mortar entirely covers the top surfaces. Concrete may be compacted
by means of mechanical vibrators.
02520-2
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
E.
JOINTS: Expansion joints and contractionjoints shall be constructed at right angles
to the line of curb, gutter, combination curb and gutter, sidewalks and driveways.
Dowels, tie-bars and reinforcement when required will be shown on the plans ancl
shall be installed in accordance with the applicable details.
(I) Expansion Joints: Expansion joints shall be formed by means of preformed
expansion joint filler material, extending the full depth of the concrete, cut and
shaped to the cross section of the curb, gutter, combination curb and gutter,
sidewalk, or driveway being constructed. Expansion joints' shall be
constructed at the locations indicated on the plans and at other locations as
follows:
a. Expansionjoints shall be provided in curb and combination curb and
gutter at the ends of all returns.
b. Expansionjoints at least Y2 inch in width shall be provided at intervals
not exceeding 100 feet in all concrete shapes.
c. Whenever a sidewalk is constructed between an adjoining substantial
structure on one side and a curbing on the other side, an expansion
joint shall be formed adjacent to the curbing.
d. An expansion joint shall be placed between the sidewalk and the
radius curbing at street intersections.
e. When concrete sidewalks or medians are constructed adjacent to
existing or new concrete pavement or structures, transverse expansion
joints shall be placed in the sidewalk or median opposite suchjoints in
the existing concrete pavement or structure.
f. Where existing structures sLlch as light standards, poles, fire hydrants,
etc. are within the limits of the sidewalk or median area, they shall be
surrounded with an expansion joint.
g. The sealing of expansion joints in curb and gutter, sidewalk, and
driveway sections will not be required. Any expansion joint material
protruding after the concrete is cUl"ed shall be trimmed flush with the
surface. Expansionjoints in the valley pavement shall be sealed \vith
an approved joint sealer, conforming to ASTM D 1190. The joint
opening shall be thoroughly cleaned of all foreign material before the
sealing material is placed. The sealing shall be done in such manner
that the material will not be spilled on the exposed surfaces of the
02520-3
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
concrete. Any excess material on the exposed surfaces of the concrete
shall be removed immediately and the exposed concrete surfaces
cleaned.
(2) Contraction Joints: Contraction joints shall be so placed that monolithic
sections between curb returns will not be less than 5 feet nor greater than 15
feet after the concrete has set sufficiently to pi'eserve the width and shape of
the joint. All exposed edges of joints shall be rounded with the proper edging
tool to a radius of I/., inch.
a. Contraction joints shall be placed in sidewalks between expansion
joints at an interval equal to the width of the sidewalk by scoring
trans,versely after floating operations are completed. Whenever
sidewalk slabs are more than ten feet in \vidth, they shall be scored
longitudinally in the center. Transverse and longitudinal scoring shall
extend for a depth of one inch, shall not be less than ~ inch nor more
than Y2 inch in width, and shall be edged and tinished smooth and true
to line.
F.
FINISHING: The exposed edges of all concrete shapes shall be rounded with an
edging tool to a radius of ~ inch and the surfaces shall be floated and finished with
a smooth wood float until true to grade and section and uniform in texture.
(1) The floated surfaces of curbs shall be brushed with a fine-hair brush with
longitudinal strokes. Immediately after removing the front curb form, the face
of the curb shall be rubbed with a wood or concrete rubbing block and water
until blemishes, form marks, and tool marks have been removed. The surface,
while still wet, shall be brushed in the same manner as the gutter and curb top.
(2) After the surface has been properly shaped and prepared and the water sheen
has disappeared, the final finish of sidewalks and driveways shall be by light
brooming. Brooming shaH be transverse to the line of traffic.
(3) Except at grade changes or curves, the finished surfaces shall not vary. from
the testing edge ofa 10 foot straightedge, more than _ inch for gutter and
driveway and ~ inch for top and face of curb and sidewalk. Irregularities
exceeding the above shall be satisfactorily corrected. Visible surfaces and
edges of the finished curb, gutter, combination curb and gutter, sidewalks, and
driveways shall be free of blemishes and form and tool marks, and shall be
uniforI1"i in color, shape, and appearance. As soon as the forms are removed
from all concrete shapes, honeycombed places and other minor defects shall
be filled with a mortar composed of one part Portland cement and two parts
sand.
02520-4
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
3.2
G. CURING: Any method of curing specified 111 the section "CAST-IN~PLACE
CONCRETE" will be satisfactory.
H. PROTECTION: After curing, debris shall be removed and the backfill shall be placed
as indicated. The completed concrete work shall be protected from damage until
accepted. The Contractor shall repair damaged concrete and clean concrete
discolored during construction. Curb, gutter, combination curb and gutter, sidewalks,
driveways, and slabs that are damaged shall be removed and reconstructed for the
entire length between regularly scheduled joints. not by refinishing the damaged
portion. Removed damaged portions shall be disposed of as directed.
MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT:
A. Payment for all miscellaneous concrete described herein will be made at the lump slim
price as shown in the Bid Schedule for Miscellaneous Concrete.
02520-5
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
SECTION 02721
STORM SEWER SYSTEM
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SCOPE
A. This section covers the storm drainage system, including pipe culverts and
appurtenant structures, complete.
1.2 TESTS FOR PIPE:
A. RESPONSIBILITY AND CERTIFICATIONS: The Contractor shall be responsible
for having the pipe he proposes to furnish tested to demonstrate conformance to the
applicable specifications. Certified copies of the test reports shall accompany each
load of pipe and shall be delivered to the Engineer for approval before the pipe is
installed.
B. Strength tests for reinforced concrete pipe shall be the tests of ASTM C-76.
C. Strength tests for concrete pipe shall be the tests of ASTM C-14.
D. Strength tests for corrugated metal pipe shall be the tests of AASHO M-36.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 PIPE FOR CULVERTS AND STORM DRAINS:
A. Pipe for culverts may be reinforced concrete pipe of the class or D-load strength
indicated and shall conform to ASTM C76 or AASHO M 170 with the following
additional requirements. Pipe shall have a readily visible line at least 12 inches in
length painted or otherwise applied on the inside and outside of the pipe at each end
by the manufacturer, so that, when the pipe is laid on its proper position, the lines will
be at the top of the pipe. The line shall be accurately located to indicate the position
where the pipe reinforcing steel is nearest to the exterior surface of the pipe. Non-
reinforced concrete pipe shall conform to the latest ASTM C-14.
B. Pipe may also be corrugated metal pipe which shall conform to the latest AASHO M-
36. Bituminous coating, where required by the drawings, shall consist of asphalt
cement having a minimum thickness of. 0.04 inch measured at the crest of the
02721-1
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
2.2
corrugations. Paved inverts in corrugated metal pipe, \vhere required by the
drawings, shall consist of asphalt cement applied on the inside of the pipe for one
quarter of its circumference (bottom of pipe when installed). The pavement shall have
a minimum thickness of 0.50 inch tapering to 0.1 inch at the sides.
C. Pipes may also be Corrugated High Density Polyethylene Pipe (CPP) in accordance
with ASTM D 3034, ASTM F 405, ASTM F 677, AASHTO M-252-85l and
AASHTO M-294-85Lfor gasketedjoints. Gaskets shall be in accordance with ASTM
F 477, Elastomeric Seal.
MATERIALS FOR DRAINAGE STRUCTURES:
A. CONCRETE AND REINFORCED CONCRETE: Concrete and reinforced concrete
shall conform to the requirements specified for Class B concrete designed for a
minimum compressive strength 01'2,500 pounds in 28 days, based on test cylinders
prepared and tested. as specified under the section on CONCRETE
CONSTRUCTION of these specifications. Aggregate shall be as specitied in the
section on CONCRETE CONSTRUCTION. Maximum size of coarse aggregate shall
be not more than 1 Yz.inches or less than 1 inch. Forms shall be made of sound lumber
and constructed to the shape, form, line, and grade required, and shall be maintained
sufficiently rigid to prevent deformation under load, and inspected for approval prior
to placement of concrete. Water shall be removed from excavations before concrete
is placed. Concrete shall be conveyed from mixer to forms as rapidly as practicable
without segregation or loss of ingredients. Concrete shall be placed in layers not over
18 inches deep and shall be spaded and compacted as directed. The concrete covering
over steel reinforcing shall be as shown on the plans, but where not shown, it shall be
not less than 1 inch for covers and not less than 1 Y2 inches for walls and flooring.
Concrete deposited directly against the ground shall have a thickness of at least 3
inches between the steel and the ground. Expansion joint filler shall be preformed
bituminous fiberboard, or wood board except where specifically specified on the
drawings. Surfaces exposed to view shall be a smooth finish with all blemishes
removed. All concrete surfaces shall be cured for at least 7 days by covering with
waterproof paper, or kept moist with cotton mats or burlap as approved.
B. MORTAR: M0l1ar for connections to dl:ainage structures shall be composed of one
part by volume ofPortlal1d cement and two parts of sand. The Portland cement shall
conform to ASTM C-150-65, Type I or II. The sand.shall conform to AASHO
Standard M-45, and shall be of an approved gradation. Hydrated line may be added
to the mixture of sand and cement in an amount equal to 25 percent of the volume of
cement used. Hydrated lime shall conform to Federal Specification SS-L-351. Type
M, or ASTM Standard C 141-61, Type A. The quantity of water in the mixture shall
be sufficient to produce a stiff workable mortar but shall in no case exceed 7 gallons
of water per sack of cement. Water shall be clean and free of injurious acids, alkalies,
and organic impurities. The mortar shall be used within 30 minutes from the time the
ingredients are mixed with water. The inside of the joint shall be \viped clean and
02721-2
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
finished smooth. In pipe too small for a man to work inside, wiping may be done by
dragging an approved swab or long-handled brush through the pipe as work
progresses. The mortar bead on the outside shall be protected from air and sun with
a proper covering until satisfactorily cured.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION OF PIPE:
A. Each pipe shall be carefully examined before being laid, and defective or damaged
pipe shall not be used. Pipe lines shall be laid to the grades and alignment indicated.
Proper facilities shall.be provided for lowering sections of pipe into trenches. Under
no circumstances shall pipe be laid in water, and no pipe shall be laid when trench
conditions or weather are unsuitable for such work. Full responsibility for the
diversion of drainage and for dewatering of trenches during construction shall be
borne by the Contractor: All pipe in place shall have been approved before
bacldilling. When storm drain pipe terminates in a new ditch, the headwall or end
section together with ditch pavement, if specified, shall be constructed immediately
as called for on the plans. Ditch slopes and disturbed earth areas shall be grassed and
mulched as required by the section Grassing. The Contractor will be responsible for
maintaining these newly constructed ditches and take immediate action subject to
approval to keep erosion of the ditch bottom and slopes to a minimum during the life
of the contract. No additional compensation will be given to the Contractor for the
required maintenances.
(1) JOINTING: Joints for concrete and reinforced concrete shall be of the Bell
and Spigot type and installed according to manufacturer's recommendations
, using Portland cement mortar. COITugated metal pipe joints shall be made by
riveting or by means of connecting bands wi th bolted coupl i ngs in accordance
with the manufacturer's recommendations.
(2) ALIGNMENT: Elliptical concrete pipe with circular reinforcing and circular
concrete pipe with elliptical reinforcing shall be so placed that the reference
lines designating the top of the pipes will be not more than 5 degrees from the
vertical plane through the longitudinal axis of the pipe. In all backfilling
operations that Contractor shall be responsible for preventing damage to or
misalignment of the pipe.
B. Corrugated Polyethylene Pipe (CPP) sizes 18 to 48 inches, shall be installed where
indicated on the plans in accordance with ASTM F 405 and ASTM F.667.
~
02721-3
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
3.2
., .,
.J..J
3.4
3.5
DRAINAGE STRUCTURES:
A. Drainage structures, where indicated in the plans shall be of the following types,
constructed of the materials specified for each type and in accordance wi th the details
shown on the plans;
(I) INLETS: Inlets shall be constructed of reinforced concrete, plain concrete or
brick, complete with frames and covers.
(2) HEADW ALLS: Headwalls shall be constructed of brick, reinforced concrete
or plain concrete as indicated.
EXCA V A TION AND BACKFILLING FOR DRAINAGE STRUCTURES:
A. Excavation and bacldilling for drainage structures shall conform to the applicable
requirements specified hereinbefore in the section, "Excavation, Trenching and
Backfilling for Pipe'Lines." Trenches and pits shall be ofsufticient size to permit the
placing and removal of forms for the full width and length of structure footings and
foundation, as shown on the drawings. The dimensions and elevations indicated on
the drawings are approximate only and may be changed when deemed necessary to
secure satisfactory foundations. Bracing, sheeting and shoring shall be provided
where required.
TESTING:
A. DISPLACEMENT TEST: Mains will be checked to determine whether any
displacement of the ,pipe has occurred (a) after the trench has been backfilled to two
feet above the pipe and tamped as specified; and (b) upon coinpletion of the project.
The test will be as follows: A light will be flashed between manholes or, if the
manholes have not as yet been constructed, between locations of the manholes, by
means ofa flashlight or by reflecting sunlight with a mirror. Ifthe illuminated interior
of the pipe shows any misalignment, displaced pipe, or any other defects, the defects
designated by the contracting officer shall be remedied by the contractor at his
expense.
MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT:
A. Storm Pipes, Structures and All Appurtenances will be paid for at the lump Sum
amount as shown in the bid schedule for Storm Drainage System Complete.
02721-4
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
SECTION 02831
CHAIN LINK FENCES AND GATES
P ART I
GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provIsiOns of the Contract including General and
Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specitication Sections, apply to this
Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
I. Galvanized-steel chain link fabric.
II. Galvanized-steel framework.
B. Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this
Section:
I. Division 2 Section "Grading" for filling and grading work.
II. Division 3 Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete" for concrete for post footings.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. General: Submit the following according to the Conditions of the Contract and
Division 1 Specification Sections.
B. Product data in the form of manufacturer's technical data, specifications, and
installation instructions for fence and gate posts, fabric. gates, and accessories.
C. Shop drawings showing location of fence, gates, each post, and details of post
installation, extension arms, gate swing, hardware, and accessories.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualitications: Engage an experienced Installer who has at least five years'
02831-1
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
experience and has completed at least ten chain link fence projects with sarne material
and of similar scope to that indicated for this Project with a successful construction
record of in-service performance.
B. Single-Source Responsibility: Obtain chain link fences and gates, including
accessories, fittings, and fastenings, from a single source.
1.5 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A.
Field l'vleasurcments: Verify layout information for fences and gates shown on the
Drawi ngs in relation to the property survey and existing structures. Verify dimensions
by field measurements. .
PART 2
PRODUCTS
2.1 FABRIC
A. Selvage: Knuckled at one selvage and twisted at the other for 2-inch and2-1 IS-inch
mesh sizes and heights above 60 inches.
B. Steel Chain-Link. Fence Fabric: Fabricated in one-piece widths for fencing 12 feet and
less in height to comply with Chain Link Fence Manufacturers Institute (CLFMI)
"Product Manual" and with requirements indicated below:
I. Mesh and Wire Size: 2-inch mesh, 0.148-inch diameter (9 gage).
II. Coating: ASTM A 817, Type 2, Class 2, zinc-coated (galvanized).
2.2 FRAMING
A. Round member sizes are given in actual outside diamefer (OD) to the nearest
thousandth of inches. Round fence posts and rails are often referred to in ASTM
standard specifications by nominal pipe sizes (NPS) or the equivalent trade sizes in
inches. The following indicates these equivalents all measured in inches:
Actual NPS Trade
00 Size Size
1.315 1 1-3/8
1.660 1-1/4 1-5/8
1.900 1-1/2 2
2.375 2 2-1/2
2.875 2-112 '"l
j
02831-2
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
3.500
4.000
6.625
8.625
3-1/2
4
6-5/8
8-5/8
3
3 -112
6
8
B.
Type I Round Posts: Standard weight (schedule 40) galvanized-steel pipe conforming
to ASTM F 1083, according to heavy industrial requirements ofASTM F 669, Group
lA, with minimum yield strength of25,000 psi, not less than 1.8 oz. of zinc per sq. ft.
Type A coating inside and outside according to ASTrvl F 1234. as determined by
ASTM A 90. and weights per foot as follows:
Actual Weight NPS
OD (lb/ft) Size
1.31.5 1.68 1
1.660 2.27 ] -1/4
1. 900 2.72 1-1/2
2.375 3.65 2
2.875 5.79 2- ] 12
3.500 7.58 -.
-'
4.000 9.11 3 -1/2
6.625 8.97 6
8.625 28.55 8
c.
Type II Round Posts: Cold-fonned, electric-welded steel pipe conforming to heavy
indllstrial requirements of ASTM F 669, Group IC, with minimum yield strength of
50,000 psi, either protective coating system below according to ASTM F 1234, and
weights per foot as follows:
1. Coatings: Type B outside with a minimum of 0.9 oz. of zinc per sq. ft. after
welding, a cl1romate conversion coating and a clear polymer overcoat. Type
B inside with a minimum 01'0.9 oz. of zinc per sq. 1'1. or Type D inside with
a minimum 0.3-mil-thick, 8l-percent zinc-pigmented nominal coating.
11. Coatings: Type C inside and outside with not less than 0.9 oz. of zinc-S
percent aluminum-mischmetal alloy per sq. ft.
02831-3
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
D.
. F.
Actual Weight NPS
OD (lb/ft) Size
1.315 1.35
1.660 1.84
1.900 2.28
2.375 3.12
2.875 4.64
3.500 5.71
4.000 6.56
1
1-1/4
1-1/2
2
2 - 1 12
..,
.J
3 - 1 12
Roll-Formed Steel: Rolled form steel shapes (e.g., C section) produced from
structural-quality steel conforming to ASTfvl A 570, grade 45, or ASTM A 446,
grade D, galvanized, conforming to heavy industrial requirements of ASTM F 669,
Group II, with a minimum yield strength of 45,000 psi. Protective coating system
according to ASTM,F 1234, Type A, hot-dip galvanized with a minimum of2.0 oz.
of zinc per sq. ft. according to ASTM A 123,4.0 oz. of zinc per sq. ft. according to
ASTM A 525; or Type C, a minimum of 1.0 oz. of zinc-5 percent aluminum-
misclU11etal alloy per sq. ft. according to ASTM A 875.
E.
Roll-Formed Steel: Hot.rolled steel shape H section with a minimum yield strength
r
of 45,000 psi conforming to ASTM F 669, group III. Protective coating system
according to ASTM F 1234, Type A, hot-dip galvanized with a minimum 01'2.0 oz.
of zinc per sq. ft. ()f according to ASTM A 123, or 4.0 oz. of zinc per sq. ft.
according to ASTM:A 525.
Square Tubing: Cold-formed steel structural tubing conforming to ASTM A 500,
Grade B with minimum yield strength of 42,000 psi and not less than 1.8 oz. of zinc
per sq. ft. Type A coating inside and outside according to ASTM F 1234, as
determined by ASTM A 90.
G.
Top Rail: Manufacturer's longest lengths (17 to 21 feet) with swedged-end or
expansion-type coupling, approximately 6 inches long forjoining. Provide rail ends
or other means for attaching top rail securely to each gate cornel', pull, and .end post.
1. Round Steel: 1.660-inch OD Type I or II steel pipe.
11. Roll-Formed Steel: 1-1/4-by-I-5/8-inch C section weighing a minimum of
1.40 Ib per linear ft.
02831-4
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
.1
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
111. Round Alunl.inum: 1.660-inch OD aluminum pipe.
IV. Square Aluminum: 1-l/2-inch-square aluminum tubing with 0.125-inch
minimum walls.
H.
Steel posts for fabric heights up to 6 feet:
1. Round Line or Intermediate Posts: 1.90-inch OD Type I or II steel pipe.
II. Round End, Corner, and Pull Posts: 2.375-inch OD Type 1 or II steel pipe.
111. Roll-Formed Line or Intermediate Posts: 1.875-by-1.625-inch C section
weighing a minimum of2.28 Ib per linear ft.
IV. Square-End, Corner, and Pull Posts: 2-inch-square galvanized-steel tubing
weighing a minimum of2.60 Ib per linear f1:.
I.
Steel posts for fabric heights over 6 feet:
1. Round Line or Intermediate Posts: 2.375-inch OD Type I or II steel pipe.
II. Round End, Corner, and Pull Posts: 2.875-inch OD Type 1 or IT steel pipe.
III. Roll-Formed Line or Intermediate Posts: 2.25-by-1.70-inch C section
weighing a minimum of 2.70 lb per linear ft.
IV. Hot-Formed Line or Intermediate Posts: 2.25-by-l. 70~inch galvanized-steel
H section weighing a minimum of 3.26 lb per linear ft.
v. Square End; Corner, and Pull Posts: 2-1/2-inch-square galvanized-steel
tubing weighing a minimum of 5.00 Ib per linear ft.
VI. Roll-Formed End, Corner, and Pull Posts: 3-l/2-by-I-l/2-inch roll-formed
galvanized-steel sections weighing a minimum of 5.10 Ib per linear 1'1:.
.T.
Swing Gate Posts: Furnish posts to support single gate leaf, or one leaf of a double-
gate installation, according to ASTM F 900, sized as follows for steel and aluminum
pipe posts:
1. Steel posts for fabric height of 6 feet or less and gate leaf width:
II. Up to and Including 4 Feet: 2.375-inch OD pipe weighing at least 3.11 Ib per
ft.
111. Over 4 to 10 Feet: 2.875-inch OD pipe weighing at least 4.64 lb per ft.
02831-5
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
/ ..,
_.J
I
I
I
I
I
I
IV. Over 10 to 18 Feet: 4.000-inch OD pipe weighing at least 8.65 Ib per ft.
v. Steel posts for fabric height over 6 feet and gate leaf width:
VI. Up to and Including 6 Feet: 2.875-inch aD pipe \veighingat least 4.641b per
ft.
VII. Over 6 to 12 Feet: 4.000-inch OD pipe weighing at least 8.65 Ib per ft.
VIII. Over 12 to 18 Feet: 6.625-inch OD pipe weighing at least 10.02 Ib per ft.
IX. Over 18 to 2'4 Feet: 8.625 OD pipe \veighing at least 27.12 Ib per ft.
FITTINGS AND ACCESSORIES
A. Material: COlnply with ASTM F626. Mill-finished alulllinulll or galvanized iron or
steel to suit manufaeturer's standards.
1. Steel and Iron: Unless specitied otherwise, hot-dip galvanize pressed steel or
cast-iron fence fittings and accessories with at least 1.2 oz. zinc per sq. ft. as
determined by ASTM A 90.
B. Post and Line Caps: Provide weathertight closure cap for each post. Provide line
post caps with loop to receive tension \vire or top rail.
C. Bottom and Center Rail: Same material as top rail. Provide manufacturer's standard
galvanized-steel, cast-iron or cast-aluminum cap for each end.
D. Tension or StretcherBars: Hot-dip galvanized steel wi~h a minimum length 2 inches
less than the full height of fabric, a minimum cross section ofJ/I.6 inch by % inch, and
a miniinum of 1.2 oz. of zinc coating per sq. ft. Provide one bar for each gate and end
post and two for each corner and pull post, except where fabric is integioally woven
into the post.
E. Tension and Brace Bands: 3i4-inch-wide minimum hot-dip galvanized steel with a
minimum of 1.2 oz. of zinc coating per sq. ft.
1. Tension Bands: 0.074 inch thick (14 gage) minimum.
11. Brace Bands: 0.105 inch thick (12 gage) minimum.
F.
Tension Wire: O.l77-inch-diameter metallic-coated steel marcelled tension wire
conforming to ASTM A 824 with tinish to match fabric.
1. Coating Type II zinc in the following class as determined by ASTM A 90.
11. Class 2, with a minimum coating weight of 1.20 oz. per sq. ft. of uncoated
wire surface'.
02831-6
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
2.4
2.5
111. Vinyl
G. Tie Wires: 0.1 06-in'ch-diameter (I2-gage) galvanized steel with a minimum of 0.80
oz. per sq. ft. of zinc coating according to ASTM A 641, Class 3 or 0.148-inch-
diameter (9-gage) aluminum wire alloy 1350-HI9 or equaL to match fabric wire.
CONCRETE
A. Concrete: Provide, concrete conslst1l1g of Portland cement per ASTM C 150,
aggregates per ASTM C 33, and potable water. Mix materials to obtain concrete
with aminiml1m28~day compressive strength ofJOOO psi. Use at least four sacks of
cement per cu. yd., ] -inch maximum size aggregate, 3-inch maximum slump.
GA TES
A. Fabricate perimeter frames of gates from same material and finish as fence framework.
Assemble gate ti'ames by welding. Provide horizontal and vertical members to ensure
proper gate operation and attachment of fabric, hardware, and accessories. Space
frame members maximum of 8 feet apart unless otherwise indicated.
1. Fabric: Same as for fence unless otherwise indicated. Secure fabric at vertical
edges with tension bars and bands and to top and bottom of ti-ame wi th tie
wires.
11. Bracing: lrlstall diagonal cross-bracing consisting of 5/16-inch-diameter
adjustable-length truss rods on gates to ensure frame rigidity without sag or
twist.
III. Barbed Wire: Extend end members of gate frames 12 inches above top
member and 'prepare to receive three strands of wire. Provide necessary clips
for securing wire to extensions.
B. Swing Gates: Comply with ASTM F 900.
1. Steel: Gates up to 8 feet wide:
II. Up to 6 Feet High: Fabricate perimeter frames of 1.660-inch minimum OD
Type I or I I steel pipe or 1-1 /2-inch-square galvanized-steel tubing weighing
1.84 lb per sq. ft.
Ill. Over 6 Feet High: Fabricate perimeter frames of 1.90-inch minimum OD
Type I or II steel pipe or 2-inch-square galvanized-steel tubing weighing 2.52
Ib per sq. ft. '
IV. Gate Hardware: Provide galvanized hardware and accessories for each gate
according to the following:
v. Hinges: Size and material to suit gate size, non-lift-off type, offset to permit
02831-7
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
180-degree gate opening. Provide 1-1/2 pai r of hinges for each leaf over 6-
foot nominal height.
VI. Latch: Forked type or plunger-bar type to permit operation from either side
of gate, with padlock eye as an integral part of latch.
VII. Keeper: Provide a keeper for vehicle gates that automatically engages gate
leaf and holds it in the open position until manually released.
VIII. Gate Stops: Provide gate stops for double gates consisting of mushroom -type
t1ush plate with anchors, set in concrete, and designed to engage a center drop
rod or plunger bar. Include a locking device and padlock eyes as an integral
part of the latch, permitting both gate leaves to be locked with a single
padlock.
PART 3
EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. General: Install fence to comply with ASTivf F 567. Do not begin installation and
erection before final grading is completed, unless otherwise permitted.
1. Apply fabric to ball field side of framework. fnstall fencing as shown on the
"Field Layout and Details" sheet.
B. Excavation: Drill or hand-excavate (using post-hole digger) holes for posts to
diameters and spacings indicated, in firm, undisturbed or compacted soil.
1. If not indicated on Drawings, excavate holes for each post to minimum
diameter recommended by fence manufacturer, but not less than four times the
largest cross section of post.
11. Unless otherwise indicated, excavate hole depths approximately 3 inches
lower than post bottom, with bottom of posts set not less than 36 inches
below finish grade surface.
C. Setting Posts: Center and align posts in holes 3 inches above bottom of excavation.
Space a maximum oJ 10 feet o.c., unless otherwise indicated.
1. Protect portion of posts above ground from concrete splatter. Place concrete
around posts and vibrate or tamp for consolidation. Check each post for
vertical and top aligmnent, and hold in position during placement and finishing
operations.
11. Unless otherwise indicated, extend concrete footings 2 inches abo\"e grade
and trowel to a crown to shed water.
02831-8
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
3.2
D. Top Rails: Run rail eontinuously through line post caps, bending to radius for curved
runs and at other posts terminating into rail end attached to posts or post caps
fabricated to receive rail. Provide expansion couplings as recommended by fencing
manufacturer.
E. Center Rails: Install center rails in one piece bet\veen posts and flush with post on
fabric side, using rail ends and special offset fittings where necessary.
F. Brace Assembl ies: I nstall braces at end and gate posts and at both sides of corner and
pull posts. Locate horizontal braces at midheight oft-'c'1bric on fences with top rai I and
at two thirds fabric height on fences without top rail. Install so posts are plumb when
diagonal rod is under proper tension.
G. Bottom Tension Wire: Install tension wire within6 inches of bottom offabric before
stretching fabric and tie to each post with not less than same gage and type of vv"ire.
Pull wire taut, without sags. Fasten fabric to tension wire with 0.120-inch-diameter
(II-gage) hog rings of same material and finish as fabric wire, spaced a maximum of
24 inches o.c.
H. Fabric: Leave approximately 2 inches between tinish grade and bottom selvage unless
otherwise indicated. Pull fabric taut and tie to posts, rails, and tension wires. Install
fabric on security side offence, and anchor to framework so that fabric remains under
tension after pulling force is released.
1. Tension or Stretcher Bars: Thread through fabric and secure to end, corner, pull, and
gate posts with tension bands spaced not over 15 inches o.c.
J. Tie Wires: Use wire of proper length to secure fabric firmly to posts and rails. Bend
ends of wire to minimize hazard to persons or clothing.
l. Maximum Spacing: Tie fabric to line posts 12 inches o.c. and to rails and
braces 24 inches o.c.
K. Fastener5: Install nuts for tension bands and carriage bolts on the side of the fence
opposite the fabric side. Peen ends of bolts or score threads to prevent removal of
nuts for added security.
GATE INSTALLATION
A. Install gates plumb,level, and secure for full opening without interference. Install
ground set items in concrete for anchorage. Adjust hardware for smooth operation
and lubricate where necessary. Install gates according to manufacturer's instructions,
plumb, level, and secure.
02831-9
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
3.2
MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT:
A. Chain Link Fencing and Gates shall be paid for at the lump slim prices shown for each
in the bid schedule.
02831-10
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
SECTION 02930
GRASSING (BERMUDA)
PART 1 - GENERAL
l.l SCOPE:
A. This section covers the furnishing of all labor and materials and the performance of
all work required to assure the establishment of a dense permanent cover of Bermuda
grass on all areas of the site disturbed by construction operations.
1.2 SEED BED PREPARATION:
A. Final grades will be established as shown on the plans prior to any seed bed
preparation. Washes, low spots and hillocks or windrows will be evened and the bed
will be smoothed to facilitate uniform drainage after establishment of the turf. Graded
surfaces will be maintained in a smooth and even condition until the required cover
is established.
B. After the areas to be seeded have been brought to an even and smooth grade, they
. shall be thoroughly loosened to a depth of at least 6 inches by plowing, discing,
harrowing, or other approved methods until the tillage is acceptable as suitable for
seeding. During tillage operation, the surface shall be cleared of all roots, cable, wire,
or other waste material which might hinder final grading, planting, or subsequent
maintenance operations. Any operations of the Contractor, shall be smoothed out
before seeding operations are begun.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 FERTILIZATION:
A. At least two soil samples per acre shall be taken by the Contractor and analyzed to
determine the suitability of the particular soil for planting. Fertilization and lime
application rates shall be set accordingly. The rates given in the following paragraphs
shall be used for bidding purposes and differing quantities will become the basis for
an equitable adjustment in the contract price.
B. Fertilizer shall be distributed uniformly at a rate of 1500 pounds of commercial
10.10.10 analysis fertilizer per acre, and shall be incorporated into the soil to a depth
of approximately 3 inches by discing, harrowing, or other approved methods. The
incorporation offertilizer may be a part of the tillage operation specified above, or a
part of the hyclroseeding procedure as described below.
02930-1
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
2.2
C. Immediately following,-or simultaneously with, the incorporation of fertilizer, lime
shall be distributed at the rate of 1500 pounds per acre and shall be incorporated into
the soil to a depth of at least tlu'ee inches by discing, harrowing, or other acceptable
methods. The incorporation of lime along with the fertilizer may f0l111 a pm1 of the
tillage operation specified above.
D. Not less than 30 days after completion of seeding, the Contractor shall furnish and
apply Nitrate of Soda or Ammonium Sulphate to the planted areas. Nitrate of Soda
shall be a commer<;ial product, containing not less than 16 percent Nitrogen and
Ammonium Sulphate not less than 20 percent Nitrogen. The Nitrogen fertilizer shall
be uniformly spread and distributed with approved equipment at a rate that will give
not less than 60 pmmds of available Nitrogen per acre. Other commercial types of
nitrogenous material may be substituted at the option of the Contractor. The time of
application shall be limited to the season of June through August.
SEEDING:
A. Permanent grass cover will consist of Common Bermuda seeded in accordance with
one of the following methods:
(1) Between the dates of April 15 and September 15, Hulled Common Bermuda
seed shall be applied at a rate of 40 to 45 pounds of seed per acre.
(2) If seeding is undertaken between September 15, and April 15, unhulled
Common Bermuda seed shall be applied at a rate of 40 to 45 pounds of seed
per acre simultaneously with Abruzzi Rye seed at a rate of 200 pounds per
acre.
B. Seed may be applied by means of a Hydro-seeder or other means approved by the
Engineer.
2.3
COMPACTION:
A. Immediately after seeding operations have been completed, the areas shall be
compacted by means of a cultipacker, roller wood float, or other approved equipment
sufficiently weighted, or compacted by hand methods, to reduce air pockets to a
minimum. The complete planted area shall be left with a finn, even surface, free from
abrupt humps and hollows, and to the established grade.
2.4
MULCHING:
A. All areas planted for temporary or permanent grass shall be uniformly mulched with
hay or strmv at the rate of 1 Y2 tons per acre, except ",,-here hydroseeding is employed
using a cellulose mulch mixed with the seed and fertilizer.
02930-2
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 ACCEPTANCE:
A. Grassed areas will be accepted when a 95% cover by permanent grasses is obtained
and weeds are not dominant.
3.2 MEAS UREMENT AND PAYMENT:
A. Work performed under this section will be paid for at the lump sum price for Grassing
appearing in the Proposal Bid Schedule. Payment, therefor, will include full
compensation for all materials, labor and equipment required to establish the required
permanent stand of grass.
02930-3
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
SECTION 03300
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 REFERENCES:
A. The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced.
The publications are referred to in the text by the basic designation only.
1.1 American Concrete Institute (ACI)
(1 ) ACI 301 Specifications for Structural Concrete for
Buildings (1989)
(2) ACI304 Guide for tvleasuring, Mixing, Transporting and
Placing Concrete (1985)
(3) ACI 305R Hot Weather Concreting (1989)
(4) ACI 306R Cold Weather Concreting (1988)
1.2 American Society For Testing And Materials (ASTM)
(1) ASTM A185 Steel Welded Wire Fabric, Plain, for Concrete
Reinforcement (1985)
(2) ASTM A497 Specification for Welded Deformed Steel
Wire Fabric for Concrete Reinforcement
( 1986)
(3) ASTM A615
(4) ASTM A616/
A616M
(5) ASTM A617/
A617M
(6) ASTM A 706/
A 706M
(7) ASTM C33
(8) ASTM C94
Deformed and Plain Billet-Steel Bars for
Concrete Reinforcement (1987 Rev. A)
Rail-Steel Deformed and Plain" Bars for
Concrete Reinforcement (1987)
Axle-Steel Deformed and Plain Bars for
Concrete Reinforcement (1987)
Low-Alloy Steel Deformed Bars for Concrete
Reinforcement (1988)
Concrete Aggregates (1986)
Ready-Mixed Concrete (1989 Rev. B)
03300-1
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
(9) ASTM C143 Slump of Portland Cement Concrete (1989
Rev. A)
(10) ASTM C 150 Portland Cement (1986)
(11) ASTM C171 Sheet Materials for Curing Concrete (1969.
Rev. 1986)
(12) ASTM C 172 Sampling Freshly Mixed Concrete (1982)
(13) ASTM C 173 Air Content of Freshly Mixed Concrete by the
V olumetric Method
(14) ASTM C231 Air Content fllr Freshly Mi:\ed Concrete by
the Pressure Method (1989 Rev. A)
(15) ASTM C260 Air-Entraining Admixtures for Concrete
( 1986)
(16) ASTM C309 Liquid Membrane-Forming Compounds for
Curing Concrete (1989)
(17) ASTM C494 Chemical Admixtures for Concrete (1986)
(18) ASTM C595 Blended Hydraulic Cements (1986)
(19) ASTM C618 Fly Ash and Raw or Calcinated Natural
Pozzolan for Use as a Mineral Admixture in
Portland Cement Concrete (1987)
(20) ASTM C920 Elastomeric Joint Sealants (1987)
(21) ASTM C989 Ground Iron Blast-Furnace Slag for Use in
Concrete and Mortars (1989)
(22) ASTM Dl190 Concrete Joint Sealer, Hot-Poured Elastic
. Type (1974, Rev. 1980)
(23) ASTM D 1751 Preformed Expansion Joint Filler for Concrete
Paving and Structural Construction
(Nonextruding and Resilient Bituminous
Types) (1983)
(24) ASTM D1752 Preformed Sponge Rubber ancl Cork
Expansion Joint Fillers for Concrete Paving
and Structural Construction
(25) ASTM D 1850 Concrete Joint Sealer, Cold Application Type
03300-2
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
1.3 Army Corps Of Engineers (COE) - Handbook For Concrete And Cement
0.1 COE CRD-C572 Specification for Polyvinyl Chloride
Waters top
0.2 COE CRD-C621 Nonshrink Grout
1.2 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS:
A. In the ACI publications referred to herein, the advisory provisions shall be considered
to be mandatory, as though the word "shall" has been substituted for "should"
wherever it appears.
1.3 SUBMITTALS:
A. Submit to the Engineer the following:
(1) Certificates of Compliance
(2) Cement
(J"') \ t
f ggrega es'
(4) Admixtures
(5) Reinforcement
(6) Joint filler
(7) Joint sealant
PART 2 - PRODUCTS:
2.1 CONCRETE:
A. Contractor Mix Design: ACI 301, except as modified herein. Concrete shall have a
28-day compressive strength of 3000 psi. Slump shall not exceed 4\12 inches in
accordance with ASTM C143. Provide ASTM C33 aggregate Size No. 57 or 67 and
4 to 6 percent air entrainment for concrete exposed to freeze-thaw conditions.
Accomplish air-entrainment using an air-entraining admixture.
B. Readv-Mixed Concrete. . ASTM C94, except as modified herein. Ready-mixed
concrete is defined in this specification as concrete produced regularly by a
commercial establishment and delivered to the purchaser in the plastic state.
2.2 MATERIALS:
A. Cement. ASTM C150, Type r or II or ASTM C595, Type IP(MS) or IS(MS)
blended cement, except as modified herein. The blended cement shall consist of a
03300-3
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
mixture of ASTM C 150 cement and one of the following materials: ASTM C618
pozzolan or fly ash, or ASTM C989 ground iron blast furnace slag. The pozzolan/fly
ash content shall not exceed 25 percent nor the ground iron blast furnace' slag 50
percent by weight of the total cementitious material. For e.xposed concrete, uSe one
manufacturer for each type of cement, ground slag, fly ash, and pozzolan.
(1) Fly Ash and Pozzolan. ASTM C618, Type N, F, or C, except that the
maximum alIowable loss on ignition shall be 6 percent for Type Nand F. Add
with cement.
(2) Groundlrc:n. Blast-Furnace Slag. ASTM C989. Grade 120
(3) Water. Wat~r shall be potable.
(4) Aggregates. ASTM C33; Obtain aggregates for exposed concrete surfaces
from one source. Aggregates shall not contain any substance which may be
deleteriously reactive with the alkalies in the cement.
B.
Admixtures. ASTM C260 for air-entrained concrete. ASTM C494 for water
reducing (Type A, D, or E), accelerating (Type C), and retarding (Type B or D), to
be used only when approved. Calcium chloride shall not be used as an admixture.
c.
Reinforcing Bars. . ASTM A706/A706M, Grade 60: ASTM A615 and ASTM
A617 / A617lvL Grade 40 or 60; or ASTM A6l6/A616M, Grade 50 or 60.
D.
Materials for Curing Concrete.
(1) Impervious Sheeting. ASTM C171; waterproof paper, clear or white
polyethylene sheeting, or polyethylene-coated burlap.
(2) Liquid Membrane-Fomling Compound. ASTM C309, white-pigmented. Type
2, free of paraffin or petroleum. Do not use where finished appearance is
important. Use where approved only.
(3) Liquid Chemical Sealer-Hardener Compound. Compound shall not contain
petroleum resins or waxes. Do not use on exterior slabs where 'exposed to
freezing conditions. Compound shall not reduce the adhesion of resilient
t1ooring, tile, paint, roofing, waterproofing, or other material to be appl ied to
the concrete.
(4) Expansion-Joint Filler. ASTM D 1751 or ASTM D 1752, '/4-inch thick,
unless otherwise indicated.
(5) Joint Sealants.
a. Horizontal Surfaces (3 percent slope, maximum)
(i) Outside Buildings: ASTM Dl190
(ii). Inside Buildings: ASTM D 1190 or ASTM D 1850
b. Vertical Surfaces (greater than 3 percent slope)
(i), ASTM C920, Type M, Grade NS, Class 25
c. Polyvinyl Chloride Waterstops
03300-4
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
(i) COE CRD-C 572
(ii) Nonshrink Grout
(iii) COE CRD-C 621
d. Contractors Option for Material Only
(i) At the option of the Contractor, those applicable material
sections of the Georgia Department of Transportation,
Standard Specifications, Section 500, Class A shall govern in
lieu of this specification for concrete. Do not change the
selected option during the course of the work.
PART 3 - EXECUTION:
3.1 MATERIAL I-IANDLlNG:
A. Deliverv. Do not deliver concrete until ready for concrete placement.
Storage. Store concrete aggregates to prevent contamination or segregation. Store
reinforcement of different sizes and shapes in separate piles or racks raised above the
ground to avoid excessive rusting. Protect from contaminants such as grease, oil,
and dirt. Provide. for accurate identification after bundles are broken and tags
removed.
B. Forms. ACl301 - Set forms true to line and grade and make mortar-tight. Chamfer
above grade exposed joints, edges, and external corners of concrete 3/4 inch, unless
. otherwise indicated. Before concrete placement, coat the contact surfaces of forms
with a nonstaining form coating compound. Do not use mineral oil on formed
surfaces to be painted. Prevent concrete damage during form removal. Concrete for
footings may be placed in excavations without forms upon inspection and approval
by the Architect. Excavation width shall be a minimum of 4 inches greater than
finished dimensions indicated.
C. Placinl.! Reinforcement And Miscellaneous Materials. ACI 301 - Provide bars. wire
fabric, and other reinforcing materials, includi"ng wire ties, supports, and other
devices necessary to install and secure the reinforcement.
(I) Cover and Spli~ing. ACI 301 - unless otherwise indicated.
(2) Setting Miscellaneous Material. Place and secure anchors and bolts. pipe
sleeves, conduits, and other such items in position before concrete placement.
Plumb anchor bolts and check location and elevation. Temporarily fill voids
in sleeves with readily removable material to prevent the entry of concrete.
(3) Construction Joints. ACI 301 - Continue reinforcement across joints. unless
otherwise indicated. Fusion weld waterstop splices.
(4) Expansion Joints and Contraction Joints. ACl 301 - For slabs on grade.
03:100-5
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
D.
I
I
I
I
I
I
provide at edges of interior floor slabs, adjacent to \valls, and as indicated.
Make exparision joints 0.5 inch wide, except as indicated otherwise. Fill
expansion joints not exposed to weather with preformed joint material. Seal
joints exposed to weather withjoint sealant. Do not extend reinforcement or
other embedded metal items bonded to the concrete through any expansion
joint, unless an expansion sleeve is used. Provide contraction joints, either
foi'med or saw cut or cut with ajointing tool to the indicated depth after the
surface has been finished. Sawed joints shall be completed within 4 to 12
hours after concrete placement. Protect joints from intrusion of foreign
matter.
Embeddedltems. Place and secure anchorage devices and other embedded items
required for adj~ining work that is attached to or supported by cast-in-place concrete.
Use Setting Drawings, templates, diagrams, instructions. and directions furnished with
items to be embedded.
(1) Install anchor bolts, accurately located, to elevations required.
(2). Install dovetail anchor slots in concrete structures as indicated.
E.
Measuring. Mixing,. Transporting, And Placing Concrete. ACI 304, except as
modified herein. ASTM C94; machine mix concrete and provide mandatory batch
ticket information for each load of ready mix concrete. Begin mixing within 30
minutes after the cement has been added to the aggregates. Place concrete within 90
minutes of either addition of mixing water.to cement and aggregates or addition Of
cement to aggregates if the air temperature is less than 85 degrees F. Reduce mixing
time to 60 minutes if the air temperature is greater than 85 degrees F. Additional
water may be added, provided that both the specified maximum slump and water-
cement ratio are not exceeded. If the entrained air content falls below the specified
limit, add a sufficient quantity of admixture to bring the entrained air content \vithin
the specified limits. Do not place concrete when weather conditions prevent proper
placement and consolidation; in uncovered areas during periods of precipitation; or
in standing water. Prior to placing concrete, remove dirt, construction debris, and
water from within the forms. Consolidate concrete slabs greater than 4 inches in
depth with high frequency, internal, mechanical vibrating equipment supplemented by
hand spading and tamping. Consolidate concrete slabs 4 inches or less in depth by
tamping, spading, and settling with a heavy leveling straight edge.
(1) Cold Weather: ACI 306R - Provide and maintain 50 degrees F minimum
concrete temperature. Do not place concrete when the ambient temperature
is below 40 degrees F. Cover concrete and provide with a source of heat
sufficient to maintain 50 degrees F minimum while curing.
(2) I-Iot Weather: ACI 305R - Concrete temperature frominitial mixing through
final cure shall not exceed 90 degrees F. Cool ingredients before mixing, or
03300-6
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
substitute chip ice for part of required mixing water or use other suitable
means to cqntrol concrete temperature to prevent rapid drying of newly
placed concrete. Shade the fresh concrete and start curing as soon as the
surface of the fresh concrete is sufticiently hard to permit curing without
damage.
F.
Surface Finishes. ACI 301 for repair and finish. unless otherwise specified. Slope
floors uniformly to drains where drains are provided. After troweling is completed,
apply a liquid chemical sealer-hardener to interior slabs that do not receive floor
covering.
(1) Defects. Repair formed surfaces by removing minor honeycombs, pits greater
than 1 square inch surface area or 0.25 inch maximum depth, or otherwise
defective areas. Provide edges perpendicular to the surface and patch with
nonshrink grout. Patch tie holes and defects when the forms are removed.
Concrete with extensive honeycomb (including exposed steel reinforcement,
cold joints, entrapped debris, separated aggregate, or other defects) which
affect the serviceability or structural strength will be rejected. unless
correction of defects is approved. Obtain approval ofcorrective action prior
to repair. The surface of the concrete shall not vary more than the allowable
tolerances ofAC1301. Exposed surfaces shall be uniform in appearance and
finished to a smooth form finish, unless otherwise specified.
(2) Floated Finish. Place, consolidate, and immediately strike off concrete to
obtain proper contour, grade, and elevation before bleed water appears.
Permit concrete to attain a set sufticient for floating and supporting the
weight of the finisher and equipment. If bleed water is present prior to
floating the surface, drag the excess water off or remove by absorption with
porous materials. Do not use dry cement to absorb bleedwater. Surface shall
be level to within 1/4 inch in 10 feet where floor drains are not provided.
(3) Steel Troweled Finish. First, provide a floated finish. When slab has attained
a proper set, trowel to a smooth, hard, dense finish. Finished surfaces shall
be free of trowel marks, uniform in texture, Jlat within 0.0 I foot
(approximately 1/8 inch) in 10 feet. Hand-finish portions of the slab not
accessible to power finishing equipment (e.g., edges, corners) to match the
remainder of the slab. Power trowel once and finally hand trowel \vhere a
finished floor covering (e.g., tile, carpet) is specified. Power trowel twice
and finally hand trowel for exposed concrete floors.
(4) Broomed Finished. Provide for exterior walks, platforms, patios, and ramps,
unless otherwise indicated. Provide a floated finish, then finish with a Ilexible
bristle broom. Permit surface to harden sufticiently to retain the scoring or
ridges. Broom transverse to traffic or at right angles to the slope of the slab.
(5) Pavement Finish. Screed the concrete with a template advanced with a
combined longitudinal and crosswise motion. Maintain a slight surplus of
03300-7
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
concrete ahead of the template. After screeding, float the concrete
longitudinally. Use a straight edge to check slope and flatness; correct and
refloat as necessary. Obtain final finish by belting. Lay belt flat on the
concrete surface and advance with a sawing motion; continue until a uniform
but gritty nonslip surface is obtained. Round edges and joints with an edger
having a radius of 1/8 inch.
G.
Curing And Protection. Ae1301 - Protect concrete from injurious action by sun,
rain, wind, tlowing water, frost, mechanical injury, tire marks, and oil stains. Do not
. .
allow concrete to dry out from time of placement until the expiration of the curing
period. Forms may be removed 48 hours after concrete placement.
(1) Moist Curing: Provide for the removal of water without erosion or damage
to the structure.
(2) Ponding or Immersion: Continually immerse the concrete throughout the
curing period. Water temperature shall not be higher than 20 degrees F more
than the temperature of the concrete. For temperature between 40 and 50
less degrees F, increase the curing period by 50 percent.
(3) Fog Spraying or Sprinkling: Provide uniform and continuous application of
water throughout the curing period. For temperatures between 40 and 50
degrees F, increase the curing period by 50 percent.
(4) Pervious Sheeting: Cover the entire surface of the concrete with tvvo
thicknesses of wet sheeting. Mats shall be at least as long as the width of the
surface to be cured. During application, do not drag the mats over the
finished concrete nor over mats already placed. Completely cover surface and
edges of the concrete, with a 6-inch overlap over adjacent mats. Wet mats
thoroughly and keep continuously wet throughout the curing period.
(5) Impervious~SheetingCuring: Wet the entire exposed surface thoroughly with
a fine spray of water and cover with impervious sheeting throughout the
curing period. Lay sheeting directly on the concrete surface and overlap
edges 12 inches minimum. Provide sheeting not less than 18 inches wider
than the concrete surface to be cured. Secure edges and transverse laps to
form closed joints. Repair torn or damaged sheeting or provide new
sheeting.
(i) Liquid Membrane-Forming Compound Curing: Seal or cover joint
openings prior to application of curing compound. Prevent curing
compound from entering the joint. Provide and maintain compound
on the concrete surface throughout the curing period. Provide a
continuously wetted, permeable cover as specitied in paragraph
entitled, "Hot Weather."
03300-8
,~
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
(6) Application: Unless the manufacturer recommends otherwise, apply
compound immediately after the surface loses its water sheen and has a dull
appearance, ;and before joints are sawed. Mechanically agitate curing
compound thoroughly during use. Use approved power-spraying equipment
to uniformly apply two coats of compound in a continuous operation. The
total coverage for the two coats shall be 200 square feet maximum per gallon
of undiluted compound, unless otherwise recommended by the manufacturer's
\vritten instructions. The compound shall form a uniform, continuous,
coherentf~lm that will not check, crack, or peel. Immediately apply an
additional coat of compound to areas where the film is defective. Respray
concrete surfaces subjected to rainfall within 3 hours after the curing
compound application.
(7) . Protection of Treated Surfaces: Prohibit foot and vehicular traffic and other
sources of abrasion for not less than 72 hours after compound application.
Maintain continuity of the coating for the entire curing period and
immediately repair any damage.
(i) Liquid Chemical Sealer-Hardener Curing. Provide for interior tloors
that do not receive a tloor covering, or in lieu of liquid membrane-
fonning compound curing for other surfaces. Apply sealet:-hardener
in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. Seal or cover
joints and openings in which joint sealant is to be applied, as required
by the joint sealant manufacturer.
(ii) Curing Periods. Allow 7 days.
H.
San1))lin2: And Testin2:.
(1) Sampling. ASTM CI72 - Collect samples of fresh concrete to perform tests
specified.
(2) Testing.
a. Slump Tests: ASTM C 143 - Take samples during concrete
placement-. The maximum slump may be increased as specified with
the addition of an approved admixture provided that the water-
cement ratio is not exceeded. Perform tests at commencement of
concrete placement and for each batch (minimum) or every 10 cubic
yards (maximum) of concrete.
b. Air Content: ASTM C 173 or ASTivl C231 - Test air-entrained
concrete for air content at the same frequency as specified for slump
tests.
c. Compressive Strength Tests: Make five test cylinders for each set of
tests in accordance with ASTM C31. Test two cylinders at 7 days,
two cylinders at 28 days, and hold one cylinder in reserve. Samples
03300-9
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
3.2
I
I
I
I
I
I
for strength tests shall be taken not less than once a day, nor less than
once.for each 50 cubic yards of concrete, nor less than once for each
5000 square feet of surface area for slabs or walls. For the entire
project, there shall be no less than five sets of samples taken and
strength tests performed for each mix design of concrete placed.
Each strength test result shall be the average of two cylinders from
the same concrete sample tested at 28 clays. If the average of any
three consecutive strength test results is less than 3000 psi or if any
strength test result falls below 3000 psi by more than 500 psi. take a
minimum of three ASTM C42 core samples from the in-place work
represented by the low test cylinder results and test. Concrete
represented by core test shall be considered structurally adequate if
the average of three cores is equal to at least 2550 psi and ifno single
core is less than 2250 psi. Locations represented by erratic core
strengths shall be retested. Remove concrete not" meeting strength
critel'ia and provide new acceptable concrete. Repair core holes with
nonshrink grout. Match color and finish of adjacent concrete.
MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT:
A. Cast in place concrete will be considered as integral to the structures of which it is a
part and payment will be included in the various specific items in the bid schedule.
03300-10
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
SECTION 04200
UNIT MASONRY
PART 1 - GENERAL
SubmittCtls:
General: Submit the following in accordance with Conditions of Contract and Division I
Specification Sections.
Product do/a for each ditTerent masonry unit, accessory, and other manufactured product
indicated.
Ma.mmy Unit CertUieation: The unit manufacturer shall certify that the units delivered to the
job site meet the requirements specified herein and shall submit test reports to the Architect
from each lot furnished. The reports shall give compressive strength in #/sq. in.: water
absorption in #/cu. ft.; moisture content in % of total absorption.
Samples/or initial selection purposes of the following:
Unit masomy samples in small-scale form showing full extent of colors and textures
available for each different exposed masonry unit required.
!l1asonry mortar samples showing full extent of colors available.
Quality Assurance:
Single Source Re.sponsibilityfor Masonry Units: Obtain exposed masonry units of uniform
texture and color, or a uniform blend within the ranges accepted for these characteristics,
from one manufacturer for each different product required for each continuous surface or
visually related surfaces.
Single Source Re.sponsibility/or Mortar Materials: Obtain mortar ingredients of liniform
quality, including color for exposed masonry, from one manufacturer for each cementitous
component and from one source and producer for each aggregate.
Retain mock-ups during construction as standard for judging completed masonry work.
When directed, demolish mock-ups and remove from site.
DelivelY, Storage. And Handling:
Deliver masonry materials to project in undamaged condition.
04200-1
I
I
Store and handle masomy units to prevent their deterioration or damage due to moisture,
temperature changes, contaminants, corrosion or other causes.
I
I
Limit moisture absorption of concrete masonry units during delivery and until time of
installation to the maximum percentage specified for Type I units for the average annual
relative humidity as reported by the U.S. Weather Bureau Station nearest project site.
I
Store eementitious /Jwterials off the ground, under cover and in dry location. Cover with
waterproof tarpaulins. Deliver and store materials in original, unbroken packages and
containers, with manufacturer's label thereon, to prevent damage and permit identitication.
I
I
Store aggregates where grading and other required characteristics can be maintained. Store
aggregates to prevent inclusion of foreign materials.
Store masonry accessuries including metal items to prevent deterioration by corrosion and
accumulation of dirt.
I
I
I
I
Project Cunditions:
Protection o(Work: During erection, cover top of walls with heavy waterproof sheeting at
end of each day's work. Cover partially completed structures when work. is not in progress.
Extend cover a minimum of 24 inches down both sides and hold cover securely in
place.
Do not apply unifiJrI71.floOl' or roofloading for at least 12 hours after building masonry walls
or columns.
I
Du not apply concentrated loads for at least 3 days after building masonry walls or columns.
Staining: Prevent grout, mortar or soil from staining the face of masonry to be left exposed
or painted. Remove immediately grout or mortar in contact with such masonry.
I
Protect base of walls from rain-splashed mud and mortar splatter by means of.
coverings spread on ground and over wall surface.
I
Protect sills, ledges and projections from droppings of mortar.
I
Cold lYeather Protection:
I
Do nut lay n\asonry units when air temperature is below 40 degrees F. on' a falling
thermometer, or when it appears probable that temperatures below 40 degrees F. will be
encountered before mortar has set. When mean daily temperature is below 40 degrees F., or
that temperature or lower is forecast to occur within 48 hours, make provisions for heating
I
I
I
04200-2
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
and protecting masonry mat'erials and work from freezing for 72 hours after laying masonry.
Heat and maintain temperature of masonry materials to at least 40 degrees F. but not more
than 160 degrees F.
Heat and maintain uniform air temperature above 40 degrees F. on both sides of masonry
work. Use fireproof protective coverings and approved UL space heaters~
Remove any ice or snow formed on masonry bed by carefully applying heat until top surface
is dry to the touch.
Remove masonry damaged by freezing conditions.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
Concrete J\;!asonry Units:
General: Comply with referenced standards and other requirements indicated below
applicable to each form of concrete masonry unit required.
Provide special shapes where required for lintels, corners,jambs, sash, controljoints,
headers, bonding, and other special conditions.
Provide square-edged units for outside corners, except where indicated as bullnose.
Size: Provide concrete masomy units complying with requirements indicated below
for size that are manufactured to specified face dimensions within tolerances specified
in the applicable referenced ASTM specification for concrete masonry units.
Concrete l\1asomy Units: Split Face Units Manufactured to specified
dimensions 00/8 inch less than nominal widths by nominal heights by nominal
lengths indicated on drawings.
Provide Type 1, moisture-controlled units.
Exposed Faces: Manufacturer's standard color and texture for interior conditions,
unless otherwise indicated.
Hollow Load-Bearing Concrete l\1asonry Units: ASTM C 90, Grade N, and as follows:
Unit Compressive Strength: Provide units with minimum average net area
compressive strength of 1900 psi.
04200-3
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Weight Class(ficCltion: Lightweight. Aggregate shall be 100% lightweight
material and shall not contain coal cinder, bottom ash or similar waste products.
Size: Manufacturer's standard units with nominal face dimensions of 16" long x 8"
high (15-5/8" x 7-5/8" actual) x thicknesses indicated on the Drawings (4",6".8", &
12").
Mortar j\;Jaterials:
Port/and Cement: ASTM 'C 150, Type 1, except Type III may be used for cold weather
construction. Provide natural color or white cement as required to produce required mortar
color.
iV/asonry Celnent:
ASTM C 91.
Hydrc!ted Li,ne:
ASTM C 207, Type S.
Aggregate:
ASTM C 144, except for joints less than 1/4" use aggregate
graded with 100 percent passing the No. 16 sieve.
Water:
Clean and potable.
Coarse iVlasonry Grout iV[aterials:
Portland Cement:
ASTM CI50-77, Type 1.
Sand:
ASTM CI44-76.
Coarse Aggregate:
ASTM C33, GA. D.O.T. #87 stone or pea gravel, 1/2"
maXimum.
Water:
Clean and potable.
Joint Reinforcement:
Materials: Comply with requirements indicated below for basic materials and with
requirements indicated under each form of joint reinforcement for size and other
characteristics:
Sleel Wire: ASTM A 82 for uncoated wire.
Hlire Finishes: Provide the following wire finish for the application indicated:
04200-4
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Mill Galvanized AST1\1641 Class 1 (0.4 oz. zinc coating per sq. ft.) for all interior
concrete masonry unit walls.
Hot Dipped Galvanized ASTkf A 153 Class B 2 (1.5 oz. zinc coating per sq. ft.) for
all exterior masonry cavity walls.
Description: Provide welded-wire units prefabricated with deformed continuous side rods
and plain cross rods into straight lengths of not less than 10', with prefabricated corner and
tee units, and complying with requirements indicated below:
Width: Fabricate joint reinforcement in units with widths of approximately 2" less
than nominal width,of walls and partitions as required to provide mortar coverage of
not less than 5/8" on joint faces exposed to exterior and 1/2" elsewhere.
Wire Diameter/iJl' Side and Cross Rods: 9 Gauge.
For ,s'ingle-wythe IIlC1somy provide type as follows \,vith single pair of side rods:
Truss design with perpendicular cross rods spaced not more than 16" O.c.
Manuj"acturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products of one of the
following:
Single- Wythe MasonlJl
AA600 "Block Truss", AA Wire Products Co.
"Truss", Duro- Wal, Inc.
"Lox All Truss Mesh", HB (Hohmann & Barnard), Inc.
"Truss", National Wire Products Corp.
Miscellaneous Alasol1lY Accessorie:s':
Non-J\1etal!ic Expansion Joint Strips: Premolded, flexible cellular neoprene rubber filler
strips complying with ASTM D 1056, Grade RE41El, capable of compression up to 35%,
of width and thickness indicated.
Premolded Con/rolJoint Strips: Material as indicated belo\v, designed to tirstandarcl sash
block and to maintain lateral stability in masonry wall; size and configuration as indicated.
Styrene-butadiene rubbe,: compound complying with ASTM D 2000, Designation
2AA-805.
04200-5
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Bond Breaker Strips: Asphalt-saturated organic roofing felt complying with ASTM D 226,
Type 1 (No. 15 asphalt felt).
!vfasom}l Cleaners:
Acidic Cleaner: Manufacturer's standard strength general purpose cleaner designeclfor new
masonry surfaces of type indicated; composed of blended organic and inorganic acids
combined with special wetting systems and inhibitors; expressly approved for intended use
by manufacturer of masonry units being cleaned:
Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the following:
"Sure Klean" No. 600 Detergent; ProSoCo, Inc.
lvfortar And Grout Mixes:
General: Do not add admixtures including coloring pigments, air-entrall1ll1g agents,
accelerators, retarders, water repellant agents, anti-freeze compounds or other admixtures,
unless otherwise indicated.
Do not use calcium chloride in mortar or grout.
J\1ixing: Combine and thoroughly mix cementitous, water and aggregates ii1 a mechanical
batch mixer; comply with referenced ASTM standards for mixing time and "vater content.
Mortarfor Unit lvJasol1l}l." Comply with ASTM C 270, Proportion Specification, for types
of mortar required, unless otherwise indicated.
Use Type j\lf l77ort({J: for masonry below grade and in contact with earth, and where
indicated.
Use Type S mortar for exterior, above-grade loadbearing and non-Ioadbearing walls;
for interior loadbearing walls; and for other applications where another type is not
indicated.
Groutfhr Unit Masol1lY: Comply with ASTM C 476 for grout for use in construction
of reinforced and nonreinforced unit masonry. Use grout of consistency indicated or if not
otherwise indicated, of coarse consistency at time of placement which will completely Ii II all
spaces intended to receive grout. Grollt used shall be the following material parts by volume:
. 04200-6
I
I
Material
Parts by Volume
I
Portland Cement
I
Fine Aggregate (Sand)
2-1/4 to 3
I
Coarse Aggregate (pea gravel or
crushed stone, 1/2" max.)
1 to 2
Water
SuHicient to cause the mixture
to flow readily, without segregation
I
I
Materials are to be proportionally mixed, within the limits shown above, to produce a grout
with a minimum compressive strength of 2500 psi at 28 days.
I
PART 3 - EXECUTION
Examinat ion:
I
Examine conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation
tolerances and other specific conditions, and other conditions affecting performance of unit
m aso my.
I
I
For the record, prepare written report, endorsed by Installer, listing conditions
detrimental to performance of unit masonry.
I
Examine rough-in and built-in construction to verify actual locations of piping connections
prior to installation.
Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
I
fnstallaf ion, General:
I
Do not vflet concrete masonry units.
I
Clcaning ReiJ?!orcing: Before placing,' remove loose rust, ice and other coatings from
reinforcing.
I
Build chases and rcceS,\'C$: as shown or required for the work of other trades. Provide not
less than 8" of masonry between chase or recess and jamb of openings, and between adjacent
chases and recesses.
I
I
04200-7
I
I
I
Leave openings for equipment to be installed before completion of masonry work. After
installation of equipment, complete masonry work to match work immediately a.djacent to the
opel1lng.
I
I
Cut masonry units using motor-driven saws to provide clean, sharp, unchipped edges. Cut
units as required to provide continuous pattern and to fit adjoining work. Use hIlI-size units
\vithout cutting where possible.
I
Use (liy cUlling S({\VS to cut concrete masonry units.
Construction Tolerances:
I
I
I
Variation/i'om Plumb: For vertical lines and surfaces of columns, walls and arrises do not
exceed 1/4" in 10', or 3/8" in a story height not to exceed 20', nor 1/2" in 40' or more. For
external corners, expansion'joints, control joints and other conspicuous lines, do not exceed
1/4" in any story or 20' ma~imum, nor 1/2" in 40' or more. For vertical alignment of head
joints do not exceed plus or minus 1/4" in 10',1/2" maximum.
I
Variation/i'om Level: For bed joints and lines of exposed lintels, sills, parapets, horizontal
gr()oves and other conspicuous lines, do not exceed 1/4" in any bay or 20' maximum, nor 1/2"
in 40' or more. For top surface of bearing walls do not exceed 1/8" between adjacent 1100r
elements in 10' or 1/16" \vithin width of a single unit.
I
I
Variation of Linear Building Line: For position shovvn in plain and related portion of
columns, walls and partitions, do not exceed 1/2" in an)' bay or 20' maximum, nor 3/4" in40'
or more.
I
I
Variation in Cross-Sectional Dimensions: For columns and thickness of \valls, from
dimensions shown, do not exceed minus 1/4" nor plus 1/2".
Variation in Mortar Joint Thickness: Do not exceed bed joint thickness indicated by more
than plus or minus 1/8", with a maximum thickness limited to 1/2". Do not exceed heacljoint
thickness indicated by more than plus or minus 1/8".
I
Laying }\;fasol1l)l vValls:
I
I
Layout walls in advance for accurate spacing of surface bond patterns with uniform joint
widths and to accurately locate opening, movement-type joints, returns and offsets. A void
the use of less-than-hal f-size units at corners,jambs and wherever possi ble at other locations.
Lay-up walls to comply with specified construction tolerances, with courses accurately spaced
and coordinated with other work.
I
I
04200-8
I
I
I
Pat/ern Bond: Lay exposed masonry in the bond pattern shown or, if not shown, lay in
running bond with vertical joint in each course centered on units in courses above and below.
~ .
Lay concealed masonry with all units in a wythe in running bond or bonded by lapping not
less than 2". Bond and intel'lock each course of each wythe at corners. Do not use units with
less than nominal 4" horizontal face dimensions at corners or jambs.
I
I
Slopping and Resuming 1Fork: Rack back 1/2-unit length in each course; do not tooth.
Clean exposed surfaces o(set masonry, wet units lightly (if required) and remove loose
masonry units and mortar prior to laying fresh masonry.
I
I
I
Buill-in Work: As the \vork progresses, build-in items specified under this and other sections
of'these specifications. Fill in solidly with masonry around built-in items.
Fill space between hollow metal frames and masonry solidly with mortar. unless
otherwise indicated.
I
1Yhere buill-in ilems are to be embedded in or attached to cores of hollow masonry
units, place a layer qfmetallath in the joint below and rod mortar or grout into core.
I
Fill cores in hollow masonry units with grout 3 courses (24") under bearing plates,
beams, lintels, posts and similar items, unless otherwise indicated.
I
j\;!ortar Bedding And Joinl ing:
I
Lay hollow concrele mason,")! units with full mortar coverage on horizontal and vertical face
shells. Bed webs in mortar in stat1ing course on footings and in all courses of piers, columns
and pilasters, and where adjacent to cells or cavities to be reinforced or filled with concrete
or grout. For starting course on footings where cells are not grouted, spread out full m011a1'
bed including areas under cells.
I
I
j\1ainlain joinl widlhs shown, except for minor vanatlOns required to maintain bond
alignment. I f not shown, lay walls with 3/8" joints.
I
Cut joints flush for masonry walls which are to be concealed or to be covered by other
materials, unless otherwise indicated.
I
Tool exposedjoinls slightly concave using a jointer larger than joint thickness, unless
otherwise indicated.
I
Remove masonry unils disturbed after laying; clean and reset in fresh mortar. Do not pound
corners or jambs to shift adjacent stretcher units which have been set in position. If
adjustments are required, remove units, clean off mortar and reset in ti-esh mortar.
I
I
04200-9
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Placing Crout:
Uye grout to fill vertical cells of concrete masonry units (CMU) where shown or specitied to
be filled and/or reinforced' on the Drawings. Use llrout to till bond beams of concrete
masonry units (CMU). Fills cells of eMU wall to avoid any pockets or disproportionate
settlement of the grout.
Do not retemper grout. Use no grout after setting has begun or after 2-1/2 hours of initial
nllXll1g.
In lieu of"grout. 3000 psi concrete may be used to till all reinforced masonry cells.
Structuml Bonding q{Masomy:
Use continuous horizontaljoint reil~forcel71ent installed in horizontal mortar joints. Install
at not more than 16" o.c. vertically.
Corners: Provide interlocking masonry unit bond in each course at corners. unless otherwise
shown.
Provide continuity at corners with prefabricated "L" units, in addition to masonry
bonding.
Intersecting and Abutting Walls: Unless vertical expansion or control joints are shown at
juncture, provide same type of bonding specified above and as follo\vs:
Provide continuity with horizontal joint reinforcement using prefabricated "T" units.
intersecting Load-bearing FValls: If carried up separately, block or tooth vertical joint with
8" maximum offsets and provide rigid steel anchors spaced not more than 4'_0" o.c. vertically,
or omit blocking and provide rigid steel anchors at not more than 2'-0" o.c. vertically. Form
anchors of galvanized steel not less than 1-1/2" x 1/4" x 2'-0" long with ends turned up not
less than 2" or with cross-pins. If used with hollow masonry units, embed ends in mortar-
filled cores.
Non-bearing interior Partitions: Build wall to height of8" min. above finish ceiling unless
shown otherwise.
Masol1ly-Cell insulation:
Pour gmnular insulation into the cores of all exterior hollow masonry unit walls as shown
to fill void spaces completely. Maintain inspection ports to s.how presence of insulation at
extremities of each pour area. Close ports after complete coverage has been conlirmed.
04200-10
I
I
Limit fall of insulation to one story in height, but not to exceed 20'-0". The insulation shall
be poured into the wall at any convenient interval. Wall section under doors and windows
shall be tilled before sills are placed.
I
I
I
All holes and openings in the wall through which insulation can escape shall be permanently
sealed or caulked prior to installation of the insulation. Non-corrosive screening shall be used
in all weep holes.
Horizontal Joint Reinforcement:
I
I
General: Provide continuous horizontal joint reinforcement as indicated. Install longitudinal
side rods in mortar for their entire length with a minimum cover of 5/8" exterior side ohvalls,
1/2" elsewhere. Lap reinforcing a minimum 01'6".
Cut or interrupt joint reiI1forcement at control and expansion joints, unless otherwise
indicated.
I
Reinfe)rce ,valls with continuous horizontal joint reinforcing unless specifically noted to be
omitted.
I
Provide continuity at corners and wall intersections by use of prefabricated "L'r and "T"
sections. Cut and bend reinforcement units as directed by manufacturer for continuity at
returns offsets, column fireproofing, pipe enclosures and other special conditions.
I
Space continuous horizontal reinforcement as follows:
I
For single-wythe walls, space reinforcement at 16" o.c. vertically, unless otherwise
indicated.
I
I
Reinforce mammy openings. greater than 1 '_0" wide, with horizontal joint
reinforcement placed in 2 horizontaljoints approximately 8" apart, immediately above
the lintel and immediately below the sill. Extend reinforcement a minimum of2'-0"
beyond jambs oftbe opening except at control joints.
I
In addition to ,vall reiJ?fOl:cement, provide additional reinforcement at openings as
required to comply with the above.
I
Control And Expansion Joints:
I
I
General: Install control and expansionjoins in unit masomy where indicated. Build in related
items as the masomy progresses. Do not form a continuous span through movement joints
unless provisions are made to prevent in-plane restraint of wall or parti tion movement.
I
I
04200-11
I
,I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Form controljoints in concrete masonry as follows:
Fit bond breaker strips into hollow contour in ends of block units on one side of
contraljoint. Fill the resultant core with grout and rake joints in exposed faces.
Form expal1sionjoinls in concrete masonry as follows:
Build injoinl.fillers: where indicated.
Form openjoinl ofwiclth indicated but not less than 3/8 inch for installation of sealant
ancl backer rod specified in Division 7 Section "Joint Sealers." rVlaintain joint free and
clear of mortar.
Linlels:
Install steel lintels where indicated.
Provide masonry lintels \vhere shown and wherever openings of more than 2'-0" for block size
units are shown without structural steel or other supporting lintels. Provide precast or
formed-in-place masonry lintels. Cure precast lintels before handling and installation.
Temporarily support formed-iil-Iace lintels.
For hollow concrete masomy unit walls, use specially formed U-shaped lintel units
with reinforcement bars placed as shown filled with coarse grout.
Provide minimum bearing of 8" at each jamb, unless otherwise indicated.
Flashing Of Masonry Work:
General: Install embedded ,f1ashing in masonry at or above shelf angles, lintels, ledges, other
obstructions to the downward flow of water in the wall, and where indicated.
Prepare masonry sw:fclces so that they are smooth and fi'ee from projections that could
puncture tlashing. Place through-wall flashing on sloping bed of mortar and cover with
mortar. Seal penetrations in flashing with adhesive/sealant/tape as recommended by flashing
manufacturer before covering with mortar.
Install.flashings as follows:
A I lintels and shelf angles, extend flashing a minimum of 4 inches into masonry at
each encl. Extend flashing from exterior face of outer wythe of masonry, through the
outer \vythe, turned up a minimum of 4 inches, and through the inner wythe to within
1/2 inches of the interior face of the wall in exposed masonry.
CUI off/lashing flush with face of wall after masonry wall construction is completed.
04200-12
I
I
Install weep holes in the head joints in exterior wythes of the tirst course of masonry
immediately above ledges and embedded flashings and as follows:
I
Space ,veep holes 24 inches o.c. max.
I
Field Quality Contml:
I
Testing Frequency: Tests and evaluations listed in this article will be performed during
construction for each 5000 sq. ft. of wall area or portion thereof.
I
I
Grout compressive strength will be sampled and tested per ASTM C 1019.
Repair, Pointing. And Cleaning:
I
Remove and replace masonry units which are loose, chipped, broken, stained or otherwise
damaged, or if units do not match adjoining units as intended. Provide new units to match
adjoining units and instali in fresh mortar or grout, pointed to eliminate evidence of
replacement.
I
Pointing: During the tooliilg of joints, enlarge any voids or holes, except weep holes, and
completely 1"i II with mortar. Point-up alljoints including corners, openings and adjacent work
to provide a neat, uniform appearance, prepared for application of sealants.
I
Final Cleaning: After mortar is thoroughly set and cured, clean masonry as follo\\'s:
I
Remove large mortai'particles by hand with wooden paddles and non-metallic scrape
hoes or chisels.
I
I
Test cleaning methods on sample wall panel; leave 1/2 panel uncleaned for
comparison purposes. Obtain Architect's approval of sample cleaning before
proceeding with cleaning of masonry. Apply acidic cleaner in compliance with
directions of cleaner manufacturer.
I
Protect a((jacent stone and non-masonry surfaces from contact with cleaner by
covering them with liquid strippable masking agent, polyethylene film or waterproof
masking tape.
I
I
Saturate wall sUI/aces with 'water prior to application of cleaners; remove cleaners
promptly by rinsing thoroughly with clear water.
I
Protection: Provide final protection and maintain conditions in a manner acceptable to
Installer, which ensures unit masonry work being without damage and deterioration at time
of substantial completion.
I
04200-13
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
lvleasurement and Payment:
A. Work under this section will be paid for at the lump sum amount shown in the bid
schedule for pump station building complete.
04200-14
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
SECTION 05120
STRUCTURAL STEEL
p ART I - GENERAL
This Section covers fabrication and erection of structural steel work, as sho\vn on drawings including
schedules, notes, and details showihg size and location of members, typical connections, and types
of steel required.
Submittals:
General: Submit the following in accordance with Conditions of Contract and Division
Specitication Sections.
Product Data or manufacturer's specifications and installation instructions for following
products. Include laboratory test reports and other data to show compliance with
specifications (including specified standards).
High-strength ho/ts(each type), including nuts and washers.
Structural steel primer paints.
Non-Shrink grout.
Shop drawings including complete details and schedules for fabrication and assembly of
structural steel members, procedures, diagrams, and shall identify the specitic product. list all
design criteria, list all material types and paint specifications.
Include details of cuts, cOlmections, camber, holes, and other pertinent data. Indicate
welds by standard A WS symbols and show size, length, and type of each weld.
Provide setting drawings, templates, and directions for installation of anchor bolts and
other anchorages to be installed by others.
Shop drawings shall show all connection details. Connection details and design
calculations for all connections not specifically detailed on the drawings shall be
designed, signed and sealed by a registered professional engineer licensed by the State
of Georgia.
Fabrication shall not commence until shop drawings have been marked reviewed by
the structural engineer.
05120-1
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
. Welder '.I' Certification: Provide certification that welders to be employed in work have
satisfactmily passed A WS qualification tests within the previous 12 months.
Bolting and Welding: Inspeytion and test reports shall be reported in writing to the architect,
structural engineer and contractor.
Quality Assurance:
Codes (/nd Standards: Comply with provisions offollowing, except as otherwise indicated:
American Institute r1Steel Construction (AISC) "Code of Standard Practice for Steel
Buildings and Bridges."
AISC "Specifications for Structural Steel Buildings," including "Commentary."
Qualificationsf;)/" Welding Work: Qualify \velding procedures and welding operators in
accordance with A WS "Qualification" requirements.
Ij"recertijication of welders i.s' required, retesting will be Contractor's responsibility.
Delivery.. Storage. And Handling:
Deliver materials to site at such intervals to ensure uninterrupted progress of work.
Deliver anchor bolfs and anchorage devices, which are to be embedded in cast-in-place
concrete or masonry, in ample time to not to delay work.
Store materials to permit easy access for inspection and identification. Keep steel members
off ground by using pallets, platforms, or other supports. Protect steel members and
packaged materials from coiTosion and deterioration. If bolts and nuts become dry or rusty,
clean and relubricate before use.
Do not store materials on structure in a manner that might cause distortion or damage
to members or supporting structures. Repair or replace damaged materials or
structures as directed.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
Materials:
Metal Smfaces. General: For fabrication of work that will be exposed to view, use only
materials that are smooth and fi'ee of surface blemishes including pitting, rust and scale seam
marks, roller marks, rolled trade names, and roughness. Remove such blemishes by grinding,
05120-2
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
or by welding and grinding', prior to cleaning, treating, and applying surface tinishes.
Structural Steel Shapes,
Plates. and Bars:
ASTM A36.
Steel Pipe
ASTM A53, T)'pe S, GRB
Cold-Formed Steel Tubing:
ASTM A500, Grade B, FY = 46KSI
A nchor Bolts:
ASTM A307, nonheaded type unless
otherwise indicated.
Unfinished Threaded Fasteners:
ASTM A307, Grade A, regular lo\v-carbon
steel bolts and nuts.
Provide either hexagonal or square heads and nuts, excepts use only hexagonal units
for exposed connections.
High-Strength Threaded Fasteners: Heavy hexagon structural bolts, heavy hexagon nuts. and
hardened washers, as follows:
Quenched ami tempered medium-carbon steel bolts, nuts, and v>ashers, complying
with ASTM A325, Type-N.
Where indic:ated as galvanized, provide units that are zinc coated, either
mechanically deposited complying with ASTM B695, Class 50, or hot-dip
galvanized complying with ASTM A153.
Us'e at Contractor's option.'
Electrodesfor Welding: Comply with A WS Code E70 18 Electrodes.
Structural Steel Primer Paint: Fabricator's standard rust-inhibiting primer.
I
I
I
I
I
I
Cement Grout: Portland cement (ASTM C 150, Type I or Type 111) and clean, uniformly
graded, natural sand (ASTM C404, Size No.2). Mix at a ratio of 1.0 part cement to 3.0 parts
sand, by volume, with minimum water required for placement and hydration.
Nonmetallic Shrinkage-Resistant Groul: Premixed, nonmetallic, noncorrosive, nonstaining
product containing selected silica sands, Portland cement, shrinkage compensating agents,
plasticizing and water-reducing agents, complying with CE-CRD-621.
05120-3
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
Sure Grip Grout; Dayton Superior.
Euco N.S.; Euclid Chemical Co.
Sealtight 588 Grout; W. R. Meadows.
Propak; Pro~ex Industries, Inc.
Five Star Grout; U.S. Grout Corp.
Fabricotion:
Shop Fabrication 0/1(/ Assembly: Fabricate and assemble structural assemblies in shop to
greatest extent possible. Fabricate' items of structural steel in accordance with AISC
Specifications and as indicated on final shop drawings. Provide camber in structural members
where indicated.
Properly mark and match-mark materials for tield assembly. Fabricate.for delivery
sequence that will expedite erection and minimize field handling of materials.
Connections: Weld or bolt shop connections, as indicated.
Boltfield connect ions, except where welded connections or other connections are indicated.
Provide high-strength threaded fasteners for principal bolted connections, except
\\there unfinished bolts are indicated.
All connections, bolt field and shop, shall be designed to support one-half the total
uniform load capacity shown in the tables of uniform load constants, Part 2 of Manual
of Steel Constructiop, unless specific connections, additional forces or reactions are
shown on drawings.
High-Strength Bolted Construction: Install high-strength threaded fasteners in accordance
with the turn-of-the-nut method per AISC "Specifications for Structural.Toints using ASTM
A325 or A490 Bolts."
Welded Construction: Comply with A WS Code for procedures, appearance and quality of
welds, and methods used in correcting welding work.
Sheor Connectors: Prepare steel surfaces as recommended by manufacturer of shear
. connectors. Weld shear connectors in field, spaced as shown, to beams and girders in
composite construction. Use automatic end welding of headed stud shear connectors in
accordance with manufacturer's printed instructions.
Holes for Other Work: Provide holes required for securing other work to structural steel
framing and for passage of other work through steel framing mem bel's, as shown on final shop
drawings.
05120-4
I
I
I
I
I
Provide threaded nuts welded to framing and other specialty items as indicated to receive
other work.
Cut, drill. or punch holes perpendicular to metal surfaces. Do not flame-cut holes or enlarge
holes by burning. Drill holes in bearing plates.
Shop Painting:
General: Shop-paint structural steel, except those members of portions of members to be
embedded in concrete or mortar.
I
I
Do not painl sl/lf{{(;es to be welded or high-strength bolted \vith friction-type
connections.
Do not paint .I'll/faces which are to receive shear connectors.
I
I
I
SUlface Preparation: After inspection and before shipping, clean steel\vork to be painted.
Remove loose rust, loose mill scale, and spatter, slag, or flux deposits.
Paint ing: Immediately after surface preparation, apply structural steel primer paint in
accordance with manufacturer's instructions and at a rate to provide dry film thickness of not
less than 2.0 mils. Use painting methods that result in full coverage of joints, corners, edges,
and exposed surfaces.
Source Quality Control:
I
General: Materials and fabrication procedures are subject to inspection and tests in milL shop,
and field, conducted by a qualified inspection agency. Such inspections and tests will
notlrelieve Contractor of responsibility for providing materials and fabrication procedures in
compliance with specified requirements.
I
I
Promptly remove and replace materials or fabricated components that do not comply.
I
I
De.)'ign qj"kfembers and Connections: Details shown are typical; similar details apply to
similar conditions, unless otherwise indicated. Verify dimensions at site \vhenever possible
without causing delay in the work.
Promptly notWI Architect whenever design of members and connections for any
portion of structure are not clearly indicated.
I
I
I
I
05120-5
I
I
I
PART 3 - EXECUTION
Erection:
I
I
Erector must examine areas and conditions under which structural steel work is to be
installed, and notify the COl,1tractor, in writing, of conditions detrimental to the proper and
timely completion ohvork. Do not proceed with work until the unsatisf~1ctory conditions
have been corrected in a manner acceptable to the erector.
I
I
Temporory Shoring (1/1(1 Brocing: Provide temporary shoring and bracing members with
connections of sufticient strength to bear imposed loads. Remove temporary members and
connections when permanent members are in place and final connections are made. Pro"vide
temporary guy lines to achieve proper alignment of structures as erection proceeds.
TeI71J)()r(l!~V Planking: Provide temporary planking and working platforms as necessary to
effectively complete work.
I
I
I
Selling Bases (lnd Bearing Plates: Clean concrete and masonry bearing surfaces of bond-
reducing materials and roughen to ill1prove bond to surfaces. Clean bottom surface of base
and bearing plates.
Set loose and attached base plates and bearing plates for structural members on
wedges or other adjusting devices.
I
I
Tighten anchor bolts after supported members have been positioned and plumbed.
Do not-remove wedges or shims, but if protruding ,cut off flush with edge of base or
bearing plate prior to packing with grout.
Pack grout solidly between bearing surfaces and bases or plates to ensure that no
voids remain. Finish'exposed surfaces, protect installed materials, and allow' to cure.
I
Field Assembly: Set structural frames accurately. to lines and elevations indicated. Align and
adjust various members forming pati of complete frame or structure before permanently
fastening. Clean bearing surfaces and other surfaces that will be in permanent contact before
assembly. Perform necessary adjustments to compensate for discrepancies in elevations and
al ignment.
I
I
Level and plumb individual members of structure within specified AlSC tolerances.
I
SjJ/ice mCl71bcrsonly where indicated and accepted on shop drawings.
I
Erection Bolts: On exposed welded construction, remove erection bolts, fill holes with plug
welds, and grind smooth at exposed surfaces.
I
C0177J}ly with ArSC Specifications for bearing, adequacy of temporary connections,
al ignment, and removal of paint on surfaces adjacent to field welds.
I
05120-6
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Do not enlarge unfair holes in members by burning or by using drift pins, except in
secondary bracing members. Ream holes that must be enlarged to admit bolts.
Gas CUlling: Do not use gas cutting torches in field for correcting fabrication errors in
primary structural framing. 'Cutting will be pem1itted only on secondary members that are not
under stress, as acceptable to Architect. Finish gas-cut sections equal to a sheared
appearance when permitted.
Touch-Up Pointing: Immediately after erection, clean field welds, bolted connections, and
abraded areas of shop paint'. Apply paint to exposed areas using same material as used for
shop painting.
Apply by brush or spray to provide minimum dry film thickness of 2.0 mils.
Qualify Control:
Correct deficiencies in structural steel work that inspections and laboratory test reports have
indicated to be not in compliance with requirements. Perform addi tional tests, at Contractor's
expense, as necessary to reconfirm any noncompliance of original work and to show
compliance of corrected work.
Shop-Bolted and Field-Bolted Connections: Inspect or test 111 accordance with AISC
specifications.
Field Welding: Inspect and test during erection of structural steel.
Cerltfj; welders and,conduct inspections and tests as required. Record types and
locations of defects found in work. Record work required and performed to correct
deficiencies.
Pe/form visual inspection of all welds in accordance with A WS specifications.
J\1easuremenl and Payment:
A. Work under this section will be paid for at the lump sum amount shown in the bid
schedule for Pump Station Building Complete.
05120-7
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
SECTION 05310
STEEL DECK
PART 1 - GENERAL
Submittals:
Cenerol: Submit the following accordance with conditions of Contract and Division 1
Specification Sections.
Shop drowings showing gauge, size, finish, supp0l1 locations, length and width, layout and
types of deck units, connection details, and conditions requiring closure strips, supplementary
framing, openings and other accessories. Shop drawings shall identify the specific project,
shall list all design criteria, :and show all details necessary for proper erection.
Product Datu: Submit manufacturer's specification, installation instructions, load tables for
gravity loads and diaphragm shea[ strength and stiffness in accordance with the "Steel Deck
Institute Design Manual" and the "Steel Deck Institute Diaphragm Manual".
Quality Assurance:
Codes and Standards: Comply with provisions ofthe following codes and standards, except
as otherwise indicated:
American Iron .(ll1d Steel Institute (AISI), "Specification for the Design of Cold-
Formed Steel Structural Members."
Steel Deck Institute (.S'DI), "Design Manual for Composite Decks, Form Decks and
Roof Decks."
Qualification ofField Welding: Use qualified welding processes and welding operators in
accordance with "Welder Qualification" procedures of A WS.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
A1am!lacturers:
}\;/am!lacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products of one of the
following:
Bowman iV/etal Deck Div., Cyclops Corp.
Consolidated Systems, Inc.
H. H. Robertson Co:
Roll Form Products, Inc.
VuIcraft Div., Nucor Corp.
05310-1
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Materials:
Steel deck be ofsize. gauge, diaphragm shear strength and stiffness, and finish as indicated
on Drawings.
Steel for Galvanized J\1etal Deck Units: ASTM A 446, having a minimum yield strength of
33 ksi. Grade as required to c'omply with SDI specifications. Properties shall conform to
AlSI "Specification for the. Design of Cold Formed Steel Structural Members".
Miscellaneous Steel Shapes: ASTM A 36.
Screws: Self-drilling type, cad plated.
Shee/ J\;[et{t/ Accessories: ASTM A 526, commercial quality, galvanized.
Fasteners: Powder actuated fasteners shall be ENKK Pin as manufactured by Hilti, or
approved equal.
Galvanizing: ASTM A 525,G60
Galvanizing Repair: Where galvanized surfaces are damaged, prepare surfaces and repair in
accordance with procedures specified in ASTM A 780.
Fabricat ion:
General: Form deck units in lengths to span three or more supports, with flush, telescoped,
or nested 2-inch laps at ends and interlocking or nested side laps, of metal thickness, depth,
and width as indicated.
P ART 3 - EXECUTION
Installation:
General: Install deck units' and accessories in accordance with manufacturer's
recommendations, shop drawings, and as specified herein.
Place deck units on supporting steel framework and adjust to tinal position with ends
accurately aligned and bearing on supporting members before being permanently fastened.
Do not stretch or contract side lap interlocks. Inaccuracies in alignment or leveling of
supports shall be corrected before the deck is permanently fastened into place. Place deck
units flat and square, secured to adjacent framing without warp or deflection.
End lap of units shall occur over supports only. Minimum lap shall be 2". The deck unit shall
extend over three or more supports, unless otherwise indicated on the drawings.
Align deck units for entire length of run of cells and with close alignment between cells at
ends of abutting units.
05310-2
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Coordinate and cooperate with structural steel erector in locating decking bundles to prevent
overloading of structural members.
Do not use roof deck units for storage or working platforms until permanently secured.
Fastening Deck Units: Fasten roof deck units to steel supporting members as indicated on
drawings.
Mechanical IClsten side laps of adjacent deck units between supports as indicated on
dra\vings.
Culling (lnd Filling: Cut and neatly fit deck units and accessones around other work
projecting through or adjacent to the decking, as shown.
Reil?f{Jrcemen! at Openings: Provide additional metal reinforcement and closure pieces as
required for strength, continuity of decking, and support of other work shown. Openings
through deck shall be reinforced and framed for rigidity and load carrying capacity. Holes or
other openings required for work of other trades shall be drilled out or cut and adequately
reinforced by the respective trade; such holes or other openings larger than 12" square or
diameter or over shall be scheduled or detailed but in no case shall it be less than L I Y2 X 1
1;2 x lit each side between supports 'with L 1 1;2 x 1 1;2 x lit headers at edges of openings.
.loint Covers: Provide metal joint covers at abutting ends and changes in direction of deck
units. Covers shall be formed from steel of the same quality as deck and gauge indicated on
drawings. Covers shall have a minimum width 01'9" and shall be bent to provide tight Jitting
closure with deck units.
Closure St rips: Provide steel closure strips at open uncovered ends and edges of roof decking
and in voids between decking and other construction. Weld into position to provide a
complete decking installation.
Touch-Up Painting. After decking installation, wire brush, clean, and paint scarred areas,
welds, and rust spots on top and bottom surfaces of decking units and supporting steel
mem bers.
Touch-up galvanized surfaces with galvanizing repair paint applied in accordance with
manufacturer's instructions.
J'v!easuremel1t ol1d Payment:
A. Work under this section will be paid for at the lump sum amount shown in the bid
schedule for Pump Station Building Complete.
05310-3
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
SECTION 05500
MISCELLANEOUS METALS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SCOPE:
A. This section covers m'etal handrail for the seating areas and walls.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIAL:
A. Posts, rails, and baltlsters are to be hot formed tube sections conforming to ASTM
A50 I "Hot Formed Welded and Seamless Carbon Steel Structural Tubing."
B. The post Cc1p may be a casting or a stamped item, equal to Blum No. 5635, as
manufactured by Julius Blum & Co., Carlstadt, New Jersey.
C. The base plate for the post shall be stainless steel conforming with ASTM A4 79.
D. I\1Iaterial for the insert below the stainless steel plate shall be A501.
2.2 WELDING:
A. Welding shclll be in accordance with A WS D 1.1.
B. All welds shall be ground smooth.
? ..,
_..J
PAINTING:
A. Surfaces shall be cleaned of dirt, oil and mill scale and given a shop coat of the
fabricators standard oil base protective coating. Base plates shall be fully painted top
and bottom; items to be embedded in concrete shall not be painted.
B. After erection all bm'e or abraded areas shall be touched upwith shop paint and given
two full coat~; of enamel for metal surfaces, selected ti.om Sherwin- Williams, Glidden,
or Pittsburgh, in accordance with the Painting and Caulking section hereof. Color
shall be Pitt!;burgh, "Ebony Green," or equal.
05500-1
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 SHOP DRAWINGS:
A. One sepia and two prints of shop draw'ings shall be submitted for review by the
Engineer. Drawings must be checked and approved by the Contractor before
submittal.
B. No fabrication shall pe started before all corrections have been made to the drawings.
3.2 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT:
A. No separate payment will be made for the work covered by this section, where
handrail is a part of or within the payment limits of structures, such as along '"valls and
bulkheads, etc. Compensation'for all handrail not specifically covei'ed by a bid item
will be included in the associated structure price.
B. Partial payn1ents for work under this section will be awarded based upon the
amount(s) \vhich are assigned in the detailed breakdown furnished by the Contractor
under the G(:neral Conditions, as approved.
05500-2
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
SECTION 05600
OPEN WEB STEEL JOISTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
A. Submittals:
General: Submit the following in accordance with Conditions of Contract and Division 1
Specification Sections.
Product data and installation instructions for each type of joist and accessories.
Include manufacturer's certification that joists comply with SJr "Specifications."
Shop Drawings shall identify the specific product, shall list all design criteria indicate type of
steel, shop print bolts and welds, show layout of joist members, special connections, joining
and accessories. IlIclude mark, number, type, location and spacing of joists, bridging.
Provide templates or location drawings for installation of anchor bolts and metal
bearing plates.
Fabrication shall nQt commence until shop drawings have been marked reviewed by
the structural engineer.
B. Quality Assurance:
General: Provide joists designed and fabricated in compliance with Steel.loist Institute (SJ1)
"Standard Specifications for Open Web Steel Joist, K-Series" and "LH-Series" and the floor
dead and live loads sho\vn on the drawings and shall provide such additional bridging as
indicated by his design.
Qualification of Field Welding: Qualify welding processes and welding operators in
accordance with American Welding Society CA WS) "Structural Welding Code - Steel," A WS
01.1. Joists welded in place are subject to inspection and testing. Expense of removing and
replacing any port~on of steel joist for testing purposes will be born by Owner if welds are
found to be satisfa,:;tory. Remove and replace work found to be defective and provide new
and acceptable work.
Inspection: Inspect joists in accordance with SJI "Specifications."
05600-1
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Fabricator shall be a member of the Steel Joist Institute.
C. Delivel)l, Storage And I-Jandling:
Deliver, store and handle steel joists as recommended in SJI "Specifications." Handle and
store joists in a manner to avoid deforming members and to avoid excessive stresses.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
A. lv/aleria/s:
Steel: Comply with SJr "Specifications" for chord and web sections.
Steel Bearing Plate;:;: ASTM A36.
Unfinished Threaded Fasteners: ASTM A307, Grade A, regular hexagon type, low carbon
steel.
Steel Prime Paint: Comply with SJI Specifications except asphalt type paint will not be
perini tted.
B. Fabricalion:
General: Fabricate steel joists in accordance with SJI "Specifications."
Holes in Chord Members: Provide holes in chord members where shown for securing other
work to steel joists; however, deduct area of holes from the area of chord when calculating
strength of member.
Extended End: Pl'Ovide extended ends on joists where indicated, complying with SJl
"Specifications" and load tables.
Top Chord Extension: Provide top chord extensions ("S" type) onjoists where indicated,
complying with SJI "Specifications" and load tables.
Bridging: Provide horizontal or diagonal type bridging for "open web" joists, complying with
SJr "Specifications."
Provide bridging anchors for ends of bridging lines terminating at walls or beams.
End Anchorage: Provide end anchorages, including steel bearing plates, to secure joists to
adjacent construction, complying with SJI "Specifications," unless otherwise indicated.
05600-2
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Header units: Provide header units to support tail joists at openings in floor or roof system
not framed with steel shapes.
Shop Painting: Remove loose scale, heavy rust, and other foreign materials from fabricated
joists and accessories befOl'e application of shop paint.
Apply one shop coat of steel prime paint to joists and accessories, by spraying,
dipping, or other method to provide a continuous dry paint film thickness of not less
than 0.50 m.il.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
Erector must examlne area and conditions under \vhich steel joists are to be installed and
notify Contractor in writing of conditions detrimental to proper and timely completion of
work. Do not proceed with w.ork until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in a
manner acceptable to Erector.
A. Erecf;cm:
Place and secure steel joists in accordance with SJI "Specifications," final shop drawings, and
as herein specified.
Anchors: Furnish anchor bolts, steel bearing plats, and other devices to be built into concrete
and masonry construction.
Provide un1inished .threaded fasteners for anchor bolts, unless high strength bolts
indicated.
Placing Joists: Do not start placement of steel joists until supporting work is in place and
secured. Placejois1s on supporting work, adjust and align in accurate locations and spacing
before permanently fastening.
Provide temporary bridging, comiections, and anchors to ensure lateral stability during
construction.
Where "open-web" joist lengths are 40 feet and longer, install a center row of bolted
bridging to provide lateral stability before slackening or hoisting lines.
Bridging: Install bridging simultaneously with joist erection, before construction loads are
applied. Anchor ends of bridging lines at top and bottom chords where terminating at walls
or beams.
05600-3
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Fastening Joists: Comply with the following:
Field weld joists to supporting steel framework and steel bearing plates where
indicated in accordance with.SJI "Specifications" or as shown on drawings, for type
of joists lIsed. Coordinate welding sequence and procedure with placing of joists.
Bolt joists to supporting steel framework in accordance with SJI "Specifications" for
type of joists used.
Provide high strength fasteners for bolted connection of steel joists to steel
columns and at other locations shown. installed in accordance with AISC
"Specifications for Structural Joists using ASTM A325 or A490 Bolts."
Touch-Up Painting: After joist installation, wire brush welded areas, abraded or rusty
surfaces, and clean with solvent. Paint field-applied bolt heads and nuts and prepared surfaces
on joists and steel supporting members. Use same type of paint as used for shop painting.
B.
iVleasuremen/ and Payment:
A. Work under this section will be paid for at the lump sum amount shown in the bid
schedule for Pump Station Building Complete.
05600-4
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
SECTION 07411
MANUFACTURED ROOF PANELS
PART I - GENERi-\L
This Section includes the 1'ollo\ving:
Standing-seam roof panels, single length ridge to eaves.
Provide /7lonujc/ctured roo/panel assemblies complying with performance requirements indicated
and capable of \vithstanding structural movement, thermally induced movement, and exposure to
weather without failure or infiltration of water into the building interior.
Air injilfrotion: Provide manufactured roof panel assemblies with permanent tesistance to air
leakage through assembly of not more than 0.09 cfm/sq. ft. (0.45 Lis/sq. m) offixed roof area
when tested according to ASTM E 1680 at a static-air-pressure difference 01'4.0 Ibf/sq. ft. (192
Pa).
Woler Penelrotion: Provide l'nanufactured roof panel assemblies with no water penetration as
defined in the test method wilen tested according to ASTM E 1646 at a minimum difTerential
pressure 01'20 percent ofimvard acting, wind-load design pressure of not less than 6.24Ib/sq.
ft. (300 Pa) and not more than 12.0 lb/sq. 1'1. (575 Pa).
Wind-UplUi Resistance: Provide roof panel assemblies that meet requirements ofUL 580 for
Class 90 wind-uplift resistance.
St/'llctural Performance: Provide manufactured roof panel assemblies capable of safely
supporting design loads indicated under in-service conditions with vertical deflection no greater
than the following, based on testing manufacturer's standard units according to ASTM E ] 592
by a qualified independent testing and inspecting agency.
Maximum Dejlection: 1/180 of the span.
Submit the f()l1owin~:
. '.
Product Dole!: I ncl ude manufacturer's product specifications, standard detai Is, certified product
test results, and general recommendations, as applicable to materials and finishes for each
component and for total panel assemblies.
Shop Drowings: Show layouts of panels on roofs, details of edge conditions, joints. panel
profi les. supports, anchorages, trim, flashings, underlayment. closures, snow guards, and special
details. Distinguish bet\veen factory and field assembled \vorl\..
07411-1
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Samplesj()J' Selection: Manufacturer's color charts or chips showing the full range of colors,
textures, and patterns available for roof panels with factory applied finishes.
DeliverpCll7els and other components so they will not be damaged or deformed. Package panels for
protection against damage during transportation or handling.
Handling: Exercise care in unloading, storing, and erecting roof panels to prevent bending. warping,
twisting, and surface damage.
Stock l7lolerio/s on platforms or pallets, covered with tarpaulins or other suitable weathertight and
ventilated covering. Store panels to ensure dryness. Do not store panels in contact \vith other
materials that might cause staining, denting, or other surface damage.
Field Meosuremenls: Verify location or structural members and openings in substrates by field
measurements before fabrication and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings. Coordinate
fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delaying the Work.
Generul Worranty: Special warranties specified in this Article shall not deprive the Owner of other
rights the Owner may have under other provisions of the Contract Documents and shall be in addition
to, and run concurrent with, other warranties made by the Contractor under requirements of the
Contract Documents.
SjJecial Finish Worronfy: Submit a "vritten warranty, signed by manufacturer, covering failure of the
factory-applied exterior finish on metal roof panels within the specified warranty period and agreeing
to repair finish or replace roof panels that show evidence of finish deterioration. Deterioration of
finish includes, but is not limited to, color fade, chalking, cracking, peeling, and loss offilm integrity.
Finish Warranty Period: 20 years from date of Substantial Completion.
Special Wcathertight Warranty: Submit a written warranty executed by manufacturer agreeing to
repair or replace metal roof panel assembly that fails to remain weathertight within the specified
warranty period.
Weatherlighl Warranty Period: 5 years from date of Substantial Completion.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
iVfetallic-CooledSteel Sheet Prepainleclwith Coil Coating: Steel sheet metallic coated by the hot-dip
process and prepainted by the coil-coating process to comply with ASTM A 755 (ASTM A 755M)
and the following requirements:
Galvanized Steel Sheel: ASTM A 653,090 (ASTM A 653M, 2275); structural quality.
Thickness: 0.028 inch (0.7 mm), unless otherwise indicated.
07411-2
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Finish: Apply the following :organic coating in thickness indicated. Furnish appropriate air-
drying spray finish in matching color for touchup.
Fllloropolymer 2-Coat 'Coating System: Manufacturer's standard 2-coat, thermocured
system composed of specially formulated inhibitive primer and fluoropolymer color
topcoat containing not less than 70 percent polyvinylidene fluoride resin by \veight with
a total minimum dry film thickness 01'0.9 mil (0.023 mm) and30 percent retlective gloss
when tested according to ASTM D 523.
Dllrahilily: Provide coating field tested under normal range of weather conditions
for a minimum 0[20 years without signiticant peel, blister, tlake, chip, crack, or
check in finish; without chalking in excess ofa chalk rating 01'8 according to ASTM
D 4214; and without fading in excess of 5 Hunter units.
Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range of colors.
Prepare, pretreat. and apply coating to exposed metal surfaces to comply with coating and
resin man ufacturer' s wri tten instructions.
Standing-Seum Roof' Panels: Manufacturer's standard factory-formed. standing-seam roof panel
assembly designed for concealed mechanical attachment of panels to roof purl ins or deck. Provide
soffit panels and vented soffit panels as indicated and provide cap and ridge vents.
Clips: Provide minimum 0.0625 inch (l.6 mm) thick, stainless-steel panel clips designed to meet
negative-load requirements.
Cleats: Mechanically seamed cleats formed from minimum 0.0250 inch (0.65 mm) thick,
stainless-steel or nylon-coated aluminum sheets.
Polyisocyanllrate Board Insulation' Rigid, cellular polyisocyanurate thermal insulation with core
formed by using 4CFC's as blowing agents complying with ASTM C1289.
Facing: Vinyl-reinforced polyester.
Retainer Slrips: 0.019 inch (0.5 mm) thick, formed, galvanized steel retainer clips colored to
match insulation facing.
Provide l71aleria/s and accessories reqllirecU'or a complete roojjHme/ assemhly and as recommended
by panel manufacturer.
Thermal,sj)(/c.:en': Where panels attach directly to purl ins, provide thermal spacers recommended by
panel manufacturer.
Fasteners: Self-tappirig screws, bolts, nuts, self-locking rivets and bolts, end-welded studs, and other
suitable fasteners designed to wi thstand design loads.
07411-3
I
I
I
I
I
I
I.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Use stainless-steel fasteners for exterior applications and galvanized steel f~lsteners for interior
applications.
Provide exposed fasteners with heads matching color of panel by means of plastic caps or
factory applied coating.
Provide metal-backed neoprene washers under heads of exposed fasteners bearing on weather
side of panels
Locate and space exposed fasteners in true vertical and horizontal alignment. Use proper tools
to obtain controlled uniform compression fOl'positive seal without rupture of neoprene washer.
Accessories: Unless otherwise specified, provide components required for a complete roof panel
assembly including trim, copings. fasciae, mullions, sills, corner units, ridge closures, clips. seam
covers, battens, llashings, gutters. sealants, gaskets, fillers, closure strips, and similar items. l'vlatch
materials and finishes of panels. Provide ridge vents and finials. Provide soffit panels and vented soffit
panels.
Closure Strips: Ciosed-cell. self-extinguishing, expanded, cellular, rubber or cross-linked,
polyoletin-foam flexible closure strips. Cut or premold to match configuration of panels.
Provide closure strips where indicated or necessary to ensure weathertight construction.
Seoling Tape: Pressure-sensitive, 100 percent solids, polyisobutylene compound sealing tape
with release paper backing. Provide permanently elastic, nonsag. nontoxic, nonstaining tape.
Elastomeric Joint Sealant: ASTM C 920, of base polymer, type, grade, class, and use.
classitications required to seal joints in panel roofing and remain weathertight. Provide sealant
recommended by panel manufacturer.
Bituminous Coating: Cold-applied asphalt mastic, SSPC-Paint 12, compound for l5~111il (0.4 111m)
dry film thickness per coat, unless otherwise indicated. Provide inert-type noncorrosive compound
free of asbestos fibers, sulfur components, ahd other deleterious impurities.
Exponsion-.Joint Sealant: For hook'ed-type expansion joints that must be free to move, provide
nonsetting, nonhardening, nomigrating, heavy-bodied polyisobutylene sealant.
Primer: Rust-inhibitive primer recommended by panel manufacturer for finish coat.
Fabricate ond finish panels and occessories at the jClctory to greatest extent possible, by
manufacturer's standard procedures and processes, as necessary to fulfill indicated p'erformance
requirements demonstrated by labor~tory testing. Comply with indicated profiles and with
dimensional and structural requirements.
f{lhriCClte poneljoints with captive gaskets or separator strips that provide a tight seal and prevent
metal-to-metal contact. in a manner that will minimize.noise from movements within panel assembly.
07411-4
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Secondwy Framing: Provide components complying with the Light Gage Structural Institute's
"Guide Specifications," Section 07410, "Manufactured Roof and Wall Panels."
Roo/Purlins: Cor Z shaped sections fabricated from 0.0598 inch (1.5 mm) thick, shop-painted,
roll-formed steel. Purlin spacers fabricated from 0.079 inch (2.0 mm) thick, cold-formed,
galvanized steel sections.
Eave S'lruls: Unequal flange, C-shaped sections formed to provide adequate back-up for roof
panels. Fabricate from 0.0598 inch (1.5 mm) thick, shop-painted. roll-formed steel.
F!onge and Sag Bracing: 1-5/8 by 1-5/8 inch (41 by 41 mm) angles. fabricated from 0.0598
inch (1.5 mm) thick, shop-painted, roll-formed steel.
Base or Sill Angles: Fabricate from 0.079 inch (2.0 mm) thick, cold-formed, galvanized steel
sections.
Secondwy structural member,s', except columns and beams, shall be manufacturer's standard
sections fabricated from 0.079 inch (2.0 mm) thick, cold-formed galvanized steel.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
Examine subslrates and condilions for compliance with requirements indicated for conditions
affecting performance of metal panel roofing.
Pane! Supports and Anchorage: Examine roof framing to verify that purl ins, angles, channels,
and other secondary structural panel support members and anchorage have been installed
according to written instructions of panel manufacturer.
Do not proceed with roofpanel installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
Coordinate meta! panel roo.jing with rain drainage work, flashing, trim, and construction of decks,
parapets, walls, and other adjoining work to provide a leakproof, secure, and noncorrosive
installation.
Promptly remove protectivejilm. if any, from exposed surfaces of metal panels. Strip with care to
avoid damage to finish.
Secondwy Slructural Supporls: Install purl ins, bracing, and other secondary structural panel support
members and anchorage according to the Light Gage Structural Institute's Guide Specifications,
"Section 07410, Manufactured Roof and Wall Panels."
Comply with panel mam!fclCIUrer 's wriffen instructions and recol7ll7lendolionsjeJ/' installation, as
applicable to project conditions and SUPPo11ing substrates. Anchor panels and other components of
the Work securely in place, with provisions for thermal and structural movement.
Field cutting exterior panels by torch is not permitted.
07411-5
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Install panels with concealed fasteners.
Install panels with exposed exterior and interior fasteners, prefinished to match panel finishes.
Install metal building insulation dii"ectly beneath metal roof panels.
Accessories: Install components required for a complete roof panel assembly including trim, copings,
fasciae, ridge closures, clips, seam covers, battens, f1ashings, gutters, sealants, gaskets, fillers, closure
strips, and similar items.
Separole dissimilor metals by painting each metal surface in area of contact with a bituminous coating,
. by applying rubberized-asphalt underlayment to each metal surface, or by other permanent separation
as recommended by manufacturers ,of dissimilar metals.
Joint Seolers: Install gaskets,joint fillers, and sealants where required for weatherproof performance
of panel assemblies. Provide types of gaskets, fillers, and sealants recommended by panel manufacturer.
install \veathersealunder ridge cap. Flash and seal panels at eave and rake with rubber, neoprene,
or other closures to exclude \veather.
Seal panel end laps with double beads of tape or sealant, full width of panel. Seal side joints
where recommended by panel manufacturer.
Prepare joints and apply sealants to comply with requirements of Division 7 Section "Joint
Sealants.
Standing-Seam RoojPanel Assembly: Fasten panels to supports with concealed clip according to panel
manufacturer's written instructions.
Install clips at each support with self-drilling/self-tapping fasteners.
At end laps of panels, install tape calk between panels.
Seaming: Complete seaming of panel joints by operating portable power-driven equipment of
type recommended by panel manufacturer to provide a weathertight joint.
Replace panels and other components of the Work that have been damaged or have deteriorated
beyond successful repair by finish touchup or similar minor repair procedures.
Cleaning: Remove ternporary protective coverings and strippable films, if any, as soon as each panel
is installed. On completion of panel installation, clean finished surfaces as recommended by panel
manufactllrer and maintain in a clean condition during construction.
Measurement and Payment: Work under this section will be paid for at the lump sum amount shown
in the bid schedule for Pump Station Building Complete.
07411-6
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
SECTION 07620
SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRHvI
PART I - GENERAL
This Section includes sheet metal flashing and trim in the following categories:
Roof-drainage systems: Gutters and downspouts
Exposed trim, gravel stops, and fascia
Metal flashing
install sheet rnetaljlashing al7d trim to withstand wind loads, structuralmovemenl, thermally incl uced
movement, and exposure to weath~r without failing.
Submit Product Data including manufacturer's material and finish data, color charts, installation
instructions, and general recommendations.
Submit Samples of sheet metal flashing, trim, and accessory items, in the specifie'd finish.
Coordinate Work ofthis Section with interfacing and adjoining Work for proper sequencing of each
installation. Ensure best possible weather resistance, durability of Work, and protection of materials
and.finishes.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
Aluminum: Alloy and temper recommended by aluminum producer and finisher for type of LIse and
finish indicated and with not less than the strength and durability of alloy and temper designated
below: .
Factory-Painted Aluminum Sheet: ASTM B 209 (ASTM B 209M). 3003-H14, \\"ith a
minimum thickness of 0.0320 inch.
Fasteners: Same metal as sheet metal flashing or other noncorrosive metal as recommended by sheet
metal manufacturer. Match finish of exposed heads with material being fastened.
Asphalt Mastic: SSPC-Paint 12, solvent-type asphalt mastic, nominally free of sulfur and containing
no asbestos fibers, compounded for IS-mil (0.4 mm) dry film thickness per coat.
07()20-1
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
lv!astic Sealant: Polyisobutylene; nonhardening, nonskinning, nondrying,nonmigrating sealant.
Elastomeric Sealant: Generic type recommended by sheet metal manufacturer and fabricator of
components being sealed and complying with requirements for joint sealants as speci tied in Division
7 Section "Joint Sealants".
Epoxy Seam Sealer: 2-part, noncorrosive, aluminum seam-cementing compound, recommended by
aluminum manufacturer for exterior and interior nonmoving joints, including riveted joints.
Adhesives: Type recommended by flashing sheet metal manufacturer for waterproof and weather-
resistant seaming and adhesive application of flashing sheet metal.
Paper Slip Sheet: 5-lb/square (0.244 kg/sq.m) red rosin, sized building paper conforming to FS UU-
B-790, Type 1, Style lb.
Polyethylene Underlayment: AST[\";{ D 4397, minimum 6-mil (0.15 mm) thick black polyethylene
film, resistant to decay when tested according to ASTM.E 154.
Metal Accessories: Provide sheet metal clips, straps, anchoring devices, and similar accessory units
as required for installatiori of Work, matching or compatible with material being installed;
noncorrosive; size and thickness required for performance.
Rocding Cement: ASTM D 4586, Type I, asbestos free, asphalt based.
Sheef Metal Fabrication Standard.: Fabricate sheet metal flashing and trim to comply with
recommendations of SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" that apply to the design,
dimensions, metal, and other characteristics of the item indicated.
Comply with details to fabricate: sheet metal flashing and trim that fit substrates and result in
waterproof and weather-resistant performance once installed. Verify shapes and dimensions of
surfaces to be covered before fabricating sheet metal.
Form exposed sheet metal Work. that is without excessive oil canning; buckling, and tool marks and
that is true to ] ine and levels indicated, with exposed edges folded back to form hems.
Seams: Fabricate nonmoving seams in alLlminum with flat-lock seams. Form seams and seal with
epoxy seam sealer. Rivet joints for additional strength.
. Exponsion Provisions: Space movement joints at maximum of 10 feet wit no joints allowed within
24 il1ches of corner or intersection. Where lapped or bayonet-type expansion provisions in Work
CaJU10t be used or would not be sufficiently weatherproof and waterproof, form expansion joints of
intermeshing hooked flanges, not less than 1 inch deep, filled with mastic sealant (concealed within
joints).
07620-2
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Sealed Joints: Form nonexpansion, but movable, joints in metal to accommodate elastomeric sealant
to comply with SMACNA standards.
Separate metal from noncompatible metal or corrosive substrates by coating concealed surfaces at
locations of contact with asphalt mastic or other permanent separation as recommended by
manufacturer.
Conceal'/c/steners and expansion provisions where possible. Exposedtasteners are not allow.ed on
. f:'1ces of sheet metal exposed to public view.
Fabricate cleats and attachment devices from same material as sheet metal component being
anchored or ti"om compatible, noncorrosive metal recommended by sheet metal manufacturer.
Size: As recommended by SMACNA manual or sheet metal manufacturer for application but
never less than thickness of metal being secured.
Comply with Aluminum Associalion 's (AA) "Designation System for Aluminum Finishes" for finish
designations and application recommendations.
High-Perfimnance Organic Coaling Finish: AA-C 12C42R 1 x (Chemical Finish: Cleaned with
inhibited chemicals; Chemical Finisl1: acid chromate-fluoride-phosphate conversion coating; Organic
Coating: as specified below). Prepare, pretreat, and apply coating to exposed metal surfaces to
comply with coating and resin manufacturer's instructions.
Fluoropolymer 2-Coat Coating System: Manufacturer's standard2-coat, thermocured system
composed of specially formulated inhibitive primer and fluoropolymer color topcoat
containing not less than 70 percent polyvinylidene fluoride resin by weight; complying with
AAMA 605.2.
Color and Gloss: As selected by Architect from mamlf:'1cturer's full range of choices for color
and gloss.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
Examine suhstrates and conditions under which sheet metal flashing and trim are to be installed and
. ~
verify that Work may properly commence. Do not proceed with installation until unsatistactory
conditions have been corrected.
Unless qtheril'ise indicated. install sheet metal flashing and trim to comply with performance
requirements, manufacturer's installation instructions, and SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal
manual". Anchor units of Work securely in place by methods indicated, providing for thermal
expansion of metal units; conceal fasteners where possible, and set units true to line and level as
07620-3
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
indicated. Install Work with laps, joints, and seams that will be permanently watertight and
weathertight and weatherproof.
install exposed sheet metal Work that is without excessive oil canning, buckling, and tool marks and
that is true to line and levels indicated, with exposed edges folded back to form hems. Install sheet metal
,t1ashing and tri m to ti t substrates and to result in waterproof and weather-resistant performance. Verify
shapes and dimensions of surfaces to be covered before fabricating sheet metal.
Expansion Provisions: Provide for thermal expansion of exposed sheet metal 'Nork. Space movement
joints at maximum of 10 feet with no joints allowed within 24 inches of corner or intersection. Where
lapped or bayoneHype expansion provisions in Work cannot be used or would not be sufticiently
weatherproof and waterproo L form expansion joints of intermeshing hooked t1anges, not kss than 1
inch deep, tilled \vith mastic sealant (concealed within joints).
Sealed .!oinIS: Form nonexpansion, but movable, joints in metal to accommodate elastomeric sealant
. to comply with SMACNA standards. Fill joint with sealant and form metal to completely conceal
sealant.
Seml/s: Fabricate nonmoving seams in aluminum with flat-lock seams. Form seams and seal with epoxy
seam sealer. Rivet joints for additional strength.
Separations: Separate metal ti-om' noncompatible metal or corrosive substrates by coating concealed
surtaces, at locations of contact, with asphalt mastic or other permanent separation as recommended
by manufacturer.
Underlayment: Where installing aluminum directly on cementitious or wood substrates, install
a slip sheet of red-rosin paper and a course of polyethylene underlayment.
Bed .flanges of Work in' a thick coat of rooting cement where required for waterproof
performance.
CounlerjZoshings: Coordinate installation of counterflashings with installation of assemblies to be
protected by counterflashing. Install countert1ashings in reglets or receivers. Secure in a waterproof
manner by means of snap-in installation and sealant, lead wedges and sealant, interlocking folded seam,
or blind rivets andsealant. Lap counterflashingjoints a minimum 01'2 inches and bed with sealant.
Roof:Drainage System: Install drainage items fabricated from sheet metal, with straps, adhesives, and
anchors recommended by SMACNA's Manual or the item manufacturer, to drain roof in the most
efficient manner. Coordinate roof-drain flashing installation with roof-drainage system installation.
Coordinate llashing and sheet metal items for steep-sloped roofs with roofing installation.
Equipment Support Flashin,~: Coordinate equipment support t1ashing installation with rooting and
equipment installation. Seall1ashing to equipment support member.
07620-4
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Roo.f-Penetrotio.n Flashing: Coordinate roof-penetration flashing installation with roofing and
installation of items penetrating roof. Install flashing as follows:
Turn lead flashing down inside'vent piping, being careful not to block vent piping with flashing.
Seal and clamp flashing to pipes penetrating roof, other than lead flashing on vent piping.
Clean exposed metal surfaces. removing substances that might cause corrosion of metal or
deterioration of finishes.
Providefi/1al protection and maintain conditions that.ensure sheet metal flashing and trim work during
construction is wi thout damage or deterioration other than natural weathering at the time of Substantial
Completion.
Measurement and Poynzent: Work under this section will be paid for at the lump sum amount shown
in the bid schedule for Pump Station Building Complete.
07620-5
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
SECTION 08110
STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES
PART I - GENERAL
Submit Producl Data for each type of door and frame specified, including details of construction,
materials, dimensions, hardware preparation, core, label compliance, profiles, and finishes.
Subl71il Shop Drawings showing fabrication and installation ofsteel doors and frames. Include details
of each frame type, elevations of door design types, conditions at openings, details of construction,
location and installation requirements of door and frame hardware and reinforcements, and details
of joints and connections. Show anchorage and accessory items.
Provide doors and ji'ames complying \vith ANSIISDI 100 "Recommended Specifications for
Standard Steel Doors and Frames" and as specified.
Fire-Rated Door Assemblies: Units that comply with NFP A 80 and are labeled and listed by UL,
Warnock Hersey, or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having
jurisdiction.
Deliver doors (lI1dji'ames cardboard-wrapped or crated to provide protection during transit and job
storage.
impect doors and ./i'wnes on delivery for damage. Minor damages may be repaired provided
refinished items match new work and are acceptable to Architect; otherwise, remove and replace
damaged items as directed.
Store doors and./i'ames at building site under cover. Place units on wood blocking. Avoid using
nonvented plastic or canvas shelters that could create a humidity chamber. If cardboard wrappers on
doors become wet, remove cartons immediately. Provide minimum] /4 inch spaces between stacked
doors to promote air circulation.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
A vai/oble i'vJanu!clcturers: Subject tocompliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products
that may be incorporated in the work include, but are not limited to, the following:
Steel Doors and Frol71es:
Amweld Building Products, Inc.
Benchmark Commercial Doors
08110-1
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I'
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Ceco Door Products
Copco Door Co.
Curries Co.
D & D Specialties, Inc.
Deansteel Manufacturing Co.
Fenestra Corp. '
Kewanee Corp.
Mesker Door, Inc.
Pioneer Industries
Republic Builders Products
Steelcraft
Hot-Rolled Steel S'heefs and Strip: COl11mercial quality carbon steel, pickled and oiled, complying
with ASTM A 569 (ASTM A 569M).
Cold-Rolled Steel Sheets: Carbonsteel complying with ASTM A 366 (ASTM A 366M), commercial
quality, or ASTM A 620 (ASTM A 620M), drawing quality, special killed.
Galvanized Steel Sheets: Zinc-coated carbon steel complying with ASTM A 526 (ASTM A 526M),
commercial quality, or ASTM A 642 (ASTM A 642M), drawing quality, hot-dip galvanized
according to ASTM A 525, with A 60 or G 60 (ASTM A 525M, with Z 180 or ZF 180) coating
designation, mill phosphatized.
Supports and Anchors: Fabricated from not less than 0.0478 inch thick steel sheet; 0.05 16 inch thick
galvanized steel where used with galvanized steel frames.
lnserfs. Bolts. and Fasteners: Manufacturer's standard units. Where items are to be built into exterior
walls, hot-dip galvanize complying with ASTM A 153, Class C or D as applicable.
Steel Doors: Provide 1-3/4 inch thick doors of materials and ANSIISDI 100 grades and models
specified below, or as indicated on Drawings or schedules:
Exterior Doors: Grade II, heavy-duty, Modell, full flush design, minimum 0.0516 inch (1.3
ml11) thick galvanized steel sheet faces.
Provide metal/i-ames for doors, transoms, sidelights, borrowed lights, wi ndows, grid walls, and other
openings, according to ANSIISDI 100, and oftypes and styles as shown on Drawings and schedules.
Conceal fastenings, unless otherwise indicated. Fabricate frames of minimum 0.0478 inch thick colcl-
rolled steel sheet. Provide double egress' frames where indicated.
'1
Fabricate Fames with mitered 'or coped corners, continuously welded construction for
exterior applications and knocked down for field assembly at interior applications.
Form exteriorfi'ames from 0.0635 inch thick galvanized steel sheet.
Og 11 0-2
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Door Silencers: Except on weather,stripped frames, drill stops to receive 3 silencers on strike jambs
of single-door frames and 2 silencers on heads of double-door frames.
. .
Plaster Guards: Provide steel plaster guards or mortar boxes at back of hardware cutouts where
mortar or other materials might obstruct hardware operation and to close off interior of openings.
Grout: When required in masonry construction, as specified in Division 4 Section "Unit Masonry".
Fabricate sfeel door andji'(//ne units to be rigid, neat in appearance, and free fi'om defects, W,1\'p, or
buckle.
inlernal Construction: One of the following manufacturer' s standard core materials according
to SDI standards:
Resin-impregnated paper honeycomb
Rigid polyurethane coriforming to ASTM C 591
Rigid polystyrene conforming to ASTM C 578
Unitized steel grid
Vertical steel stiffeners
Rigid mineral fiber with internal sound deadener on inside of face sheets.
Clearances: Not more than 1/8 inch at jambs and heads, except not more than 1/4 inch
between non-fire-rated pairs of doors. Not more than 3/4 inch at bottom.
Fire Doors: Provide clearances according to NFP A 80.
Tolerances: Comply with SDr ] ] 7 ."Manufacturing Tolerances Standard Steel Doors and Frames".
Fabricate concealedst!t!eners. reinforcement, edge channels, louvers, and moldings from either cold
or hot-rolled steel sheet.
Galvanized Steel Doors. Panels. Clnd Frames: For the following locations fabricate doors, panels,
and frames from galvanized steel sheet according to SDr 112. Close top and bottom edges of doors
flush as an integral part of door construction or by addition of minimum 0.0635 inch thick galvanized
steel channels, with channel webs placed even with top and bottom edges. Seal joints in top edges
of doors against water penetration.
At exterior locations.
Exposed Fasteners: Unless otherwise indicated, provide countersunk flat or oval heads for exposed
screws and bolts.
08110-3
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Hardware Preparation: Prepare doors and frames to receive mortised and concealed hardware
according to final door hardware schedule and templates provided by hardware supplier. Comply with
applicable requirements of SDI 107 and ANSI Al15 Series specifications for door and frame
preparation for hardware.
Reil?f'orce doors andfi'ames to receive surface-applied hardware. Drilling and tapping for surtace-
applied hardware may be done at Proj'ect site.
Locate hardware according to the Door and Hardware Institute's (DHI) "Recommended Locations
for Archi tectural Hardware for Standard Steel Doors and Frames".
Glazing Stops: Minimum 0.0359 inch thick steel or 0.040 inch thick aluminum.
Provide nonremovable stops on outside of exterior doors and on secure side of interior doors
for glass, louvers, and other panels in doors.
Provide screw-applied, removable, glazing beads on inside of glass, louvers, and other panels
in doors.
Comply with NAAMi\;['s "Metal Finishes Manual" for recommendations relative to applying and
designating finishes.
Apply pril7lers to doors and frames after fabrication.
Galvanized Finishes:
SUlface Preparation: Clean surfaces with nonpetroleum solvent so that surfaces are free of oil or
other contaminants. After cleaning, apply a conversion coating of the type suited to the organic
coating applied over it. Clean welds, mechanical connections, and abraded areas, and apply
galvanizing repair paint specified below to comply with ASTM A 780.
Galvanizing Repair Painl: High-zinc-dust-content paint for regalvanizing welds in galvanized
steel, wit dry film containing not less than 94 percent zinc dust by weight, and complying \vit
DOD-P-21035 or SSPC~Paint 20.
Factory Primingfhr Field-Painted Finish: Where field painting after installation is indicated. apply
air-dried primer specified below immediately after cleaning pretreatment.
Sleel Sheet Finishes:
SlII:/Clce Preparation: Solvent-clean surfaces to comply with SSPC-SP 1 to remove dirt, oil, grease,
al1d other contaminants that could impair paint bond. Remove mill scale and rust, if present. ti'om
uncoated steel to comply with SSPC-SP 5 (White Metal Blast Cleaning) or SSPC-SP 8 (Pickling).
08110-4
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Pretreatment: Immediately after surface preparation, apply a conversion coating of type suited to
organic coating applied over it.
Factury Priming/cJI' Field-Painted Finish: Apply shop primer that complies with ANSI A224.1
acceptance criteria, is compatible with finish paint systems indicated, and has capability to provide
a sound foundation for field-applied topcoats. Apply primer immediately after surface preparation and
pretreatment.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
General: Install steel doors,'frames,and accessories according to Shop Drawings. manufacturer's
data, and as specitied.
Placing Frames: Comply with provisions of SDI 105. Set frames accurately in position, plumbed,
aligned, and braced securely until permanentanchors are set. After wall construction is compkted,
remove temporary braces and spreaders, leaving surfaces smooth and undamaged.
in l7lasonry construction, install at least 3 wall anchors per jamb adjacent to hinge location
on hinge jamb and at corresponding heights on strike jamb. Acceptable anchors include
masonry wire anchors and masonry T -shaped anchors.
installfire-raled/i'wl1Csaccording to NFP A 80.
Door installation: Fit hollow-metal doors accurately in frames, within clearances specitied in
ANSI/SOl 100.
Fire-Rated Doors: Install with clearances specified in NFP A 80. '
Prime Coot Tuuchup: Immediately after erection, sand smooth any rusted or damaged areas of prime
coat and apply touchup of compatible air-drying primer.
A1easurement C1l1d Payment: Work under this section will be paid for at the lump sum amount shown
in the bid schedule for Pump Station Building Complete.
Ogl10-5
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
SECTION 08710
DOOR HARDWARE
PART 1 - GENERAL
Submilfinal hardware schedule organized by "hardware sets", to indicate specifically the product to
be furnished for each item required on each door.
Fumish lemplotes to each fabricator of doors and frames as required for hardware
preparation.
Forfire-ruled openings provide hardware tested and listed by UL or FM (NFP A Standard 80). On
panic exit devices provide UL or FM label indicating "Fire Exit Hardware".
Mam!facturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by mailllfacturers for
various products listed below. Such products are listed in the schedule by specitic reference to
manufacturer's catalog numbers. Except as otherwise indicated, products of equivalent quality,
design, and function by other listed manufacturers may be used, subject to approval of Architect.
Schlage Lock Company, Sargent Co., Stanley - Locksets. Latchsets, Privacy sets
Sargent & Company, Von Duprin, Precision - Exit devices, mullions
Sargent & Company 350/351, LCN 4040/4041 - Closers
Hager, Stanley, McKinney - Hinges
Baldwin, Rockwood, Quality - Push plates, pull plates, kick plates, flush bolts, door stops
& silencers
Pemko, National Guard, Zero - Thresholds, weatherstrip, sweeps
Glynn-Johnson, Sargent, Rixson - Overhead stops
I ves, Rockwood, Baldwin - Automatic flush bolts, coordinators
Finish and base In at eriClI designations are indicated in accordance with ANSI BHMA A 156.18 or
the nearest traditional U.S. comme'rcial finish.
08710- ]
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
PACKING AND MARKING
All hardware shall have the screws, bolts, and fastenings for its installation, packed in the same
package with the hardware. All packages shall be legible and adequately labeled, indicating the
location for which they are needed.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
INSTALLATION
instal! hardware in strict accordance with manufacturer's instructions and templates. Set hardware
accurately and securely anchor with attachment devices; set screws level, tlush and draw up tight.
Upon complet ion. hardware shall operate freely with proper tolerances to prevent binding and/or
malfunctioning.
A1ake necessw)i adjuslments and leave clean.
Cut andfil thresholds to pndile of door frames, with mitered corners and hairline joints. Cut smooth
openings forspindles, bolts and similar items, if any.
Saew thresholds 10 substrate with No. 10 or larger screws of the proper type for permanent
anchorage and/or bronze or stainless steel which will not corrode in contact with the threshold metal.
Set threshold,' in a seal {dbutyl rubber sealant or polyisobutylene mastic sealant. Install sealant under
interior edge allowing any water elltering through screw holes to weep out exterior edge.
FINISH
Locksets and bulls :yhall be US26D. Exit devices to be US32D; aluminum and/or US26D NOT
ACCEPT ABLE.
KEYING
The key side of'alllocks will be on the public side.
Four keys will be provided for each keyed lock.
08710-2
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
WEA THERSTRIPPING
All new exterior doors shall receive extruded aluminum weatherstripping at jambs and sills and
thresholds.
FINISH HARDWARE SCHEDULE
No local keying will be accepted, only factory registered keys shall be used.
Locksets to be Type 1000 Grade 1.
The hardware supplier on thisjob, shall have in his employ a regular member of the American
Society of Architectural Hardware Consultants (AHC). This consultant shall be available for
consultation on the job site when requested by the Architects and/or contractor.
HARDWARE SCHEDULE
EACH TO HAVE:
1-1/2 Pair Butts
(ST)
I Mortise Lockset
I Closer
2 Kick Plate
I Wall Stop
1 Set Weatherstrip
1 Threshold
2 Sweep
6 Silencers
608
I Lock Guard.
1 O.H. Holder
1 Rain Drip Strip
(SG)
(SG)
(RW)
(RW)
(PK)
(PK)
(PK)
(RW)
(SG) .
(PK)
MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT
FBBI79-US26D 4-1/2 x 4-1/2 NRP
8225 LNJ-US26D x MK
EN350-UH x TB
8" x 2" LDW x US32D .050ga
440-US26D
303AV-72" x 86"
170A-72"
315CN-36"
(RW)
320-32D
EN 1540-1-1
17 A x Door width
, Work unde;' this section will be paid for at the lump sum amount shown in the bid schedule for Pump
Station Building Complete.
08710-3
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
SECTION 09900
PAINTING AND CAULKING
PART 1 - GENERAL
A. GENERi-\L:
A. The work of this section comprises all labor. materials. and equipment necessary to
complete all painting and caulking as scheduled on the drawings or specified herein.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS:
A. PACKAGING: All materials shall be delivered to the project in unbroken packages.
They shall be used without adulteration and with only such thinning as provided for
in the manufacturer~s directions. Seals shall not be broken until contents are to be
used. All mixing shall be doi1e on the premises.
B. QUALITY: All materials shall be of the highest grade products of nationally Known,
reputable manufacturers, such as Benjamin Moore. Glidden, Sherwin-Williams,
Pittsburgh, du Pont, etc., and the Engineer's approval on make of paint shall be
obtained.
C. STORAGE: Materials shall be stored in one place, the same to be kept neat and
clean. Adequate care shall be taken to prevent the danger offire. The Engineer shall
have access to the materials, as well as every reasonable facility for determining
whether they are in accordance with these specifications.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 WORKMANSHIP:
A. All work shall be clone in a workmanlike manner by skilled mechanics. All materials
shall be evenly spread and smoothly flowed on and free from runs and sags and no
paint, varnish, or enamel shall be applied until the preceding coat is thoroughly dried
and hard. All finished surfaces shall be left free from brush marks or other defects,
and edges of paint adjoining other materials or colors shall be cut sharp and clean
without overlapping. No exterior painting shall be done in rainy, damp, or frosty
weather, or until the surface is thoroughly dry, and no interior painting or finishing
shall be done until the building has been thoroughly dried out. All paints, stains, and
varnishes shall be applied strictly in accordance with the manufacturer's directions.
09900-1
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
.., J
J._
PREPARATION OF SURFACES:
A. The painting contractor shall be wholly responsible for finish of his work, and
therefore shall not commence any part of it until surface is in proper condition in
every respect. Ifpainting contractor considers any surface so unsuitable for proper
finish for his work that it cannot be rectified by normal sanding. he shall notify the
Engineer of this f~lctbefore any material is applied and he shall not apply any materials
unti I the cond i tion of the surfaces is made satisfactory.
B. No exterior painting shall be done in rainy, damp or frosty weather or until surfaces
are thoroughly dry and no interior painting or finishing shall be done unti I building has
been thoroughly dried out.
C. All knots or sappy spots in wood to be painted shall be given one coat of shellac at
least ten hours before priming; in wood to be varnished, knots and sap stains shall be
treated after filing and staining. All pencil marks and other foreign matter shall be
removed before applying any finish.
D. All greasy or oily metal surfaces shall be cleaned with turpentine or benzine before
applying any materials. All scale or rust shall be removed by scraping, wire brushing
or sand blasting.
(1) WOOD: All wood surfaces shall be sanded to a smooth, even finish and dusted
off. After primer or stain has been applied all nai I holes and cracks shall be filled
with plastic wood or pu~ty, tinted to match stained wood, and all surfaces sanded
smooth betweeil coats.
(2) STEEL AND IRON: All shop coats shall be touched up and no field or finished
painting is to be done until surfaces are satisfactory.
(3) GAL V ANIZED METAL: Surfaces shall be thoroughly cleaned and coated with
a galvanized primer, Lithofoam metal etch or solution containing four ounces of
copper sulphate per gallon of water. Coating shall remain at least twelve hours,
after which it shall be dusted off with stiff brushes.
(4) ALUMINUM: All aluminum surfaces to be painted shall be prepared according
to the recommended practice for preparing aluminum for painting given in ASTM
Standard D-1730.
(5) PROTECTION OF HARDWARE AND FIXTURES: Before painting is started
in each area, hardware, accessories, plates, lighting fixtures and similar items in
that area shall be removed and shall not be replaced until the last coat of paint is
dry. Where exceptions are permitted, as on hardware necessary to keep all
premises locked. such items shall be carefully.. protected. Doors shall be
09900-2
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
temporarily removed to permit painting of the bottom edges. The removal and
replacing of the above items shall be done only by skilled mechanics.
(6) DISSIMILAR METALS: Contact surfaces between dissimilar metals shall be
painted with a heavy coat of proper primer or asphalt paint.
" "
J.J
CAULKING:
A. Furnish and install all caulking indicated on the drawings, specified herein, or as necessary
to provide a watertight building, including masonry joints, concretejoints and all bui Iding
penetrations.
(1) MATERIALS: Materials for caulking joints shall be Tremco Lasto-ivlaric
manufactured by the Tremco Mfg. Co., Hornflaz LP-32 manufactured by A.C.
I-lorn Co., or Soriolastic Sealant Gun Grade manufactured by Sonneborn Bui !cling
Products, Inc. Thickol Caulking compound shall be in strict accordance with the
manufacturer's specifications.
(2) DELIVERY AND STORAGE: The entire quantity of caulking materials shall be
delivered to the project site and stored in sealed and labeled containers.
(3) PREPARATION OF SURFACES: All openings orjoints to be caulked shall be
prepared by cleaning thoroughly and making sure that they are dry. Where
necessary to provide a suitable backup, the back of grooves shall be packed tightly
with Tremco white joint backing; and shall be 50 percent larger than joint.
(4) APPLI CATION: Caulking compound shall be appl ied wi th gun, using nozzle of
proper size to fit the joint width, and shall be forced into grooves with sufficient
pressure to expel all air and. fill the groove solidly. Caulking shall be uniformly
smooth and free of wrinkles, and unless otherwise indicated on the drawings. shall
be left sufficiently convex to result in a flush joint when dry. Caulking around
openings in masonry shall include the entire perimeter of each opening.
(5) CLEANINQ: The surfaces adjoining caulked joints shall be cleaned of smears
resulting from the caulking 'application.
3.4
COLORS:
A. Contractor is to submit color charts ofthe selected manufacturer for review by the owner
and the engineer. A color schedule will be provided to the contractor based on the
submitted color charts.
09900-3
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
3.5
PAINTING SCHEDULE:
A. In order to follow the schedule of finishes, the painting contractor shall be furnished a set
of required drawings and a copy of these specifications. All questions should be referred
to the Engineer for clarification before work proceeds. The types of paints and numbers
of coats required under various surfaces shall be as follows:
1. EXTERIOR: All exterior paint shall be oil based enamel suitable for the materials to be
painted, as recolllmended by the paint manufacturer.
A. Steel. Cast Iron and Ductile Iron: One coat of rust inhibitive primer. Two coats
of gloss industri'al enamel.
B. Galvanized Metal: One coat of galvanized metal primer. or special treatment.
Two coats of gloss industrial enamel.
C. Stainless Steel: Brush blast with fine formula polyclutch wash primer. Two coats
of gloss industrial enamel.
D. Aluminum: One coat of zinc chromate primer. Two coats of gloss industrial
ename I.
E. Woodwork: One coat of exterior oil primer. Three coats of gloss acrylic house
paint.
F. Metal Doors: One coat of metal primer. Two coats of gloss industrial enamel.
Top and edges of doors shall receive one coat.
G. Stucco and fvlas?nrv: Shall not be painted on exterior.
2. INTERIOR: All interior trim shall be finished with oil base enamel paint.
A. Wood: One coat of quick drying oil undercoater. Two coats semi-gloss paint.
B. Metal: One coat of metal primer. Two coats of low luster enamel.
C. riDing. Conduit. Ducts. and Supports: One coat of rust inhibitive primer. Two
coats of semi-gloss enamel.
D. Sheetrock and Plaster: Two coats of latex wall paint.
E. Masonrv Surfaces: One coat of quick drying oil undercoater. Two coats of semi-
gloss enamel.
09900-4
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
3.6 CLEANUP AND PROTECTION:
A. Upon completion of the work, all paint spots and stains shall be removed. Finishes \vhere
damaged shall be restOl;ed and left in good condition. Exposed edges of doors shall be
touched up where refitting has been necessary. All discarded paint materials, rubbish,
cans, and rags shall be removed. The work of other trades, whether to be painted or not,
shall be protected against damage by painting and finishing work. Any damages shall be
corrected cleaning, repairing or replacing and repainting as directed.
3.7 TOUCH-UP PAINT:
A. The Contractor shall furnish to the Owner one extra unopened gallon of each color and
type of paint used on the project for future touch-up.
3.8 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT:
A. No separate payment will be made for the work covered by this section. Compensation
wi II be included in the prices for the various elements of the project of which painting and
caulking are an incidental element.
09900- 5
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
,I
, SECTION 11500
CENTRIFUGAL PUMPS
PART 1 - GENERAL
A. GENERAL:
A. The contractor shall furnish all materials, labor and equipment necessary for a
complete installation of two horizontal split case centrifugal pumps as shown on the
drawings and specified herein. The services of a factory trained, qualified
representative shall. also be provided to supervise and inspect the installation and
initial operation ofthe equipment, as well train the operating personnel in the proper
care and operation of the equipment.
1.2 SUBMITTAL:
A. Each manufacturer fUll1ishing equipment shall submit the following information to the
Engineer for approval:
(1) Six sets of shop drawing, guaranteed performance curves, wiring diagrams,
specifications, motor data and ratings, starter data and ratings, including
manufacturer's names and model number.
(2) Six sets of certified test curves of actual factory tests on each pump prior to
shipping. Curves shall chart total dynamic head, horsepower and efficiency
against flow throughout the operating range specified.
(3) List of spare parts and tools furnished with equipment.
(4) Prior to final acceptance, six sets of Operation and Maintenance Manuals.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.t CENTRIFUGAL PUMPS:
A. The contractor shall furnish and install, as shown on the plans and specified herein,
two horizontal split case pumps capable of delivering the flows specified hereinafter.
B. The pumps shall be of the single stage, double suction, horizontal split case design
and shall be bronze fitted. Suction and discharge connections shall be located on
opposite sides of the lower casing, allowing removal of the rotating element without
disturbing the syst~m piping.
11500-1
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
2.2
C. The pump motors and motor starters shall be supplied by the pump manufacturer and
shall have adequate capacity to start and run the pumps continuously throughout the
range of operating conditions specified \vithout exceeding service factors or
temperature limitations.
D. The contractor shall obtain all equipment specified and required for the safe operation
and use of that equipment from the manufacturer or equipment supplier. unless
specifically excluded by provisions in this specification.
OPERATING CONDITIONS:
Each pump and motor shall meet the following m1l11mUm operating conditiol1s and
requirements:
A.
Total Dynamic Head
1 92 1'1.
174 ft.
1 53 1'1.
Capacity
2160 gpm
2317 gpm
2484 gpm
B. Motors:
Horsepower
Speed
Voltage
Phase
Frequency
150 HP
1800 rpm
460 v
3 phase
60 hz.
2.3
MOTOR STARTERS
A. A reduced voltage solid state starter with circuit breaker shall be furnished with each
of the two booster pun1p motors. This starter shall be rated in accordance with the
most recent NEMA standards, sizes and horsepower ratings, equipped with hand-off-
auto selector switches and pilot lights and shall be mounted to the control panels.
B. The pump motor starter shall be a solid-state reduced voltage type motor controller
incorporating soft starting, motor overvoltage protection, and energy saving
characteristics. The controller shall include independent adjustments for the start time
and initial torque on the soft start ramp as well as adjustments for civer\'oltage
protection.
2.4
PRESSURE GAUGE:
A. One combination pressure and altitude gauge shall be provided. The gauge shall have
4-1/2" f~lce and shall be similar to Ashcroft Type 1279 Dura gauge with a rang~ 01'0-
250 psi. A cutofT and bleed valve shall also be provided as shown on the plans.
11500-2
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
2,5 PRESSURE SWITCH:
A. Each pump shall be supplied with a pr.essure switch to be tapped into the discharge
flange of the pump. The pressure switch shall be a Mercoid Series DA-31-3 or equal,
with a range of 5 - 150 psig.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION:
A. The pump and driver shall be mounted on a common steel base aligned and bolted in
place prior to factory shipment. The pump base is to be grouted in the tield to
eliminate vi bration after which, final alignment must be performed by a factory trained
representative.
B. The pump motor starters shall be installed in accordance with Division 16 of the
specifications.
C. The pressure gauge shall be mounted on the wall near the panels and shall be piped
to a tap in the 20" discharge header as shown on the plans.
D. A pressure switch shall be tapped into the discharge flange of each pump for use with
the pump control valve.
3.2 TESTING:
A. Each pump shall be factory tested prior to shipment to verify specified operating
conditions.
B. At station startup each piece of equipment shall be successfully operated for a period
of eight hours. During that period, the equipment shall be inspected for defects. Any
parts which show a defect shall be replaced at no additional cost to the owner.
3.3 PAINTING:
A. All equipment and appurtenances shall be painted in accordance with Section 09900
and the manufacturer's recommendations.
3.4 GUARANTEE:
A. All equipment shall be guaranteed against defects in material and workmanship for a
period of one year from the date of final acceptance by the Owner to the etTect that
any defective equipment shall be repaired or replaced without cost or obligation to the
Owner.
11500-3
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
3.5
3.6
SP ARE PARTS:
A. The pump manutacturer shall provide all required special tools and devices necessary
for proper maintenance; as well as one (1) set of seals, one (1) set of replacement
gaskets and one (1) spare impeller for each pump supplied. A list of spare parts and
associated prices shall be submitted to the owner for his review and selection of
additional spare parts.
MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT:
A. Two Centrifugal Pumps, Starters and Appurtenances described herein shall be paid
for at the lump sum 'price as shown in the bid schedule for Pumps Installed Complete
with Starters and All Appurtenances. '
11500-4
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
SECTION 13414
PRESTRESSED CONCRETE GROUND STORAGE TANK
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 GENERAL
A. The intent of these specifications is to present general guidelines for the construction
of a five million gallon prestressed concrete ground storage tank. The specified tank
shall be the manufc'1cturer's standard design for the size and type specified.
Reasonable variation from these specifications will be allowed to permit
manufacturers to quote on their standard designs. However, it is the responsibility of
the tank designer and manufacturer to conform to all applicable reference
specifications in the design and construction of the specified Prestressed Concrete
Ground Storage Tank.
1.2 SCOPE
A. The circular tank shall be of prestressed concrete construction and shall have a
useable storage capacity of five million gallons.
B. The tank floor shall be of concrete or shotcrete construction containing no less than
0.625 percent reinforcing steel in each orthogonal direction.
C. The wire-prestressed concrete wall shall consist of a shotcrete core wall encasing a
steel shell diaphragm continuous the full wall height. All prestressing shall be done
with high tensile wire, permanently bonded tO,the tank wall.
D. The tank roof shall be a circumferentially prestressed free-span dome of concrete
construction containing no less than 0.25 percent reinforcing steel in each orthogonal
direction.
E. The entire tank, including all portions of the floor, wall, and roof shall be built by the
Tank Construction Company, using its own trained personnel and equipment.
1.3
QUALIFICATIONS & EXPERIENCE OF THE TANK CONSTRUCTION COMPANY:
A. The Tank Construction Company shall have the following qualifications and
experience:
B. The Company constructing the tank shall be a firm with at least ten years experience
in the design and constrllction of wire-wound circular prestressed concrete tanks; and
13414-1
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
shall give satisfactory evidence that it has the skill, reliability, and financial stability to
build and guarantee the tank in accordance with the quality required by these
specifications. The Company constructing the tank shall have built completely in its
own name in the past five years, and be presently responsible for, a minimum offive
(5) dome-covered prestressed concrete tanks of five million gallon size or larger,
which meet these specifications and which are now giving satisfactory service.
C. The Tank Construction Coi11pany shall have on its staff a full-time professional
engineer, who shan have no less than five years experience in the design and field
construction of circular prestressed concrete tanks, and who shall be in responsible
engineering charge of the work to be done. All working drawings and design
calculations shall carry the seal of such registered professional engineer.
D. THE CROM CORPORATION, Gainesville, Florida, and THE PRECON
CORPORATION are acceptable Tank Construction Companies.
Oher companies wishing to'bichhis project must be prequalified by the engineer, a minimum
of fourteen (14) days prior to bid. Additional companies which are prequalified to bid shall
be listed in an addendum prior to bid.
1.4
GUARANTEE:
A. The Tank Construction Company shall guarantee workmanship and materials on the
complete structural portion of the tank for a five-year period from date of acceptance
of the work. In case leakage or other defects appear within the five-year period, the
Tank Construction Company shall promptly repair the tank at its own expense upon
written notice by the owner,that such defects have been found. Leakage is defined
as a stream flow ofliquid appearing on the exterior of the tank, the source of which
is from the inside of the tank.
1.5
DESIGN CRITERIA:
A. The tank floorlwalljoint shall be sliding.
B.
The thickness of the core wall shall. be calculated so as to accept the initial
compressive forces 'applied by prestressing, hydrostatic stresses induced by contents,
and other applicable loads such as soil backfill and \vind.
C.
Backfill loads shall:not be used in the design of the core wall to counteract hydraulic
loads or provide residual compression in the wall.
D.
The design shall bein conformance with American Concrete Institute (ACl) Title
344R- W "Design and Construction of Circular Wire and Strand Wrap!Jed Prestressed
Concrete Structures," and currently accepted engineering principles and practices for
the design of such facilities.
13414-2
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
E. The tank shall be designed for applicable seismic loads.
F. Material propeliies shall be as follows:
Compressive Strength
Compressive Strength
Allowable Compressive
Stress
Allowable Compressive
Stress Due to Initial
Prestressing Force
*t = thickness of core wall
Concrete
f:
Shotcrete
f~
fg
fgi
Prestressing Wire
3500 psi at 28 days
4000 psi or greater at 28 days
1250 + 75t with
0.45 f~ maximum*
0.5 ei or less, with a maximum
'" '
01'2250 psi (where t~i is defined
as compressive strength at time
initial prestressing force is applied)
Wire Size Diameter
0.162" (8 gauge), 0.192" (6 gauge) or larger, but no larger than 0.250"
Working Stress, Wall
Working Stress, Dome Ring
Allowable Tensile'
Stress Before Losses
Ultimate Tensile S'trength
t:
fs
fsi
f'
s
Reinforcing Steel
Allowable Tensile Stress
Yield Strength
1.6
SUBMITT ALS:
'1'
s
fy
115,000 psi
120,000 psi
145,600 psi or no
greater than 0.70 J's
23] ,000 psi or greater for 8 gauge
222,000 psi or greater for 6 gauge
18,000 psi
60,000 psi
A. Submit to the Engineer complete design calculations and a complete set of detailed
working drawings for the tank.
13414-3
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
B. If a sliding waterstop is used in the floor/wall joint, submit load/shear/deflection data
to support shear and deflection calculations for base of wall. Tests must have been
generated for the particular waterstop configuration proposed.
C. Concrete mix designs.
D. Guarantee document as specified in Paragraph 3.
E. Paint color charts and product data.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 FLOOR:
A. Concrete membrane floors (minimum 4 inches thick) shall have a minimum thickness
of 8 inches of concrete over all pipe encasements and around sumps. The minimum
percentage (0.625%) of reinforcing steel applies to these thickened sections and shall
extend a minimum of 2 feet into the adjacent membrane floor.
B. Floors shall be vibloatory screeded to effect consolidation of concrete and proper
encasement of floor reinforcing steel.
C. Floors shall be continuously water cured until tank construction is completed.
2.2 CORE WALL:
A. The core wall shall be constructed of shot crete, encasing a steel diaphragm continuous
the full wall height without horizontal splices.
B. The thickness of the core wall shall be calculated so as to accept the initial,
compressive forces applied by prestressing, backfill, and other applicable loads. The
wall may taper uniformly onthe outside face from top to bottom as required by design
computations. In no case shall the core wall be less than 31'2 inches thicl<. Horizontal
sections of the wall shall form true circles without flats, excessive bumps, or hollows.
C. To compensate for bending moments and for shrinkage, differential drying. and
temperature stresses, the following reinforcing steel shall be incorporated in the core
wall:
(1) The top 2 feet of core wall shall have not less than 1 percent circumferential
reinforcing.
(2) The bottom 3 feet of core wall shall have not less than I p~rcent
circumferential reinforcing.
13414-4
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
') ...
_.J
(3) Inside Face:
a. 26-gauge steel shell diaphragm continuous the full wall height without
horizontal splices.
b. Additional vertical and horizontal reinforcing steel bars as required by
design compu~ations.
(4) Outside Face:
a. Vertical reinforcing steel: minimum of#4 bars at 12 inches center to
center.
b. Additional vertical and horizontal reinforcing steel bars as required by
design computations.
D. Interior and exteriOl' surfaces of the core wall shall be water cured until prestressing
starts.
STEEL SHELL DIAPHRAGM:
A. A 26-gauge steel tai1k shell, complying with ASTM A-366 for Commercial Quality
Cold Rolled Steel, shall be used within and throughout the core wall, providing a
positive waterstop. The steel shell diaphragm shall be encased and protected with
shotcrete no less than .l-inch thick at all places. The steel shell is to be so formed and
erected that a mechanical key between shotcrete and diaphragm will be created. The
. sheets of steel diaphragm shall be continuous from top to bottom of wall; horizontal
joints or splices will not be permitted.
All vertical joints in the diaphragm shall be sealed watertight by epoxy injection.
B. Epoxy injection shall be carried out. from bottom of wall to top of wall, using a
pressure pumping procedure, after the steel shell has been fully encased, inside and
outside, with shotcrete. The epoxy sealant shall be suitable for bonding to concrete,
shotcrete, and steel. The sealant shall conform to the requirements of ASTM C 881,
Type] n, Grade 1, and shall be a 100 percent solids, moisture insensitive, low
modulus epoxy system. When pumped, maximum viscosity of the epoxy shall be 10
poises at 77 degrees F.
C. The steel shell design and its epoxy injection procedure shall have been used in the
five tanks required in the Tank Construction Company's experience record. No nail
or other holes shall be made in the steel shell for erection or other purposes except for
inserting pipe sleeves, reinforcing steel, bolts, or other special appurtenances. Such
penetrations shall be sealed with an approved epoxy sealant.
13414-5
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I,
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
2.4
2.5
D. In all tanks designed to use a waterstop at the 'floor/wall joint, the steel shell
diaphragm shall be epoxy bonded to this waterstop.
SHOTCRETE:
A. A II shotcrete shall be applied by or under direct supervision of experienced nozzlemen
certitied in accordance with guidelines by ACI Committee 506. Certitication will be
accomplished by a recognized authority such as ELF/FC&PA*, ACI, or approved
equal.
*ELF - Engineering Laboratory Forum, Florida Institute of
Consulting Engineers
FC&.PA - Florida Concrete &. Products Association
B. Shotcrcte mixes, measured by weight, shall be:
First coat on steel shell
diaphragm and prestressing wire:
All other shotcrete:
1 part cementitious material to 3 parts sand
I part cementitious material to 4 parts sand
Up to 20 percent of cenientitious materials may be fly-ash.
C. Each shotcrete layei- shall be broomed prior to final set to effect satisfactory bonding
of the following layer. No shotcrete shall be applied to reinforcing steel or diaphragm
which is encrusted with overspray. No less than 1/a-inch thick shotcrete shall separate
reinforcing steel and prestressing wire.
DOME ROOF
A. The dome roof shall be constructed of reinforced concrete, or shotcrete,
circumferentially pl'estressed. Dome shell reinforcement shall consist of reinforcing
steel bars or welded wire fabric meeting ASTM A-IS5, not galvanized. Bolsters for
wire fabric and reinforcing bars shall be plastic tipped. Wire ties shall be galvanized.
B. The dome shell shall be designed as a free-span, spherical thin shell, with a one-tenth
rise. The dome ring girder shall be prestressed with sufticient wire to withstand the
dome dead load and design live loads. The ring girder shall have a cross section
suitable to accept the applied prestressing forces. All surfaces in the wall/dome ring.
girder joint shall be coated with an approved bonding epoxy.
13414-6
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
2.6
C. The high water level in the tank shall be permitted to encroach on the dome shell no
higher than the upper horizontal plane of the dome ring girder. Overflow outlets shall
be installed on the dome roofin such numbers as will provide an overflow open area
suitable for the tank inflow.
D. The typical dome thickness and steel reinforcement. shall meet the requirements of
A WW A Dll 0-95, Section 3.6.3., Thickness and rei/?j'orcemenl. In all cases, the
thickness of the dome shall be no less than 3 inches.
DOME EDGE
A. The dome edge and upper wall shall be designed to resist the moments. thrusts, and
shears that occur in this region due to dome and wall prestressing and loading
conditions.
B. Dome Edge Steel Reinforcement:
(1) Throughout the dome edge, the percentage of steel reinforcement. both
radially and circumferentially, shall be no less than 0.25 percent of the gross
cross sectioi1al area of concrete.
(2) Along the dome edge, steel reinforcement shall be distributed between the
upper and lower layers unless finite element analysis calculations indicate that
tensile stress does not exist in the concrete along the bottom face of the dome
edge. In that case, only top bars are required i'adially and circumferentially.
In addition, radial and circumferential reinforcing bars will not be required
along the bottom face of the dome edge where the calculated typical dome
thickness is less than 75 percent of the actual typical dome thickness.
(3) Where reinforcing bars are required in the bottom layer, they shall be
anchored near the tank wall to insure adequate development at the
intersection between dome and wall.
(4) In all cases, the percentage of circumferential steel reinforcement in the first
two feet of the dome edge shall be no less than one percent of the gross cross
sectional area of concrete.
(5) Where bottom dome edge steel reinforcement is required, vertical steel
reinforcement along the inside face of the tank wall shall be no less than 0.5
percent of the cross sectional area of wall shotcrete.
13414-7
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 HORIZONTAL PRESTRESSING:
A. Circumferential prestressing ofthe tank shall be achieved by the application of cold-
drawn, high-carbon:steel wire complying with ASTM A-648 Class IT, placed under
high tension. A substantial allowance shall be made for prestressing losses due to
shrinkage and plastic flow in the shotcrete and due to relaxation in the prestressing
steel.
B. Placement of the prestressing steel wire shall be in a continuous and uniform helix of
such pitch as to prov.ide in each lineal foot of core wall height an initial force and unit
compressive stress equivalent to that shown on the drawings. Splicing of the wire
shall be permitted only when completing the application ofa full coil ofwire, or when
removing a defectiv.e section of wire;
C. Areas to be prestressed will contain not less than 10 wires per foot of wall for 8 gauge
and 8 wires per foot of wall for 6 gauge. A maximum 01'24 wires per layer per foot
for 8 gauge and 20 ~vires per layer per foot for 6 gauge will be allowed. Shotcrete
shall be used to completely encase each ilidividual wire, 'and protect it from
corrosion. To facilitate this encasement, the clear space between adjacent wires is to
be no less than 1 wire diameter.
D. Prestressing shall be accomplished by a machine capable of continuously inducing a
uniform initial tension in the wire before it is positioned on the tank wall. Tension in
the wire shall be generated-by methods not dependent on cold working or re-drawing
of the wire. In determining compliance with design requirements, the aggregate force
of all tensioned wires per foot of wall shall be considered rather than the force per
individual wire, and such aggregate force shall be no less than that required by the
drawings.
3.2 MEASUREMENT OF WIRE STRESS:
A. The Tank Construction Company shall supply equipment at the construction site to
measure tension in the wire after it is positioned on the tank wall. This stress
measuring equipment shall include: electronic direct reading stressometer accurate
to within 1 percent; calibrated dynamometers; test stand to tield verify the accuracy
of the stressometer. The initial tension in each wire shall be recorded.
3.3 EXTERIOR COVERCOA T:
A. After circumferential prestressing wires have been placed, they shall be protected by
encasement in shotcrete. This shotcrete encasement shall completely encapsulate each
\vire, and shall permanently bond the wire to the tank wall. The shotcrete cover shall
134] 4-8
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
3.4
3.5
have a thickness of no less than 1 inch over the wire. When multiple layers of wire
are required,shotcrete cover between layers shall be no less than 1/8 inch thiclc
W ALL OPENINGS:
A. When it is necessary for a pipe to pass through the tank wall, the invert of such pipe
shall be no less than 18 inches above the floor slab, and the prestressing wires required
at the pipe elevation shall be distributed above and below the opening, leaving an
unbanded strip around the entire tank. Ordinarily, unbanded strips shall have a
vertical dimension of no more than 36 inches.
B. An axi-symmetric finite element shell analysis will be required for un banded wall
spaces having a vertical dimension greater than 36 inches.
C. All pipe sleeves passing through the wall shall be sealed to the steel shell diaphragm
by epoxy injection.
TANK ACCESSORIES:
A. The Tank Construction Company shall furnish, install, and guarantee for tive years the
following tank accessories:
Wall Manhole
Stainless steel frame with stainless steel cover and stainless
steel bolts; all Type 316.
Exterior Ladder
T -606] aluminum with safety cage
Interior Ladder,
Roof Hatch Cover (lockable),
Roof Ventilator,
Liquid Level Indicator
Dome Probe Flange
All fiber glass with Type 316 stainless
steel fasteners.
Through- Wall
Pipe Sleeves
Type 316 stainless steel sleeves with neoprene
Link-Seal or equal units using stainless steel
tightening bolts.
3.6
PAINTING:
A. Painting of the exposed exterior surfaces of the tank shall consist of a prime coat of
masonry undercoater, plus two coats of exterior masonry paint. All painting shall)e
done in accordance with the paint manufacturer's recommendations. Color shall be
selected by the Owner from the manufacturer's color charts.
13414-9
I
I
I
I
'I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I~
"
3.7
3.8
STERILIZATION AND TESTING
A. Sterilization of the completed tank shall be performed by the spray method containing
200 ppm of chlorine, and shall follow the criteria found in A WW A C652.
B. Bacteriological sampling of the tank shall be performed by the owner.
C. PriOl' to placing in service the tank shall be filled with water furnished by the Owner.
The tank shall remain filled for a period of at least 24 hours to allow for absorption
and initial settlemelH.
D. The liquid volume loss for a period of 24 hours shall not exceed one-tenth of one
percent of the tank capacity. If the liquid volume loss exceeds this amount, leakage
shall be considered excessive, and the tank shall be repaired and retested.
E. Damp spots on the footing are permissible within the allowable leakage requirements.
Running water on the footing regardless of the leakage allowance, will not be
perm i tted.
MATERIAL TESTING
A. Prepare sets of three 6~inch by 12-inch cylinders for each 75 cubic yards of concrete
used on the footing, floor and dome. Prepare and test a minimum of six sets for the
outside portion of the core wall and two sets for the outside portion of the core wall.
B. Test cylinders as follows: One at 7 days, one at 28 days and one hold:
C. Submit mill test reports to the engineer certifying that the prestressing steel meets
ASTM standards.
3.9
MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT:
A. Prestressed CQncreteGround Storage Tank and All Appurtenances will be. paid for
at the lump sum amount shown in the bid schedule for Ground Storage Tank,
Complete with Accessories and Pipes.
13414-10
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
SECTION 15100
PUMP CONTROL VALVES
PART I - GENERi-\L
1.1 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit detailed product data and descriptive literature including dimensions. weights,
headloss data, pressure rating and materials of construction.
B. Provide shop drawings which clearly illustrate the general arrangement of the equipment
and cross-sectional views of the components.
C. Control panel information, control diagrams, operation sequence and wiring diagrams.
1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Supplier shall have been manufacturing automatic control valves for a period of at least
ten (10) years and shall, at the Engineer's request, provide a list of installations involving
equipment of similar size and application.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 PUMP CONTROL VALVE WITH THROTTLING FEATURE
A. General: Pump control valves shall be an electric check valve which consists of a main
valve assembly and a system of electro-hydraulic controls, completely assembled and
tested as a unit and ready for field installation and wiring. Two (2) are required under
this contract.
B. MAIN VALVE
(l) Main valve body shall be globe style, constructed of high-strength cast iron
conforming to ASTM A126 Class B with integral flanges, faced and drilled per
ANSI B 16.1 Class 125. The valve shall be "full-ported" with a flow area
through the valve no less than the area of its nominal pipe size. Valve shall have
an integral bottom pad or feet permitting support directly under the valve body.
1 5 100-1
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
2.2
(2) The main valve shall operate on the differential piston principle such that the
area on the uriderside of the piston is no less than thepipe area and the area on
the upper surface is greater than that of the underside. There shall be no
diaphragms or springs in the main valve.
(3) . The valve piston shall be fully guided on its outside diameter and all guiding and
sealing surfaces shall be bronze. To minimize the consequences of throttling,
throttling shal~l be by long, stationary vee-ports located dO\vnstream of the seat
and not by the seat itself. Sawtooth attachments or other add-on devices are
not permitted;
(4) The val ve shall be fully capable of operating in any position without the need of
springs and slpll not incorpOl~ate stems, stem guides or spokes in the waterway.
(5) The main val:ve shall be serviceable in the line through a single flanged cover
which provides easy access to all internal components.
(6) The main valve shall, at aminimum, be supplied with the Emergency Solenoid
Pilot (ESP), the Limit Switch (LS) and the Normal Solenoid Pilot (NSP).
c.
CONTROLS
(1) Provide a system of electro-hydraulic controls to enable the val ve to perform the
functions listed below. All controls and control piping shall be non-corrosive
and suitable f()r the working pressure and electrical conditions.
(2) Controls shall consist of a normal solenoid pilot with manual operator,
independently adj ustable normal opening and closing speed controls, emergency
solenoid with separate, adjustable closing speed control, y-strainer, isolating
valves and a double break limit switch mounted on the valve cover and actuated
by the visual travel indicator.
(3) Each valve shall be supplied with a pre-wired pump/valve control panel capable
of operating, controlling and monitoring the pump and control valve both locally
and remotely via the owner's SCADA system. The controls shall operate the
valve and pump according to the function described below and according to the
control diagram shown on the plans. This panel shall also meet the requirements
of Section 15900.
FUNCTION
A. The valve shall function to control surges associated with the starting and stopping of
15100-2
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
pumps. Valve operation shall be by means of solenoid pilots and powered by water
pressure obtained from the inlet or outlet side of the main valve. The valve shall open
at a controlled rate of speed whenever the normal opening, normal closing and
emergency solenoid pilots are energized. Upon opening, the indicator rod shall actuate
a limit switch tied in with the motor starter circuit. During the opening cycle, de-
energizing the normal opening solenoid shall cause the valve to stop opening. De-
energizing the nonmil closing and normal opening solenoids shall cause the \'alve to
close at a controlled rate of speed, energizing the normal closing solenoid shall cause the
valve to stop closing. At an adjustable point near the seated position, the retracting
indicator rod shall actuate the limit switch, which shall turn off the pump motor and de-
energize the emergency solenoid pilot.
Should a power failure occur during the course of pumping, the emergency solenoid
shall de-energize and initiate a more rapid valve closure.
? ...
_.J
MANUF ACTURER
A. The valve shall be GA Industries, Inc. Figure 1730-DT, or approved equal and the
control panel shall be GA Industries, Inc. Figure 7600 Pump Director or equal.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION:
A. The pump control valves and all required appurtenances shall be installed in accordance
with manufacturer's ~pecifications.
B. Pump control panel shall be installed and wired in accordance with manufacturer's
recommendations, Section 15900 and all applicable Electrical Specifications.
3.2 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT:
A. Two pump control valves, associated controls and appurtenances shall be paid for at the
lump sum price as shown in the bid schedule for Pump Control Valves, Complete with
All Appurtenances.
15100-3
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
SECTION 15200
ALTITUDE VALVE
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 GENERAL:
A. The altitude valve shall be single acting, closing to prevent overflow when high water
is reached, and opening for refilling when the tank or reservoir water level lowers.
Semi-throttling action is required for gradual closure of the valve as the high water
level is approached. A cushioned check feature shall be provided in external piping
to insure slow opening and closing of main valve.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 ALTITUDE VALVE:
A. The altitude valve shall be flanged body, fully mounted, external pilot operated, with
free floating piston (operated without springs, diaphragm or levers), single seat with
seat bore equal to size of valve. The minimum travel of the piston shall be equal to
25% of the diameter'ofthe seat. For true alignment, the piston shall be guided above
and below the seat a,distance equal to no less than 75% of the diameter of the seat to
correct lateral thrust and stem binding. Piston shall be cushioned and so designed as
to insure positive closure. The main valve shall be packed with leather (or other soft
material) to insure tight closure and prevent metal-to-metal friction and seating.
Furnished with indicator rod & stuffing box to show position of piston opening. The
design shall be such that repairs and dismantling internally of main valve may be made
without its removal from the line.
B. The hydraulic pilot(s), controlling operation of main valve, shall have a range for
adjustment, be easily.accessible, and so arranged with isolation ball valves to allow for
its removal from the control circuit while the main valve is under pressure. An
external strainer with flushing cock shall be provided in the control circuit to protect
the pilot and speed control valve(s).
C. The external controls and associated rigid brass piping/fittings liecessary for proper
operation shall be factory assembled and furnished with the main valve. Brass
bushings with gauge cock on inlet and outlet of main valve to receive pressure gauges
for testing ,purposes.
2.2
PHYSICAL AND CHEMICAL PROPERTIES:
A. Valve shall be constructed of gray iron, bronze and stainless steel. Gray iron casti ngs
shall conform to ASTM Specification A 126 Class B. Bronze parts shall conform to
ASTM Specification B-62. Stainless parts shall conform to ASTM Specification
15200-1
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
A 743 Grade CF-8 o.r CF-8M. Teflon coated parts shall receive two coats of Teflon
TFE with a total minimum thickness of 10 mils.
B. The flanged assemblies shall conform to ANSI B 16.1 Class 125 standards for wall
thickness of body and caps, and flange thickness and drilling. subject to other
specified standards.
2.3 MANUFACTURER:
A. The altitude valve 'shall be equal in all respects to the Model 40A WR-CE as
manufactured by the Ross Valve Mfg. Co., Inc.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION:
A. The altitude valve and all required appm1enances shall be installed in accordance with
man ufacturer' s speci fications.
'"l ?
-'.-
TESTS: ,
A. A hydrostatic test shall be performed at the factory prior to shipment. The valve shall
be tested to two (2) times the working pressure, maximum 500 psi testing pressure,
subject to contract. The valve performance and hydrostatic tests may be witnessed
by the customer/engineer or representative.
3.3 PAINTING:
A. Ferrous surfaces of valve shall be coated with NSF Certified Epoxy (Tnemec Series
FC20) in accordance with ANSIINSF Std. 61, and conforms to A WW AD 102 Inside
System No. I.
3.4 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT:
A. Altitude valve with associated vault, pipe, valves and fittings shall be paid for at a
lump sum amount as shown in the bid schedule for Altitude Valve & Vault Complete
with Appurtenances.
15200-2
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
SECTION 15900
PUMP AND VALVE CONTROLS
PART 1 - GENERAL
\.1 GENERAL:
A. In general the pump and valve controls consist of the pump control panel as specified in
Section!5100. The Contractor shall install and place into operation a booster pump station
monitoring/controlling' system designed to operate the two booster pumps as described
herein and which will accommodate the addition of two future pumps. The pumps will
operate in a specified sequence, in response to output contacts from a RTU to be installed
by Augusta Utilites, allowing manual control of the pump station via the Owner's SCADA
system from the system master location. Each pump shall also have a manual selector
s\vitch so that it can be operated locally.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 CONTROL SCOPE
A. Each booster pumps will have a solenoid operated control/check valve. The booster pumps,
whether in the manual or automatic mode of operation, must be started and stopped against
closed valves. The controls shall operate to energize the normal solenoid pilot (NSP) to
open the check valve only after the pump has developed sufficient discharge pressure as
measured by a pressure switch (PS) tapped between the pump and the control valve. Upon
shut down, a mechanical limit switch (LS) shall cause the controls to de-energize the pump
when the valve is completely closed. An emergency solenoid pilot (ESP) shall operate to
shut the check valve upon power failure or when the pump is off. The NSP, ESP, and LS
shall be furnished by the valve manufacturer, and wired to the control panel. The pump
control supplier shall coordinate the pump operation with the control valves and interlock
each pump with its associated valve. On a RTU system failure condition, the control valves
shall be de-energized and the pumps shut down.
2.2 CHECK/CONTROL VAL VE.INTERLOCK CIRCUITS
A. Each of the pump circuits shall be interlocked with the limit switch on the associated
checklcontrol valve to insure the pump is started and stopped against a closed valve. A
pump start command, whether in the automatic mode or hand mode shall energize the pump
motor starter (only if the valve is closed as sensed by the valve limit switch) and
simultaneously energize the valve control solenoid to open the valve.' When the pump is to
be shut down, the valve solenoid shall be de-energized and the valve shall begin to close.
Only after the valve is fully closed shall the motor starter be de-energized, stopping the
pump motor. Circuitry shall be included to detect a "valve failure to open" condition for
each pump control valve.
15900-1
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION:
A. Contractor shall coordinate the controls for the centrifugal pumps, pump control valves and
the Owner's SCADA system in order to provide a functional and operational system.
Q
.., ?
-'.-
GUARANTEE:
A. All equipment shall be guaranteed against defects in material and workmanship for a period
of one year fi'om date of Owner's final inspection and acceptance to the effect that any
defective equipment shall be repaired or replaced without cost or obligation to the Owner.
3.3 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT:
A. Pump and Valve Controls shall be considered incidental and no separate will be made
therefor.
15900-2
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
SECTION 16000
GENERAL
1.01
CONTRACT DOCUMENTS:
A. All work of Section 16 shall comply with the requirements of:
1. General Conditions
2. Supplementary General Conditions
3. General Requirements
4. Specifications
5. Drawings
6. Modifications incorporated in the documents' before their execution.
1.02
WORK INCLUDED:
A. This Division of the specifications (16000) covers the complete interior and
exterior, electrical system for all work shown on the drawings as specified
herein providing all material, labor and equipment required forthe installation
of the electrical systems complete and in operating condition.
B. Include in the electrical work all the necessary supervision and the issuing of
all coordinating information to any othertrades who are supplying work to
accommodate the electrical installations.
1.03
DRA WINGS:
A. The drawings for electrical work utilize symbols and schematic diagrams
which have no dimensional significance. The work shall therefore, be installed.
to fulfill the diagramrnatic intent expressed on the electrical drawings.
B.
Review architectural drawings for door swings, cabinets, counters, moldings
and built-in equipment, conditions indicated on architectural drawings shall
govern.
c.
Coordinate electrical work with the architectural details, floor plans,
elevations, structural and mechanical drawings. Provide fittings, junction
boxes and accessories to meet conditions.
D.
Do not scale drawings'. Dimensions for layout of equipment, or spaces shall
be obtained ,from architectural, structural or mechanical drawings unless
specifically indicated on the electrical drawings.
16000-1
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
E. Discrepancies shown on different drawings, between drawings and
specifications or between drawings and field conditions shall be promptly
brought to the attention of the Architect.
F. Provide as used on the drawings and in the speci tications shall mean, furnish,
install, connect, adjust and test.
G. The drawings and specifications are complimentary and any work or material
shown in one and omittedin the other, or described in the one and not shown
in the other, or which may be implied by both or either, shall be furnished as
though shown on both, in order to give a complete and first class installation.
1.04
SITE INVESTIGATION:
A. Potential Contractors shall visit the project site prior to bid date to satisfy
themselves as to the existing conditions and distances which may effect the
cost of the project. Where work under this project requires extension,
relocation, re-connecting or modifications to existing equipment or systems,
the existing equipment or systen1s, shall 'be restored to their original condition,
with the exception of the work under this contract, before the completion of
this project. .
1.05
SHOP DRAWINGS:
A. Submit for approval by the Architect all materials and equipment to be
incorporated,in the electrical work.
B. Submit only shop drawings which comply with the contract documents. Shop
drawings shall be checked and corrected by the Contractor before they are
submitted to the Architect. Shop drawings that are not corrected by the
Contractor shail be returned for correction without detailed notations by the
Architect as to the necessary corrections.
C.
Mark each individual submittal item to show specification section which
pertains to the item.
D.
Submit information as required under SUBMITTALS, for each of the
individual electrical sections of the specifications.
E,'
Data submitted shall contain all information required to indicate compliance
with equipment specified.
F.
Submit field information drawings to explain fully all procedures involved in
erecting, mounting,and connecting all items of equipment which differ from
that specified.
16000-2
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
G. When Shop Drawings are reviewed, some errors may be detected but others
may be overlooked. This does not grant the Contractor permission to
proceed in error. Regardless of any information contained in the Shop
Drawings, the requirements of the Drawings and Specifications shall be
followed and are not waived or superseded in any way by the Shop Drawing
revIew.
1.06
RECORD DRA WINGS:
A. One complete set of electrical drawings shall be reserved for as-built
drawings. Any approved deviation from the contract drawings shall be
recorded on these drawings. Drawings shall be checked monthly for
completeness.
B. Completed as-built drawings shall be presented to the Architect prior to final
inspection. ,
1.07
MAINTENANCE AND OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS:
A. Provide at the time of final inspection three sets of maintenance and operating
instruction for:
1. Main Service Switchboard
2. Fuses
3. Wiring Devices
4. Lighting Fixtures and Lamps
5. Disconnect Switches
6. Transformers
7. Photo Control and Contactors
8. Engine Generator
9. Surge Protection System
B. Furnish a qualified and accredited factory trained technician to train personnel
designated by the Owner in the proper operation and maintenance of
specialized equipment.
C. The issuing of operating instructions shall include the submission of the name,
address, and' telephone number of the manufacturer's representative and
service company for each item of equipment so that service and spare parts
can be readily obtained.
1.08
CODES AND PERMITS:
A. All electrical work shall meet or exceed the latest requirements of the
following codes and/or other authorities exercising jurisdiction over the
electrical construction work and the project.
16000-3
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
1. The National Electrical Code (NFP A 70) - 1996 Edition
2. The National Electrical Safety Code (ANSI C-2)
3. The Life Safety Code (NFP A 10 1) - 1 991 Ed i tiol1
4. The Standard Building Code - 1991 Edition
5. Regidations ofthe local utility company with respect to metering and
service entrance.
6. Municipal and State ordinances governing electrical work.
B. All required permits and inspection certificates shall be obtained, and made
available at the completion of the work. Permits. inspections, and certi fication
fees shall be paid for as a part of the electrical work.
1.09
DEVIA TIONS:
A. No deviations from the plans and specifications shall be made \vithout the full
knowledge and consent of the Architect or his authorized representative.
B. Should the Contractor find at any time during progress of the work that in his
judgement existing conditions make desirable a modification iil requirements
covering any particular item or items, he shall report such items promptly to
the Architect for his decision and instruction.
1.10
COOPERATION:
A. This Contractor shall schedule his work and in every way possible cooperate
with all other Contractors on the job to avoid delays, interferences, and
unnecessary work. He shall notify them of all openings, hangers, excavations,
etc., so that proper provisions shall be made for his work. This shall not
relieve him of the cost of cutting, when such is required.
B. This Contrac,tor shall do all cutting and excavating necessary for the complete
installation of his work, but he shall not cut the work of any other Contractor
without first consulting the Architect. he shall repair any work damaged by
him or his workmen, employing the services of the Contractor whose work
is damaged.
C. This Contractor shall by all means coordinate the location of ceiling lighting
fixtures, both recessed and surface mounted, with the Ceiling Contractor so
that proper hangers and supports shall be provided.
D. Any conflict between electrical and other trades shall be reported before
construction starts. No extra charges will be approved for work resulting
from failure to coordinate with other trades.
16000-4
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
1.11
INSTALLATION:
A. Raceways, fixtures, devices, and other electrical equipment shall be installed
in a neat andworkl11anlike manner and in accordance with recognized good
practice for a first class installation.
B. The Architect or his representative shall have the authority to reject any
workmanship not complying with the contract documents.
C. The Electrical Contractor shall personally or through an authorizedlict?nsed
and competent electrician, constantly supervise the work from beginning to
complete and final inspection.
D. Electrical equipment shall be installed in accordance with manufacturer's
recommenda,tions.
E. Locations of proposed raceway, riser, location of structural elements, location
and size of chases method and type of construction of floors, walls, parti tions,
etc., shall be verified before construction starts.
F. Consult owner and utility companies for underground lines before any
underground work is stm1ed. Contractors shall be responsible for any
damage.
1.12
EXCA V AnON, TRENCHING AND BACKFILLING:
A. General. The Contractor shall perform all excavation t? install conduit
structures and equipment specified in this Division of the Specifications.
During excavation, materials for backfilling shall be pi led back fi:om the banks
of the trench:to avoid over-loading and to prevent slides and cave-ins. All
excavated materials not to be used for backfill shall be removed and disposed
of by the Contractor. Grading shall be clone to prevent surface water fi'om
flowing into trenches.and other excavations and water accumulating therein
shall be removed by pumping. All excavations shall be made by open cut. No
tunneling shall be done. All requirements of OS I-I A shall be complied with.
B. Trench Exca\lation. The bottom of the trenches shall be graded to provide
uniform bearing and support for each section of the conduit on undisturbed
soil at every point along its entire length. Over depths shall be backfilled with
loose, granular, moist earth, tamped. Removed unstable soil that is not
capable of supporting the conduit and replace with speci fied material.
C. Backfilling. The trenches shall not be backfilled until it is reviewed by the
Architect or his representative. The trenches shall be backfillecl with the
16000-5
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I 1.13
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
-
I
-
-
excavated materials approved for backfilling, consisting of earth, loam. sandy
clay, and gravel or soft shale, free from large clods of earth or stones,
deposited in 6" layers and tamped until the conduit has a cover of not less than
the adjacent existing ground but not greater than 2" above existing ground.
The backtiII ing shall be carried on simultaneously on both sides of the trench
so that conduit is not displaced. The compaction of the tilled trench shall be
at least equal to that of the surrounding undisturbed material, except that
trenches ocqlrring under paved areas or in areas to be fi Iled.shall be backtilled
in 6" maximum layers and each layer compacted to 95% maximum density.
Settling the backfill with water will not be permitted. Any trenches not
meeting compaction requirements or where settlement occurs shall have
backfill removed down to the top of the conduit then backtill with approved
materials as specified hereinbefore.
D. Positively no tree roots are to be damaged, hand dig where required.
Damaged trees or shrubbery shall be replaced in kind and must be approved
by Engineer.
MA TERIALS:
A. Materials specified by manufacturer's name shall be used unless approval of
other manufacturers are listed in addenda to these specitications. Request for
prior approva'l shall be submitted by mail only facsimile will not be acceptable.
B. Drawings indicating proposed layout of space, all equipment to be installed
therein and clearance between equipment shall, be submitted, where
substitution of materials alter space requirements on the drawings.
C. Material Standards: All materials shall be new and shall conform to the
standards where such have been established for the particular material in
question. Publications and Standards of the organization listed below are
applicable to materials specified herein.
1. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM)
2. Underwriter's Laboratories, Inc. (UL)
3. National Electrical Manufacturer Association (NEMA)
4. Insulated Cable Engineers Association (lCEA)
5. Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers (IEEE)
6. National Fire Protection Association (NFP A)
7. American National Standards Institute (ANSI)
D. Material of the same type shall be the product of one manutacturer.
16000-6
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
E. Materials notreadily available from local sources shall be ordered immediately
upon approval.
F. The Architect shall have authority to reject any materials, or equipment. not
complying with these specifications and have the Contractor replace materials
so rejected iri1mediately upon notification of rejection.
G. Any material or equipment so rejected shall be removed from the job within
24 hours of such rejection, otherwise theArchitect may have same removed
at the Contractor's expense.
1.14
EQUIPMENT CONNECTIONS:
A. All equipment requiring electrical power connections shall be connected under
this Division of these specifications.
B. Where electFical connections to equipment requii'e specific locations. such
locations shall be obtained from shop drawings.
C. Drawings for location of conduit stub-up boxes mOlll1ted in wall or tloor to
serve specific equipment, shall not be scaled.
D. Electrical circuits to equipment furnished under other sections of these
specifications are based on design loads. If actual equipment furnished has
loads other than design loads electrical circui ts and protecti ve devices shall be
revised to be compatible with equipment furnished at no additional cost to the
Owner. Any revisions must have prior appr:oval by the Architect. Before
submitting shop drawings, Electrical Sub-Contractor shall along with the
Mechanical Sub-Contractor review voltage and load requirements for
mechanical and plumbing equipment to determine the compatibility between
what is being furnished and what is shown in the contract drawings. The
Electrical Sub-Contractor shall along with his submittals submit a statement
that he has reviewed all shop drawings including review with the Mechanical
and Plumbirig Sub-Contractors.
E. Where equipment is indicated to be served thru conduit stub-up, conduit shall
be stubbed up not less than four inches above floor where transition shall be
made to sealtite flexible conduit for connection to equipment.
F. The Contractor's attention is invited to other Di visions ofthese speci fications,
where equipment requiring electrical service or electrically related work is
specified to become fully aware of the scope of work required for electrical
service or related work.
16000- 7
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
G. Where electricity utilizing equipment is supplied separate from the electrical
work, and is energized, controlled or otherwise made operative by electrical
work, the testing to provide the proper functional performance of such wiring
systems shall be conducted by the trade responsible for the equipment. The
electrical work shall, however, include cooperation in such testing and the
making available of any necessary testing or adjustments to the electrical
equipment. ~
H. Heating, air conditioning, and ventilating equipment is specified to be
furnished and installed under other sections of these specifications. The
controls, likewise are specified to be furnished thereunder. All necessary
wiring, wiring troughs and circuit breakers for power for this equipment shall
be furnished and installed under this section of the specifications, in
accordance with the plans and/or diagrams furnished with the equipment, or
shown on these plans. Starters furnished by the Mechanical Contractor shall
be installed under this Division of the specitications. Power wiring to
auxiliary equipment on a piece of equipment remote from its main terminal
box and iriterlocking of apparatus shall be accomplished under Heating
Ventilating Equipment section of the specitications. Conduit and outlets for
control wiring shall be furnished and installed under Division 15 of these
specitications. Control conductors for mechanical equipment shall not be
installed in same conduit with powerconductors.
1.15
PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE, HANDLING, & PROTECTION:
A. Inspect materials upon arrival at Project and verify conformance to Contract
Documents. 'Prevent unloading of unsatisfactory material. Handle materials
in accordance with manufacturer's applicable standards and suppliers
recommendations, and in a manner to prevent damage to materials. Store
packaged materials in original undamaged condition with manufacturer's labels
and seals intact. Containers which are broken, opened, damaged, or
watermarked are unacceptable and shall be removed from the premises.
B. All material, except items specifically designed to be installed outdoors such
as pad mounted transformers or stand-by generators, shall be stored in an
enclosed, dry building or trailer. Areas for general storage shall be provided
by the Contractor. Provide temperature and/or humidity control where
applicable. No material for interior installation, including conductors, shall be
stored other than in an enclosed weather tight structure. Equipment stored
other than as specified above shall be removed from the premises.
C. Equipment and materials shall not be installed until such time as the
environmental conditions of the job site are suitable to protect the equipment
] 6000-8
-
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
or materials. Conditions shall be those for which the equipment or materials
are designed to be installed. Equipment and materials shall be protected from
water, direct sunlight, cold or heat. Equipment or materials damaged or
which are suojected to these elements are unacceptable and shall be removed
from the premises and replaced.
1.16
CLEANING AND PAINTING:
A. Remove oil, dirt, grease and foreign materials from all raceways, fittings,
boxes. panel board trims and cabinets to provide a clean surface for painting.
Touch-up scratched or marred surfaces of lighting fixtures, panel board and
cabinet trims, motor control center, switchboard or equi pment enclosures \vi th
paint furnished by the equipment manufacturers speci tically for that purpose.
B. Do not paint trim covers for flush mounted panelboards, telephone cabinets,
pull boxes, junction boxes and control cabinet unless required by the
Architect. Remove trim covers before painting. Under no conditions shall
locks, latches or exposed trim clamps be painted.
C. Unless indicated on the drawings or specified herein to the contrary. all
painting shall be done under the PAINTING Section of these Specifications.
1.17
GUARANTEE:
A. Defective lamps shall be replaced up-to-date of acceptance and shall be
guaranteed for one year.
B. All systems and component parts shall be guaranteed for one year from the
date of final acceptance of the complete project. Defects found during this
guaranteed period shall be promptly corrected at no additional cost to the
Owner.
1.18
SERVICE:
A. The electrical service for this project has been coordinated between the
Engineer and the Utility Company. However, before installing service conduit
(underground or mast), Contractor shall contact Utility Company and verify
voltage, location and type of service.
1.19
MEASUREMENT OF PAYMENT:
A. Work under this section shall be paid for at the lump sum amount shown in
the bid schedule for electrical.
16000-9
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
SECTION 16010
LIGHTING AND POWER PANELBOARDS
1.1
SUBMITT ALS
A. Complete panel board shop drawings shall be submitted, listing as a minimum
the followil1,g items:
I. Voltage rating.
2. Bus assembly rating.
3. Main breaker rating by capacity, number of poles and interrupting
rating in RMS symmetrical amperes.
4. Surface or flush mounting.
5. Listing of branch breakers by capacity number of poles and
interrupting rating in RMS symmetrical amperes.
6. Top or bottom feed.
7. A schedule similar to that shown on the drawings, depicting branch
breaker arrangement and breaker sizes and giving full explanation for
anydifference between the two.
B. Contractor utilizing switch gear other than Square "D" Company, shall submit
layout of electrical rooms delineating placement of equipment.
1.2
MANUF ACTURERS:
A. For the purpose of selecting quality and types of panels, equipment as
manufactured by Square "D" Company has been specified. Following
manufacturers meeting these specifications are acceptable.
1. G. E.
2. Siemens
3. Cutler Hammer
1.3
EQUIPMENT:
A. Furnish and install circuit breaker lighting and power panelboards as indicated
in the panelboard schedule and where shown on the plans. Panel boards shall
be of the dead-front safety type, equipped with thermal magnetic molded case
circuit breakers with frame and trip rating as shown in the schedule.
B. Circuit breakers shall be HACR rated, quick-make, quick-break, therma\--
16010-1
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
e.
magnetic, trip-indicating, and have common trip on all multi-pole breakers.
Trip indicati~:m shall be clearly shown by the breaker handle taking position
between ON and OFF, when the breaker is tripped. Branch circuit breakers
feeding convenience outlets shall have sensitive instantaneous trip setting of
not more than 10 times the trip rating of the breakers. Connection to bus in
all panels shall be bolted. All breakers shall be 20 ampere trip. unless
otherwise shown. All breakers shall be minimum for 120/208 volts (10,000)
and for 277/480 volts (14,000) A.l.e. sym. unless otherwise noted.
Bus bar connections to the branch circuit breakers shall be the distributed
phase type. Three-phase, four-wire bussing shall be such that any three
adjacent single-pole breakers are individually connected to each of the three
different phases in such a manner that two or three-pole breakers can be
installed at any location. All current-carrying parts of the bus assembly shall
be copper. Main ratings shall be as shown in the panel board schedule on the
drawings.
D.
Panel front shall be provided with a continuous piano hinge on one side.
E.
A steel circuit directory frame permanently attached (spot welded) at factory
(not glued), and card with a clear plastic covering shall be provided on the
inside of the door. The directory card shall provide a space at least 1/4" high
x 3" long for each circuit.
F.
All panels sl~all be equipped with a copper equipment grounding bar. The bar
shall have lugs of sufficient size to handle all grounding conductors.
G.
Sub-feed circuit breakers are not permitted in panels unless specifically called
for.
H.
Provide mounting hardware for all spaces shown on panel board schedule.
I.
Panel board circuit numbering shall be such that starting at the top, odd
numbering shall be used in sequence down the left hand side and even
nunibers down the right hand side.
.I.
Except where otherwise indicated on the drawings or required to avoid
conflicts, mount the panel boards so the tops of the cabinets will be 6 feet
above the finished floors. For panel boards which are too high, mount them
so the bottoi11s ofthe cabinets will be not less than 6 inches above the finished
floors.
K.
Locate the cabinets so that present and future conduits can be connected to
16010-2
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
them conveniently. Coordinate the dimensions of the cabinets with the
dimensions of the spaces designated for installation prior to fabrication of the
cabinets. Cabinet shall be minimum 20" wide.
L. Wiring in panelboards shall be neatly grouped and secured with ty-wraps.
M. Electrical panels shall not be used as \vireways or junction boxes for control
conductors.
N. Where spaces are called for in a panel, all mounting hardware shall be
provided for the frame size indicated.
O. Splices in panelboards are not permitted.
1.4
MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT:
A. Work under this section shall be paid for at the lump sum amount shown in
the bid schedule for electrical.
160 10-3
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
SECTION 16015
FUSES
1.1
SUBMITTALS:
A. Shop drawillgs shall be submitted and shall consist of manufacturer's published
literature aqd technical data sufficient for the engineer to determine whether
system function will be adversely affected, whether proposed fuses meet this
specitication, and whether they are equal in quality.
1.2
MANUF ACTURERS:
A. Acceptable manufacturers are:
1. Littelfuse
2. Cefco
3. GOllld - Shawmut
1.3
EQUIPMENT/Mf\ TERIAL:
A. All fuses rated 600 volts or less and used for main, feeder, or branch circuit
protection with 200,000 ampere interrupting rating and shall be so labeled.
Fuse classes and sizes indicated on the drawings have been selected to provide
a fully coordinated selective protection system. To maintain this design, all
fuses provided shall be furnished by the same manufacturer. Should equipment
provided require a different u.L. Class or fuse size, the engineer shall be
furnished with sufficient data to ascertain that system function will not be
adversely affected.
B. Current-Limiting Fuses 601-6000 Amperes
Fuses rated over 600 amperes shall be U.L. Class "L" fuses, and shall have
a minimum ti111e delay of 10 seconds at 500% rating.
C. Current-Limiting Fuses 600 Amperes or Less
All fuses 600 amperes and below shall be true dual-element time delay fuses
with separate spring-loaded thermal overload elements in all ampere ratings.
All ampere ratings shall be designed to open at 400 degrees Fahrenheit or less
when subjected to a non-load oven test. To eliminate induction heating, all
fuse ferrules and end caps shall be non-ferrous and shall be bronze or another
alloy not subject to stress cracking. Fuses shall be Class RK-l.
16015-1
I
I
I
I
I.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
D. Spare Fuses
At the time of final acceptance, the contractor shall furnish the owner's
representative, not less than three (3) spare fuses of each size and type
installed. Spare fuses at main switchgear are not required.
1.4
MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT:
A. Work under this section shall be paid for at the lump sum amount shown in
the bid schedule for electrical.
16015-2
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
SECTION 16020
RACEWAYS
1.1
SUBMITTALS:
A. Submit manufacturer's literature for each type of conduit or tubing and fittings
used in the project.
1.2
MANUF ACTURERS:
A. Acceptable manufacturers of rigid steel and electrical metallic tubing conduit
are:
1. Allied Tube and Conduit Co.
2. Wheatland Tube Co.
3. Triangle
4. L.T.V.
5. American Brass
6. E.T.P.
7. Robroy
B. Acceptable manufacturer's of polyvinyl chloride (PVC) conduit are:
1. Certainteed
2. Georgia Pipe
3. Carlon
4. Can-'Tex
5. Queen City
C. Acceptable manufacturer's of conduit fittings, bushings, and locknuts are:
1. O-Z/Gedney
2. Thomas and Belts
3. Raco
1.3
MATERIALS:
A. All metallic conduit and electric metallic tubing shall be steel, of standard pipe
dimensions, smooth inside and out, and shall be galvanized. Where the word
"conduit" is. used hereinafter it shall mean either rigid steel conduit, electric
metallic tubing, flexible steel conduit, liquid tight flexible steel conduit or
schedule 40 plastic conduit. Intermediate grade conduit is not acceptable:
16020-1
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
B.
C.
I
I
I
I
I
I
Galvanized rigid steel conduit shall be used in all areas where it will be
exposed to physical damage. Schedule 40 plastic conduit shall be used
underground and in slab-on-grade. In no case shall plastic conduit be
exposed; switch to rigid steel conduit when turning up exposed. All ot,her
conduit, unless otherwise specified or called for on the plans, may be
galvanized electric metallic tubing. Any exposed conduit on exterior of the
building shall be galvanized rigid steel.
Plastic conduit shall be made from virgin polyvinyl chloride C-300 compound.
Conduit and iittings shall carry a UL label. Fitting and cement shall be
produced by the same manufacturer as the conduit to assure system integrity.
D.
All conduit shall be concealed in building construction except as noted or
shown otherwise. In areas with no finished ceiling and where conduit is run
exposed an rims down to switches, receptacles, etc. shall when possible be.
concealed in wall. It is the intent of these specifications that all conduit will
be concealed whenever possible.
E.
EMT iittings shall be compression or and made of steel for sizes two inches
or smaller, steel set screw type fittings may be used on sizes 2 1/2" or larger.
Connectors and couplings shall be rain tight and shall have a nylon insulated
tlu.oat. All fittings shall be "UL" approved. Die cast, and indenter type fittings
are not acceptable. Fittings for flexible steel conduits and liquid tight flexible
conduit shall be steel' and have nylon insulated throat.
F.
Rigid steel conduit and EMT shall be not less than 1'2 inch trade size, schedule
40 plastic conduit shall not be less than 3/4" trade size and not less than
required by the NEC or indicated. Conduit runs with more than 5 # 12
conductors shall not be less than 3/4".
G.
Conduit and EMT systems indicated on the drawings for communication and
signaling systems are for typical systems. lnstall conduit and EMT systems
for the system being installed.
H.
Connect individual recessed lighting fixtures to the conduit or EMT system
with "maximum 6'-0" flexible, galvanized steel conduit. Use liquid-tight
flexible jacketed metal conduit for final connection to all rotating equipment
and transformers. The flexible conduits shall be long enough to permit the full
range of required movements without strain and to prevent the transmission
of vibration. Do not utilize flexible conduit to loop between fixtures and
devices.
1.
Galvanized rigid steel conduit couplings and connections:
16020-2
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
J.
1. Install standard, conduit-threaded fittings.
2. Ream the ends of conduits after cutting and threading them.
3. For connection to sheet metal boxes, cabinets and other sheet metal
enclosures, install locknuts on the inside and outside of the enclosure
for each connection. See Section 16110 of these specifications.
EMT couplings and connectors:
1. Ream the ends of EMT after cutting them.
2. Install the following threadless type fittings:
a. Connectors: steel compression type with insulated throat or
steel tap-on type with insulated throat.
b. COliplings: steel compression or tap-on type.
K.
Installation of plastic conduit:
1. Shall be installed in complete accordance with manufacturer's
recommendations.
2. Shall be a minimum 01'2'-0" below finished grade when not covered
by concrete.
3. Shall have properly sized bond wire installed with all circuits.
4. Bends and turns shall be kept to a bare minimum.
5. Ex.treme care shall be taken to avoid crushing or cracking conduit.
"DO NOT" run vehicles over exposed conduit under any conditions.
6. All conduit and fittings shall be solvent welded.
7. Plastic conduit maybe turned up in masonry walls only, and shall
extend no further up the wall than counter height.
8. Do not install conduit in slab. All conduit shall be installed a minimum
01'6'.' below slab. Conduits shall not be bunched together. Maintain I"
clearance between conduits.
9. Plastic conduit shall not be bent with a propane torch or open !lame.
Contractor shall utilize a heat gun, heat blanket, or hot box. Plastic
conduit bent with such shall not be scorched or marred.
L.
Insulated bushings:
I. Install nylon insulated bushings on the end of all rigid conduit.
2. The insulating material shall be designed for rugged, long service.
.3. Bushings which consist of only insulating material will not be
accepted.
4. Fittings which incorporate insulated bushings will be considered for
approval in lieu of fittings with separate bushings.
16020-3
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
M.
N.
I
I
I
I
I
I
All couplings and connections in location where water or other liquid or vapor
might contact the conduit and EMT shall also be watertight.
Close empty conduit and EMT as complete runs before pulling in the cables
and wires.
o.
Install exposed conduit and EMT parallel to or at right angles with the lines
of the building. Locate them so they will not obstruct headroom or walkways
or cause tripping.
P.
A void bends or offsets where practicable:
1. Do not install more bends, otlsets or equivalent in any conduit or
EMT run than permitted by the NEe.
2. Make bends with standard conduit bending machines.
3. Conduit hickeys may be used for making slight offsets and for
straightening conduits tubbed out of concrete.
4. Conduit or EMT bent with a pipe tee or vise will not be accepted.
5. Do rmt install crushed or deformed conduits or EMT.
Q.
Install conduit or EMT clamps:
1. At intervals as required by the NEe.
2. Above suspended ceilings, metal supports may be installed as
permitted by the NEC, except that conduit cannot be supported or
secured to the T -bar grid or from the wire supporting the T -bar grid.
3. Trapeze, split ring, band or clevis hanger may be installed as permitted
by the NEC. Trapeze hangers shall be structural metal channels, angle
irons or preformed metal channel shapes with the conduit and EMT
runs i held on specific center by U bolts, clips or clamps. Do not
support conduit from ceiling suspension wire or from other conduit.
4. Chain, wire or perforated strap supports will not be acceptable. Nor
are they acceptable as a means of securing the conduit.
5. Fasten the clamps and other supports as follows:
a. F or new masonry or concrete structures, install threaded metal
inserts prior to pouring the concrete.
b. For existing solid masonry or reinforced concrete structures:
1. Install expansion anchors and bolts or approved
power-set fasteners.
2. Expansion anchors and bolts shall be not less that 1/4
inch diameter and shall extend not less than 3 inches
16020-4
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
R.
S.
T.
u.
V.
into the concrete or masonry.
3. Power-set fasteners shall be not less than 1I4-inch
diameter and shall extend not less than 1-1/4-inch into
the concrete.
c. For hollow masonry install toggle bolts. Bolts supported only
by plaster will not be accepted.
d. For metal structures install machine screws.
e. Attachments to wood plug. raw I plug, soft l'netal insert or
wood blocking will not be permitted.
For vertical runs of conduit of EMT:
I. Install supports for conduit, EMT, cables and wires at intervals as
required by the NEC and as indicated on the drawings.
2. Conduit and EMT supports shall be supported by framing for the
floors.
Conduits and EMT shall be kept 6" away from parallel runs of steam or hot
water pipes.
Clogged raceways shall be entirely free of obstructions or shall be replaced.
Rigid steel conduit installed underground and in concrete shall be wrapped
with Scotclnvrap #50 corrosion protection tape.
All empty conduit shall have nylon pull cord installed to provide for
ii1stallation of cables, conductors or wiring.
w.
Do not combine conduit homeruns. Each homerun shall be separately routed
directly to panel unless specifically noted otherwise.
x.
Install service conduit (TV, electrical, and telephone) as follows:
1. All underground entrances shall have metallic sleeves through building
foundation walls and extend to undisturbed ground to avoid shear, and
shall be full weight, threaded hot-dipped galvanized rigid steel
conduit.
2. All 90 degree bends to be rigid metallic conduit, with a radius of not
less than 10 tii11es the diameter of the conduit.
3. Maintain a minimum cover of 24 inches below tinal grade for
conduits.
16020-5
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Y. Telephone conduits:
I. Where telephone conduit runs are longer than 100'-0" or have more
than two 900 bends (or equivalent) or have a reverse bend, pull boxes
shall be provided.
Z. Do not install conduit in cavity between concrete block and brick. Conduit
shall not be. stubbed up into this cavity or routed horizontally in cavity.
1.4
MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT:
A. Work under this section shall be paid for at the lump sum amount shown in
the bid schedule for electrical.
16020-6
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
SECTION 16030
CONDUCTORS
1.1
SUBMITTALS:
A. Shop drmvings shall be submitted and shall consist of manufacturer's published
literature.
1.2
MANUF ACTURERS:
A. Acceptable manufacturers are:
I. General 6. Cyprus Rome
2. Okonite 7. Essex,
.., Senator 8. Carol
-'.
4. Triangle 9. Southwire
5. Pirelli 10. American
B. All wiring shall be manufactured in the United States.
1.3
MA TERIALS:
A. Ratings and sizes:
1. Shall be not less than indicated on the drawings and not less than
required by the NEC.
2. Minimum size shall be No. 12 A WG copper provided the maximum
voltage drops in the control circuits \vill not adversely affect the
operation of the controls.
3. Conductor sizes indicated on the drawings are for copper conductors.
B. Conductors ,and ground wires:
I . Shall be copper.
2. Size No.8 A WG and larger shall be stranded.
3. Size No. 10 A WG and smaller shall be solid.
C. Conductor insulqtion:
1. Conductor insulation shall be the NEC type THHN. Under no
circumstances shall asbestos insulation be used.
D. Wire shall be factory color coded in size No. 10 and smaller. Color shall be by
16030-1
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
integral pigmentation with a separate color for each phase, neutral and
grounding conductor. Color code per phase shall be continuous throughout
the project.
E.
Manufacturer's name and other pertinent information shall be marked or
molded clearly on the overall jacket's outside surface or incorporated on
marker tapes within the cables and wires at reasonable intervals along the
cables and wires.
F.
Cables and \vires indicated on the drawings for communication and signaling
systems are for typical systems. Install cables and wires for the system being
installed.
G.
All wiring shall be in conduit unless specifically noted otherwise.
H.
Every coil of wire shall be in the original wrapping and shall bear the
Underwriters' Label of approval.
1.
Where wires are left for connection to any fixture or an apparatus, spare wire
or cables shall be provided at the ends for connections. Fixture connections
at the outlet box shall be made with insulated wire connectors.
.J.
Outer jackets shall be color coded as follows:
1. Three phase or single phase circuits, 120/208 volts:
a. Phase A - Black
b. Phase B - Red
c. Phase C - Blue
d. Neutral - White
e. Insulated ground wire - Green
2. Three phase or single phase circuits, 480/277 volts:
a. Phase A - Brown.
b. Phase B - Orange.
c. Phase'C - Yellow.
d. Neutral - Gray.
e. Insulated ground wire - Green.
3. Only for large power cables and wires which do not have color coded
jackets: No.8 and larger.
16030-2
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
a. Install bands of aqhesive non-fading colored tape or slip-on
bands of colored plastic tubing over the cables and wires at
their originating and terminations points and at all outlets of
junction boxes.
b. Color shall be permanent and shall withstand cleanings.
K. Wiring for signal circuits shall conform to the recommendations of
manufacturers of the signal system being installed so the system shall have
optimum performance and maximum service continuity. Communication and
signaling circuit wiring where run in conduit below grade or in a damp
location shall be listed for use in a damp or wet location. Communication and
signaling circuits run exposed above ceiling in an environmental air plenum
area shall be rated for plenum use.
L. No circuit \viring shall be smaller than number 12. Where the home run
exceeds 80',0" in length, number 10 (minimum) wire shall be used even
though all such circuits are not indicated on the plans. All wiring for
emergency branch circuits shall be number 10 (minimum) unless noted
otherwise.
M.. When installing THHN extra care must be exercised so as not to damage
nylon jacket. When nylon jacket is damaged wiring shall be removed from
service.
1.4
MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT:
A. Work under.this section shall be paid for at the lump sum amount shown in
the bid schedule for electrical.
16030-3
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
SECTION 16040
OUTLETS
1.1
SUBMITTALS:
A. Shop drawings shall be submitted and shall consist of manufacturer's published
literature.
1.2
MANUF ACTURERS:
A. Acceptable manufacturers are:
I. Raco
2. Steel City
3. Appleton
4. Hubbell
1.3
MATERIALS:
A. Boxes shall,be galvanized pressed sheet steel for all' concealed work.
B. Where conduit runs are exposed, outlet shall be of the cast metal type.
C. For concealed work each box shall be provided with a square cornered plaster
nng.
D. Each surface lighting fixture, receptacle and switch shall be provided with
flush mounted outlet box. All outlets installed in panels and other
architectural features shall be centered. The location of any outlet may be
moved as much as 10'-0" by the Architect before the outlet is placed without
incurring any extra cost. All dimensions refer to the finished floor line, Outlet
boxes shall, be pressed sheet steel and shall be galvanized for all concealed
work. Where conduit runs are exposed outlets shall be of the cast metal type.
E. Boxes shall be for the service and the type of outlet and shall not be less than
4" square and 1-112" deep except where otherwise specified. Boxes installed
in walls shall be provided with a square cornered 1-112" plaster ring installed
flush with surface of wall. Coordinate depth of plaster ring required for
particular wall construction. Each outlet box above ceiling shall be supported
from a structural member of the building either directly or by using a
substantial and approved metal support. Conduit is not an approved means of
support. Boxes installed in wall shall be supported either directly to a stud or
between studs utilizing an approved bar hanger. In no case shall switch box
16040-1
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
support and clips used for mounting boxes in old work be used unless
specifically ,called for. Top of outlet box shall be level.
F. All ceiling or wall recessed outlet boxes or their associated plaster rings shall
be flush wiql the finished surface. Using coverplate to secure wiring devices
or shimming the device is not acceptable. Contractor shall exercise due care
when cutting opening in walls or ceilings for outlet boxes so that opening size
will permit ;the proper installation of boxes and devices. Fixture studs in
ceilings and bracket outlets shall be bolted with stove bolts or shall be locking
type of stud mounting.
G. In addition to boxes indicated, install enough boxes to prevent damage to
cables and wires during pulling-in operations.
H. Remove onJ:y knockouts as required and plug unused openings. Use threaded
plugs for cast metal boxes and snap-in metal covers for sheet metal boxes.
I. "There shall be no outlets installed back to back. A minimum of 4" shall
separate each olitlet."
J. Where the volume allowed per conductor exceeds that allowed in Table
3 70-6(b) of the NEC for the minimum size outlet specified, a larger size outlet
box shall be used and shall be sized in accordance with the table noted above.
K. Outlet boxes shall be clean and free from dust, paint, dirt, plaster ready mix
joint compound and/or any other debris.
1.4
MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT:.
A. Work under this section shall be paid for at the lump sum amount shown in
the bid schedule for electrical.
16040-2
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
.-
II
SECTION 16050
WIRING DEVICES AND DEVICE PLATE
1.1
SUBMlTT ALS:
A. Submit product data under provisions of Section 16000. GENERAL.
B. Provide product data showing configurations, finishes, dimensions, and
manufacturer's instructions.
1.2
REFERENCES:
A. FS W-C-596 - Electrical Power Connector, Plug, Receptacle, and Cable
Outlet.
B. FS W-S-896 - Switch, Toggle.
C. NEMA WD 1 - General-Purpose Wiring Devices.
D. NEMA WD 5 - Specific-Purpose Wiring Devices.
1.3
MANUF ACTURERS:
A. For the purpose of. selecting quality and type of device, equipment
manufactured by Arrow Hart has been specified. The following
manufacturers meeting this specification are acceptable:
1. Bryant
2. Pass and Seymour
3. Hubbell
4. G.E.
5. Leviton
1.4
PRODUCTS:
A. Switches: All wall switches shall be rated 20 ampere, 120/277 volts, have self
grounding provisions, side wiring only and shall be of the silent type. Color
shall be gray.
1. Single pole: Arrow Hart 1221.
2. Double pole single throw: Arrow Hart 1222.
16050-1
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
3. Three way: Arrow Hart 1223.
4. Four way: Arrow Hart 1994.
5. Key switch single pole and three-way: Arrow-Hart 1191 and 1193
with 1187 cover plate, or Pass and Seymour equal. Three way and
four way key switches shall be keyed alike.
6. . Single pole lighted handle (lit in "on" position": Arrow Hart 1991
ILC..
7. Despard single pole switches installed in mullions. Arrow Hart
QS791.
B. Receptacle: All receptacles shall be of the grounding type, of the
configuration shown on the drawings and shall be flush wall mounting type.
Color shall be gray.
1. Standard duplex receptacle: 20 ampere, 125 volt, NEMA type 5-20
R, 2 pole, 3 wire, straight blade, U-grounding slot, specification
grade. Arrow Hart 5342.
2. Ground fault interrupter receptacle: 20 ampere, 125 volts, NEMA
type 5-20R, 2-pole, 3-wire with grounded U slot. Arrow Hart AHGF
5342.
C. Device plates: Plates shall be furnished for all devices and outlets indicated
on the drawings (telephone, computer, TV, etc.). All plates on masonry walls
shall be ovel;sized jumbo type.
1. Flush mounted plates: Beveled type with smooth rolled outer edge,
stainless steel type 302 with brushed finish.
2. Surface box plates, beveled, galvanized steel, pressure formed for
smooth edge to fit box.
3. Weatherproof plates: Intermatic #WP 1000, vertical mounting.
1.5
INSTALLATION:
A. Switches:
1. Switches shall be connected to the live side of the circuit and shall
control only the outlets indicated.
2. Conductors shall be looped around the terminal screw.
16050-2
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
.,
3. Where more than one switch is indicated in the same location switches
shall be gang mounted under a common plate.
4. Where multi-wire, 277 volt switching (480 volt potential) occurs, a
barrier shall be provided between switches.
5. Center line of switches in general. shall be set 3'-6" above the 11001'
(off position down) and shall clear the door trim or corner by 4" or
center the space occupied.
6. Architectural plans shall be consulted before placing switches so they
will in every case be located on the strike side of the door and clear
door, chair, window, and baseboard moldings.
7. Switches shall be screwed tight to the boxes and shall not depend on
the cover plate to pull them tight.
B.
Receptacles:
1. Conductors shall be looped around the terminal screws, "DO NOT
BACK WIRE DEVICES."
2. Receptacles shall be grounded by the green wire bond and shall be
pigtailed as shown on the drawings.
3. Receptacles shall be screwed tight to the plaster ring or outlet box and
shall.not depend on the device plate to pull them tight.
4. Center line of general use receptacles shall be in general, set 18" above
the floor with receptacle mounted in the vertical position and with
groUl~ding pole at the top.
5. Coordinate receptacle height with Architectural drawings and locate
so that bottom of receptacle plate shall be 1" above counter or back
splash and clear all moldings.
6. Center line of receptacles located adjacent to lavatories in toilets shall
be set 3'-6" above floor.
7. Receptacles serving water coolers shall be located within cooler
housing oras close to bottom of housing as possible. Cord serving
unit shall be as short as possible. In no case shall cord or receptacle
be seen from normal viewing angle.
16050-3
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
8. All receptacles installed in bathrooms, toilets, within 4 feet of
lavatories or sinks or on building exterior shall be ground fault circuit
interrupter type.
C. Plates:
1. Plates shall be level and all edges shall be in full contact with wall.
2. Plates shall be furnished for all devices and other outlets indicated on
the drawings.
3. I nstall plates on outlet boxes andj ullction boxes in unfinished areas
above ceiljngs and on surf-ace mounted outlets.
4. Plates shall not be used to keep devices secure.
5. Plates shall be clean and free from dust, plaster or paint and spots.
6. Plate shall cover openings around outlets.
1.6
MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT:
A. Work under this section shall be paid for at the lump sum amount shown in
the bid schedule for electrical.
16050-4
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
SECTION 16060
LIGHTING FIXTURES AND LAMPS
1.1
SUBMITTALS:
A. Lighting fixture submittals shall consist of manufacturer's literature including
photometric data and shall note on the submittals any special requirements
which have been specified.
B. The Architect reserves the right to require sample fixtures for approval.
C. "Manufacturer's literature for all lamps."
1.2
MANUF ACTURERS:
A. Lighting fix,tures shall be selected from those fixtures included in the fixture
schedule as noted on the drawings or in the specifications.
B. Lamps:
1. Sylvania
2. Phillips
3. General Electric
4. E.YE.
1.3
EQUIPMENT:
A. Review architectural plans and specifications and provide lighting fixtures
compatible with ceiling suspension system specified.
B. Fixtures shall be selected from the fixture schedule not only by catalog number
. but with consideration to mounting, number and types oflamps, and reference
notes as contained in the fixture schedule and as noted on the drawings and
in the specifications.
C. Fluorescent ballast shall be electronic type as manufactured by Motorola,
Advance, General Electric or Magnetek. Ballast shall have five year warranty,
total harmonic distortion of less than 20%. Where fixtures are shown with
inboard/outbom'd lamps switched separately provide two (2) ballast per
tlxture. Ballast shall be instant start and parallel lamp operation.
16060- \
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
D.
I
I
I
I
I
I
Support oflighting fixtures shall be the responsibility of the fixture installer
and shall beas follows:
1. Fluorescent fixture flush mounted in exposed tee, suspended
acoustical tile ceilings shall be of the lay-in type and shall be SUPPo11ed
at diagonal corners of the fixture, utilizing two (2) # 14 gauge steel
wires attached to the bar joist or overhead structure. Flexible conduit
and wiring from outlet box to fixture shall be 1/2"e., and number 12
THHN conductors, factory supplied whips of smaller ratings are not
acceptable.
2. Surface mounted fluorescent fixtures shall be supported by light
weight channel attached by nylon' tie straps to two members of the
ceiling suspension system. Two support channels are required.
Surface mounted fixtures mounted on sheet rock or plaster cei I ings or
low density acoustical tile ceilings shall be mounted with two 1/4" x
1/4" x 4" metal spacers between fixture and ceiling. Spacers shall be
located to provide air gap between fixture and ceiling. Do not place
spacers directly over ballast.
E.
Align, mount and level the lighting fixtures uniformly.
F.
Avoid interference with and provide clearance for equipment.
G.
Lighting fixtures shall be located as shown on the lighting plan. ]f for any
reason this is impossible or impractical, the Architect shall be notified
immediately for a decision as to the best direction for the shift.
H.
Upon compl~tion of installation, lighting fixtures and equipment shall be in
first class operating order, in perfect condition as to finish, fre,e from defects.
At final inspection, fixtures shall be completely lamped, be complete with
required diffusers, reflectors, side panels, louvers or the other components
necessary to complete fixtures. All fixtures and equipment shall be clean and
free from dust, insects, plaster or paint spots. Any reflectors, diffusers, side
panels or other parts broken prior to tinal inspection shall be replaced by
contractor.
I.
Lamps shall be provided for all fixtures:
1. Incandescent lamps shall be medi um base, inside frost extended
service (minimum 2500 hours).
2. 48" fluorescent lamps shall be 32 watt T8 35000 K.
3. Metal halide lamps shall be mogul base, of the wattage called for in
the fixture schedule and shall be of the coated type.
16060-2
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
.1
I
I
1.4
MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT:
A. Work under this section shall be paid for at the lump sum amount shown in
the bid schedule for electrical.
16060-3
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
SECTION 16070
DISCONNECT SWITCHES
1.1
SUBMITTALS:
A. Shop drawings shall be submitted and shall consist of manufacturer's published
literature.
1.2
MANUF ACTURERS:
A. Acceptable manufacturers are:
1. Square "D" Company
2. G. E.
3. J.T.E.
4. Cutler Hammer
1.3
EQUIPMENT:
A. Disconnect switches shall be provided for all motors and strip heaters located
out of sight' of motor controller, and where specifically indicated on the
drawings. Disconnect switches shall disconnect all ungrounded conductors.
When exposed to weather, enclosure shall be NEMA - 3R. Switches shall be
installed to be fully accessible in accordance with Article 110-16 of the
National Electrical Code.
B. All disconnects shall be heavy duty type and shall be equi pped with neutral bar
bonded to the can for grounding purposes. Disconnect shall be provided with
rejection clips for Class RK-1 fuses.
C. For single phase motors, a single - or double-pole toggle switch, rated only
for alternating current, will be acceptable for capacities less than 30 amperes,
provided the ampere fating of the switch is at least 125 percent of the motor
rating. Enclosed safety switches shall be horsepower rated in conformance
with Table III of Fed. Spec. W-D-865. Switches shall disconnect all
ungrounded ,conductors.
D. Each disconnect ground mounted serving exterior A/C units shall be equipped
with a padlock (Master 3206) all keyed alike.
E. All disconnects shall be equipped with provisions to lock the handle in the
OFF position.
16070-1
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
F. All disconnects serving heat pumps, A/C units and refrigeration compressors
shall be fused in accordance with the name plate data on the unit.
G. Install fuses so that ampere rating can be read without having to remove
fuses.
H. All fuses shall be as noted in Section 16015.
I. Disconnects shall be identified as required under Section 16120.
.I. Maintain 3'':0" clearance in front of disconnect having voltage rating of250
volts and 4'-0" clearance in front of disconnect having voltage rating of 480
volts. Do not locate disconnect over other electrical equipment (i.e.:
trai1sformers ).
1.4
MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT:
A. Work under this section shall be paid for at the lump sum amount shown in
the bid schedule for electrical.
16070-2
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
SECTION 16080
DRY TYPE TRANSFORMERS
1.1
SUBMITTALS
A. Shop drawings shall be submitted and shall include as a m1l11mUm the
following iliformation:
1. Ratings, voltage and KV A
.2. SOUli.d rating
3. Taps
4. Temperature rise
5. Overload capacity and efficiency at 25%, 50% and 100% load.
6. Physical dimensions and new weight.
1.2
MANUF ACTURERS:
A. Acceptable manufacturers are:
1. General Electric Company
2. Square "D" Company
3. Sien:}ens
4. Cutler Hammer
1.3
EQUIPMENT:
A. Dry type transformers shall be provided where shown to provide 3 phase, 4
wire, 120/208 volt grounded wye service to specific panel boards. Primary
rating shall be 480 volts. KV A ratings shall be as shown on the drawings.
B. Transformer shall be provided with six 2-1/2% full capacity taps, two above
and tvvo below unless only four 2-1/2% taps, two above and four below are
standard NEMA taps for the specific KV A rating. Sound rating shall not
exceed 50 db for those specified above 75 KV A. Temperature rise shall not
exceed 115 degrees C. under full load in an ambient of 40 degrees C.
Overload capacity shall not be less than 10% at rated voltage. Minimum
B.LL. shall belO KV. Vibration dampers shall be provided as a standard
feature on all trari.sformers.
C. Primary and,secondary connections to dry type transformers shall be made
with flexible liquid tight conduit.
D. Transformers shall be located a minimum of 6" from wall.
16080-1
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
1.4
MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT:
A Work under;this section shall be paid for at the lump sum amount shown in
the bid schedule for electrical.
16080-2
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
SECTION 16090
PHOTO CONTROL AND CONTACTOR
1.1
SUBMITT ALS:
A. Submittal shall be manufacturers published literature.
1.2
MANUF ACTURERS:
A. Photo Controls:
1. Tork
2. Paragon
3. General Electric Company
4. Siemens
5. lntel,matic
B. Contactors:
1. Square "D" Company
2. . Cutler-Hammer
3. ASCO
4. G. E'.
5. lntdmatic
1.3
EQUIPMENT:
A. Photo control shall be rated at 1800 V.A., 90% power factor on 120 volt
system. Switching mechanism shall be hermetically sealed and shall be
calibrated to close circuit when illumination falls below five foot candles.
Switching mechanismshall contain delay feature to prevent circuit opening in
transient. illuminatio'n such as headlights from passing vehicles. (Photo
Control shall contain manually adjustable light level slide.) Orient photo
control light sensing element north.
B. Contactor shall be electrically held, 120 volt operating coil and in NEMA 1
enclosure. The number and rating of poles shall be as noted on the drawings.
C. Time clock shall be 24 hour type with astro dial and general purpose indoor
or outdoor case.
16090-1
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
1.4
MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT:
A. Work under this section shall be paid for at the lump sum amount shown in
the bid schedule for electrical.
16090-2
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
SECTION 16100
PULL BOXES AND JUNCTION BOXES AND FITTINGS
1.1
PULL BOXES AND JUNCTION BOXES AND FITTINGS
A. Boxes shall be provided in the raceway systems wherever required for the
pulling of wires and the making of connections.
B. Pull boxes of not less than the minimum size required by the National
Electrical Code Article 370 shall be constructed of code-gauge gal vanized
sheet steel. Boxes shall be furnished with screw-fastened covers. Covers on
flush wall mounted boxes in well appointed areas (offices, reception,
classrooms, media center, etc) shall be minimum 1/16 302 stainless steel.
Boxes located on the exterior of the building shall be watertight. Covers shall
be secured with tamper proof screws.
C. Boxes shall be securely and rigidly fastened to the surface of which they are
mounted or shall be supported from structural member of the building either
directly or by using a substantial and approved ni.etal rod or brace.
D. All boxes shall be so installed that the wiring contained in them can be
rendered accessible without removing part of the building.
E. Where several circuits pass through a common pull box, the circuits shall be
tagged to indicate clearly their electrical characteristics, circuit number and
designation.
1.2
MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT:
A. Work under this section shall be paid for at the lump sum amount shown in
the bid schedule for electrical.
1 G 1 00-1
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
SECTION 16110
GROUNDING
'PART 1 GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS:
A. Drawings arid general provisions ofthe Contract documents including General
and Suppleri.1entary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply
to the Section.
1.2
SUMMARY:
A. The work required under this section of the specifications consists of
furnishing, installation and connections of the building secondary grounding
systems. Exterior branch circuit wiring and feeder conductors extended
beyond the building are included. The building electrical system shall be a 3
phase, 4 wire grounded wye delta system supplemented with equipment
grounding system. Equipment grounding system shall be established with
equipment grounding conductors; the use of metallic raceways for equipment
grounding is not acceptable.
1.3
QUALITY ASSURANCE:
A. Industry Referenced Standards: The following specifications and standards
are incorporated into and become a part ofthis Specification by Reference.
1. Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc. (UL) Publications:
No.44 Rubber-Insulated Wire & Cables
No.83 Thermoplastic-Insulated Wires
No.467 Electrical Grounding & Bonding Equipment
No.493 Thermoplastic-Insulated' Underground Feeder &
Branch Circuit Cables
No.486 Wire Connectors and Soldering Lugs
2. National Electrical Manufacturers' Standards (NEMA):
WC-5
WC-7
Thermoplastic Insulated Wire & Cable
Cross-Linked- Thermosetting Polyethylene Insulated
Wire
161 1 0-1
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
3. National Fire Protection Association Publication (NFP A):
No.70 National Electrical Code (NEe)
B. Acceptable Manufacturers: Products produced by the following manufacturer
which conform to this specification are acceptable.
1. Hydraulically applied conductor terminations:
a. Square D
b. Burndy
c. Ilsco
d. Scotch (3M)
e. Thomas and Betts (T&B)
f. Anderson
2. Mechanically applied (crimp) conductor terminations:
a. Scotch (3M)
b. IdeaJ
c. Thomas and Betts (T &8)
d. Burndy
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
GENERAL MATERIALS REQUIREMENTS:
A. Provide all materials under this section of the specifications. All materials
shall be new.
B. All materials shall be UL listed and bear a UL label.
C. Refer to the specific specification section for the description and requirements
of materials mentioned herein for installation.
2.2
GROUNDING CONDUCTORS:
A. Grounding electrode conductor shall be bare or green insulated copper
conductor sized as indicated on the drawings.
B. Equipment grounding conductors shall be green insulated type THHW,
XHHW conductors sized as indicated on the drawings. Where size is not
indicated on the drawings, conductor size shall be determined from the
16110-2
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
National Electrical Code table of sizes of equipment grounding conductors.
C. Bondingjumpers shall be flexible copper bondingjumpers sized in accordance
with the National Electrical Code table on sizes of equipment grounding
electrode conductors.
') ..,
-.-'
TRANSFORMERS & MOTOR CONTROLLERS:
A. Provide a conductor termination grounding lug bonded to the enclosure of
each transformer and motor controller.
B. Provide a neutral bar with bonding screw in each disconnect for grounding
purposes.
2.4
DEVICES:
A. Each receptacle and switch device shall be furnished with a grounding screw
connected to the metallic device frame. Bond equipment grounding
conductor to each outlet box. For isolated ground receptacles. bond
equipment grounding conductor to box, and isolated ground conductor to
device grounding screw.
2.5
GROUND RODS:
A. Ground rods shall be 3/4" x 10'-0" copper clad steel.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION:
A. Ground all non-current carrying parts of the electrical system, i.e., wireways,
equipment enclosures and frames, junction and outlet boxes, machine frames
and other conductive items in close proximity with electrical circuits, to
provide a low impedance path for potential grounded faults.
B. Service entrance and separately derived electrical systems, grounding
electrode system.
1. The nelltral conductor of the electrical service serving the premises
wiring system shall be grounded to the ground bus bar in the service
equipment which shall be grounded to the cold water system, the
ground rod sy"stem, and other grounding electrodes specified herein or
indicated on the drawings. Grounding electrode conductors shall be
16110-3
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I"
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
installed in rigid, non-metallic conduit to point of ground connection,
unless subject to physical damage in which case they shall be installed
in galvanized rigid steel. Where metallic conduit is permitted, bond
conduit at both ends to grounding electrode conductor with a UL
bonding bushing.
2. Make connection to main water line entering the building. IVlake
connections ahead of any valve or fittings whose removal may
interrupt ground continuity. Install a bondingjumper of the same size
as the grounding conductor around the water meter.
3. Bond together the following systems to form the grounding electrode
system. All system connections shall be made as close as possible to
the service eritrance equipment and each connected at the service
entrance equipment ground bus. Do not connect electrode systems
together except at ground bus.
a. Cold water piping system
b. Ground rod system
c. Structural steel metal building frame, see detail on drawings.
d. Main re-bar in a foundation footing, for a concrete structure
4. Ground the neutral of all dry type transformers as indicated on the
draWings.
5. Grounding electrode connections to structural steel, reinforcing bars,
ground rods, or where indicated on the drawings shall be with
chemical exothermic weld connection devices recommended for the
particular connection type. Connections to piping shall be with UL
listed mechanical ground clamps.
6. Bonding shall be in accordance with the National Electrical Code.
7. Install ground rods where indicated on the drawings with the top of
the ground rods 12" below finished grade.
c.
Equipment Grounding Conductor
1. Grounding conductors shall be provided in all branch circuit raceways
and cables. Grounding conductors shall be the same A WG size as
branch circuit conductors.
2. Grounding conductors for feeders are typically indicated on the
16110-4
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
'I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
drawings and the raceway is sized to accommodate grounding
conductor shown. Where grounding conductor size is not indicated
on the drawings, conductor shall be in accordance with the equipment
grounding conductor table of the National Electrical Code.
3. A gl'ounding conductor shall be installed in all nexible conduit
installations. For branch circuits, grounding conductor shall be sized
to match branch circuit conductors.
4. A feeder serving several panel boards shall have a continuous
grounding conductor which shall be connected to each related cabinet,
grounding bar.
5. The equipment grounding conductor shall be attached to equipment
with bolt or sheet metal screw used for no other purpose. Where
grounding conductor is stranded, attachment shall be made \vith lug
attached to grounding conductor with crimping tools.
6. Ground all motors by drilling and tapping the bottom of the motor
junction- box with a round head bolt used for no other purpose.
Conductor attachment shall be through the use of a lug attached to
conductor with a crimping tool.
7. Equipinent grounding conductors shall terminate on panel board,
switchboard, or motor control center grounding bus only. Do not
terminate on neutral bus. Provide a single terminals lug for each
conductor. Conductor shall terminate the same section as the phase
conductors originate. Do not termiriate neutral conductors on the
ground bus.
C.
Other Grounding Requirements
1. Each telephone backboard shall be provided with a No.6 grounding
conductor. When backboard is located in vicinity of electrical service
equipment, the "point of grounding" of this conductor shall be the
main cold water service with connections made ahead of any valves or
joints. Remote backboards shall use building steel as "point of
grounding". Terminate conductor by stapling to backboard.
2. At each building expansionjoint flexible copper bondingjumpers shall
be att~ched to building stnlcture by exothermic weld process. Install
bonding jumpers in concealed locations that will not subject
connections or jumpers to physical abuse. Install 100' on centers
across expansion joints.
16110-5
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
3. Lighting fixtures shall be grounded with a green insulated ground wire
secured to the fixture with a UL listed bond lug, screw, or clip
specifically made for such use.
3.2
TESTING:
A. Upon completion of the ground rod installation, grounding resistance reading
shall be taken before connection is made to the building cold water piping
system. Gro~ll1d resistance readings shall not be taken within forty-eight hours
of rainfall. Results of ground resistance readings shall be forwarded, in
writing, immediately to the Architect and Owner.
,.., ,..,
_L-'
MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT:
A. Work under,this ~ection shall be paid for at the lump sum amount shown in
the bid schedule for electrical.
16110-6
,
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
SECTION 16120
EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICA nON
1.1
SUBMITTALS:
A. Submit sample of laminated plastic identification plate with lettering.
1.2
MATERIALS:
A. Laminated plastic plates with 3/16" high white letter etched on black
background.
B. Plates shall be permanently mounted utilizing pop rivets or a permanent
mastic/epoxy.
C. Painted, stenciled or indented tape identification is not acceptable.
1.3
ITEM IDENTIFICA nON:
A. All electrical'apparatus such as wiring troughs, panel boards, individual circuit
breakers, transformers and disconnect switches shall have laminated plastic
identification plates. Identification shall match label ing shown on plans.
B. A "steel" circuit directory frame permanently attached at factory (not glued),
and a directory card with a plastic covering shall be provided on the inside of
each panel door. The directory shall be typed to identify the load fed by each
circuit and the areas served. Spaces or room numbers shown on the drawings
are not necessarily the final numbers to be assigned to these areas. The
Contractors shall before completion of the project obtain from the Architect
final space or room numbers so that it can be typed onto directory.
C. Circuit breakers and disconnects shall identify the equipment served and
circuit and panel from which it is served.
D. On all panel boards the exterior identification plate shall match that 011 the
drawings and the panel and circuit number serving the panel shall be
designated w!thin the panel.
1.4
MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT:
A. Work under this section shall be paid for at the lump sum amount shown in
the bid schedule for electrical.
16120-1
,I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
.1
SECTION 16130
TELEPHONE CONDUIT AND OUTLET SYSTEM
1.01
SYSTEM
A. Telephone O,utlets not cabled shall be installed using matching blank device
plates.
B. Each telephone outlet (unless noted otherwise), shall have 3/4" conduit,
extending from the outlet box to the telephone backboard.
C. The telephone backboard shall consist of One - 3/4" x 4' x 8' plywood. Paint
all sides and edges to match room finish.
D. Install a #6 ground conductor from board to nearest ground bar in panel,
provide 8'-0" of coiled slack at board.
E. Install a quaduplex receptacle at the board and serve with a dedicated 20
ampere 120 volt circuit.
F. See site plan for routing of service conduit. Prior to routing of conduit,
coordinate an on-site meeting with local utility company to determine exact
location.
G. Conduit and ;its installation shall be as covered under Section 16020 of these
specification.
H. Outlets and their installation shall be covered under Section 16040 of these
specifications.
I. Provide type 302 jumbo stainless steel blank wall plates for all outlets not
cabled.
1.02
MEASUREMENT ANDPA YMENT:
A. Work under this section shall be paid for at the lump slim amount shown in
the bid schedule for electrical.
16] 30-1
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
SECTION 16160
TRANSIENT VOLTAGE SURGE SUPPRESSORS
FOR
MAIN SERVICES AND DISTRIBUTION PANELS
1.1
SUBMITTALS:
A. Electrical and mechanical drawings for the TVSS shall be providecl by the
manufacturer which show unit dimensions, weights, mounting provisions,
connection details and layout diagram of the unit.
B. The manufacturer shall furnish an equipment manual with installation,
operation, and maintenance instructions for the specified unit.
C. Documentation of unit's UL .1449 suppression rating shall be included as
required product data submittal information.
D. The contractor shall provide detai led compl iance exception statements to all
provisions of this specification ten (10) days prior to the bid date.
1.2
MANUF ACTURERS:
A. For the purpose of selecting quality and type of TVSS units, equipment as
manufactured by Current Technology Inc. has been specified. The following
manufacturers meeting these specifications are acceptable.
1. Libert
2. Northern Tecl-i11010gies
I
I
I
I
I
I
B.
The manufacturer shall provide a Limited Five-Year Warranty, from the date
of installation, against failure when installed in compliance with applicable
national/local electrical codes and the manufacturer's recommended
installation, operation and maintenance instructions.
1.3
GENERAL:
A.
These specifications describe the electrical and mechanical requirements for
a high-energy suppression filter system utilizing transient voltage sllrge
suppression (TVSS) for application in Category C (Main Service Entrance)
161 60- I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
B.
c.
and Category B (Distribution Panels) areas as defined by the IEEE C62.41
standard.
The specified unit shall provide effective high energy transient voltage
clamping and surge current diversion for all electrical modes of equipment
connected downstream from the facility's main distribution panel or main over
current device. The unit shall be designed for parallel connection to the
facility's wiring system.
All Categol)' B (distribution panels) shall include a high frequency atlenvation
filter for all modes of protection the TVSS is providing.
D.
The unit shall include, but not be limited to, an engineered solid-state
high-perfonnance suppression system, utilizing Selenium Cells and/or arrays
of fused non-linear voltage dependent Metal Oxide Varistors (MOV).
E.
The suppression system shall not utilize gas tubes, spark gaps, or any other
components which might short or crowbar the line, thus leading to
interruption of normal power to connected loads. The suppression system
shall not iricorporate non-field replaceable fusing, circuit boards, plug-in or
quick-connect connectIons as part of any surge current carrying path.
F.
All internal wiring associated with the suppression filter system and subject to
surge currents shall utilize low-impedance copper bus bar and/or copper
conductor or equal. All internal connections associated \vith the
suppression/filter system and which are subject to surge currents shall be made
with compression type solder less lugs and shall be bolted in place.
G.
The unit shall be connected to the panel or switch gear by means of a circuit
breaker as specified on the drawings or as recommended by the manufacturer.
An integral fused disconnect shall not be furnished with the unit unless
otherwise specified.
H.
Units shall be provided in a NEMA 1 type enclosure constructed of minimum
14 gauge steel, painted inside and out with rust inhibiting paint. Surface or
flush mount enclosures are specified on the drawings.
1.
The unit shall be installed as close as practical to the wiring system in
accordance with applicable national/local. electrical codes and the
manufacturer's recommended installation instructions. Maximum 6'
connections shall be made with copper conductor and shall not be any longer
than is reasonably necessary, avoiding unnecessary bends. When possible,
current carrying conductors between the panelboard and the suppression unit
shall be twisted together.
16]60-2
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
J. The unit shall include mechanical lugs for each phase, neutral and ground,
where applicable. The lugs shall accommodate up to a I/O A WG copper
conductor.
K. The unit shall include externally mounted visual indicators that monitor the
on-line status of each phase of the unit (L.E.D.s, neon lamps, etc.).
L. The unit shall include Form C dry contacts (N.O. or N.C.) to f~lcilitate
connection to a building management system in order to monitor the on-line
status of the unit. The contacts shall be combination normally open, normally
closed and shall operate upon failure of the suppression system. Also include
a display event counter.
M. The unit shall include the manufacturer's nameplate and UL inspection labels
on interior Qf cabinet:
1.4
ST ANDARDS:
A. The specified unit shall be designed, manufactured and tested in compliance
with the following standards:
I. American National Standards Institute and Institute of Electrical and
Electronic Engineers (ANSIIIEEE C62.41-1991 and C62.45-1987).
2. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA).
3. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA 70 [NEe], 75, and 78).
4. Underwriters Laboratories (UL 1449 and 1283).
B. The maximum continuous operating vol tage (M CO V) or threshold vo I tage of
all suppression components utilized in the unit shall not be less thaI1125% of
the facility's nominal operating voltage for 120 volt systems and not less than
115% of the facility's nominal operating voltage for 208, 277, and 480 volts.
C. Based on ANSI/IEEE C62.41-1991's standard 8/20 microsecond current
waveform, and in accordance with NEMA Publication No. LS 1-1992, the
tested single-pulse surge current capacity, in amps, of the unit shall be no less
than the following:
MODE OF PROTECTION
L-N L-G N-G
Main Service Panel:
Total Capacity per Phase =
150,000 150,000 150,000
300,000
16160-3
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
D. The unit shall beUL 1449 Listed as a Transient Voltage Surge Suppressor.
E. The unit shall be factory tested following IEEE C62.41 and C62.45 guidelines
without failing or degrading the UL 1449 Surge Suppression Rating by more
than 10%. .
F. In accordance with NEMA Standard LS 1-1992, the suppression unit shall
provide protection modes as follows:
1.
Five (5) modes of protection for a single phase
configuration:
. Line-to-Neutral (2)
. Line-to-ground (2)
. Neutral-to-ground (1)
2. Seven (7) modes of protection for a three phase wye configuration:
. Line-to-Neutral (3)
. Line-to-Ground (3)
. Neutral-to-Ground (1)
G. The environmental operating parameters for the unit shall meet or exceed the
following conditions:
1. Operating temperature range shall be -40 to +60 C (-40 to + ] 40 F).
2. Operation shall be reliable in an environment with 5% to 95%
non-condensing relative humidity.
3. The unit s11all 110t generate 110ise levels in excess of lOdB, "A"
weighted.
4. No appreciable magnetic fields shall be generated. Unit shall be
capable of use directly in computer rooms in any location without
danger to data storage systems or devices.
H. For purposes of quality assurance, the unit shall be "burned-in" at the factory,
applying nominal voltages for which a particular unit is designed.
I. A list of customer-replaceable spare parts where applicable shall be included.
in the unit's documentation set.
1.5
MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT
A. Work under:this section shall be paid for at the lump. sum amount shown in
the bid schedule for electrical.
16160-4
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
1.1
1.2
1.3
A.
A.
'A.
1.4
1.5
SECTION 16190
ENGINE GENERATOR SET
GENERAL:
Requirements contained in this Specification shall apply to and govern the work under
this Section.
WORK INCLUDED:
Provide labor and material necessary to install a standby diesel engine-generator set
of the latest commercial type and design as specified herein.
SUBMITTALS:
The Contractor shall furnish information showing manufacturers' model number,
dimensions, and weights for the engine, generator, and major auxiliary equipment.
MANUFACTURERS:
A.
The following manufacturers meeting these specifications are acceptable:
1 . Onan
2. Caterpillar,
3. Detroit Diesel
4. Kohler
5. Generac
SUBSTITUTIONS:
A.
Proposed deviations from the specifications shall be treated as follows:
1. Request for substitutions shall be made a minimum often (10) days prior to
bid date. Manufacturers catalog data shall accompany each request and
authorized'acceptance shall be by addenda only.
2. Under no circumstances will assemblers of units be acceptable. To qualify as ,
a manufacturer, the engine or alternator must be the item manufactured and
the completed engine generator set supplied by that manufacturer's authorized
dealer only.
3. The Contractor shall submit copies of pertinent drawings and schematic
diagrams for approval and shall include the following:
16190-1
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
1.6
I A.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
a. Engine generator set including plans and elevations or riser views
clearly indicating entrance points for each of the interconnections
required.
b. Engine generator/exciter control cubicle.
c. Fuel consumption rate curves at various loads, ventilation and
combustion CFM requirements.
d. Exhaust muft1ers and vibration isolators.
e. Battery Charger, battery, and battery racks.
f. AcWal electrical diagrams including schematic diagrams and
interconnection wiring diagrams for all equipment to be provided.
g. Legends for all devices on all diagrams.
h. Sequence of operation explanations for all portions of all schematic
wiring diagrams.
1. Trai'ler platform mounted.
J. 25' flexible power cord, receptacle and matching plug fully rated at
genset ampere rating.
4. The specified standby KW shall be for continuous electrical service during
interruption of the normal utility source and shall be certitied to this effect by
the manut:'1cturer for the actual unit supplied.
5. These ratings must be substantiated by manufacturer's standard published
curves. Special ratings or maximum ratings are not acceptable.
MATERIALS:
Engine: The engine shall be 1800 RPM, water-cooled in line or Vee type tour-stroke
cycle compression ignition diesel. It shall meet specifications when operating on
Number 2 domestic burner oil. Engines requiring premium fuels will not be
considered. The engine shall be equipped with fuel, lube oil, and intake air filters, lube
oil cooler, fuel transfer pump, fuel priming pump, engine driven water pump, and unit
mounted instruments, water temperature gauge, lubrication oil pressure gauge, and
battery charging ammeter.
1. Governor - A gear driven hydraulic governor shall maintain frequency
regulation not to exceed 3% (1.8 hertz) from no load to full rated load.
2. Mounting - The units shall be mounted on a structural steel sub-base and shall
be provided with suitable spring-type isolators on trailer platform.
3. Safety Devices - Safety shut-off for high water temperature, low oil
pressure, over-speed, and engine over-crank shall be provided.
4. Guards - Guards shall be provided over all exposed moving parts as required
by OSHA.
16190-2
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I.
I
I
I
I
B.
Generator:
1. The generator shall be rated for continuous stand-by service at 200 K W, 250
KV A at 0.8 power factor, 277/480 volts, three phase, four wire, 60 hertz,
1800 RPM.
2. The generator shall be a three phase, 60 hertz, single bearing, rotating field,
synchronou? type built to NEMA standards. A voltage regulator shall be
provided to match the characteristics of the generator and engine. Voltage
regulation shall be + - 2% from no load to full rated load. Readily accessible
voltage drop, voltage level and voltage gain controls shall be provided.
V oltage level adjustments shall be a minimum of + - 5%. Generator and
exciter shan be inherently capable of parallel operation with other power
sources of equivalent electrical characteristics, and stator shall include a
twelve lead; re-connectable buss bar system for easy load connection.
C.
Cooling System:
I. Radiator - A radiator with blower type fan shall be sized to maintain safe
operation 110 degrees F ambient temperature. Air flow restriction from the
radiator shall not exceed OS' HO.
2. The engine cooling system shall be pre-treated by the system supplier for the
inhibition of internal corrosion, and freezing.
D.
Fuel System:
1. An in-base fuel tank shall be supplied and installed by the manufacturer of the
power system.. . The tank capacity shall be 400 gallons. Tank shall be
constructed of" I" beams with a 3/16" floor plates and 1 0 gauge tank bottom.
Tank shall i;ncorporate 1/2" drain plugs on each end, 2" fill cap with locking
provisions, level indicator, supply pipe and return pipe. Tank shall have
access plate for mounting offuellevel alarm and tank inspections. Tank shall
be dual wall construction provided with leak detection.
2. Tank shall be mounted to the skids of engine generator and trailer platform.
Isolator pads shall be installed between pad and skid tank.
E.
Weather Pl'oof Housing and Exhaust Muft1er;
1. Housing shall consist of a weather proof enclosure to completely enclose the
engine generator ai1d accessories. Housing shall protect the engine generator
from the environment, yet be conductive to easy maintenance. I-lousing shall
have removable swing out doors on each side and lockable rear door for
access to meters and controls. Side doors shall have a means to pad lock.
I 61 90- 3
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Canstructian af hausing shall be af a minimum 14 gauge sheet steel and
painted manufacturers standard calar.
2. Exhaust muffler shall be maunted an tap af hausing. The exhaust muffler
shall be a critical grade muffler. Muffler shall be factary installed sa that its
weight isnat supparted by the engine. A flexible exhaust fitting shall be
supplied mid installed between the muftler and exhaust manifald. All
accessaries shall be factary installed. This includes t1anges, muftler, tail pipe
and rain cap.
F.
Autamatic Starting System:
1. Starting Motar - A DC electric starting system with pasitive engagement shall
be furnished. The matar valtage shall be as recammended by the engine
manufacturer.
2. Autamatic Cantral - fully autamatic generatar set start-stap cantrals in the
generatar contral panel shall be pravided. Cantrols shallpravide shutdawn
far law ail pressure, high water temperature, aver speed, aver crank.
Cantrols shall include a 30 secand single cranking cycle limit with lackaut.
3. Jacket Water Heater - A unit maunted thermal circulatian type water heater
incarparating a thermastatic switch shall be furnished to. maintain engine
jacket water to. 70 degrees F. the heater shall be 120 valt, single phase, 60
hertz. Provide pressure switch actuated by ail pressure to. shut dawn heater
when ail pressure reaches running pressure.
4. Battery Charging Alternatar - A belt driven battery charging alternatar rated
24 valts, 35 amp DC shall be pravided with transistarized valtage regulatar.
5. Batteries - A lead - acid starage battery set af the heavy duty diesel starting
type shall be pravided. Battery valtage shall be campatible with the starting
system. The battery set shall be rated no. less than 220 amp-haurs. Necessary
cables and clamps shall be pravided.
6. Battery Racks - Battery racks shall be pravided far each battery and shall
canfarm to. NEC 480 - 7 (a) (1). They shall be canstructed af metal and sa
treated as to. be resistant to. deteriarating actian by battery electralyte.
Further, canstructian shall be such that nancanducting insulatian material
directly supparts the cells.
7. Battery Charger - A current limiting battery charger shall be furnished to.
autamatically recharge batteries. Chargers shall flaat at 2.17 valts per cell.
It shall include averlaad protectian, silican diade full wave rectifiers, valtage
surge suppressar, DC ammeter, DC valt- meter, and fused AC input. AC
161 90-4
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
G.
I
I
I
I
I
I
input valtage shallbe 120 valts, single phase. Amperage autput shall be no.
less than 6 amperes.
8. Two. (2) - 20A, I20V, I-phase circuit with plug and card shall be pravided
and \-vired to. a receptacle an the engine generatar. One circuit serves the
battery charger, ane circuit serves the crankcase heater.
9. All wiring shall canfarm to. manufacturers writing diagrams and shall be
installed in a neat manner and in accardance with all ather sectians 0.1' the
speciticatian. Wiring shall be stranded and terminated in the bax type
terminals.
Generatar Cantral Panel:
1. Type - A generatar maunted NEMA 3R type vibratian isalated14 gauge steel
cantral panel shall be pravided. Panel shall cantain, but nat be limited to., the
fallawing equipment:
a. Frequency meter, 3 Y2 inch, dial type.
b. Valtmeter,3 Yz inch, 2% accuracy.
c. Ammeter, 3 Y2 inch, 2 % accuracy.
d. Ammeter - V altmeter phase selectar switch.
e. Autamatic starting cantrals as specified.
1'. V altage level adjustment rheastat.
g. Dry calitacts far remate alarm wired to. terminal strips.
h. Individual fault indicatar lights far law ail pressure, high water
temperature, aver speed, and aver crank.
1. Three pasitian functian switch marked, RUN-STOP and REMOTE.
J. Running time meter, ail pressure, battery charging ammeter, and water
temperature gauges.
H.
Main Line Circuit Breaker:
1.
Type A main line, malded case circuit breaker maunted upan and sized to. the
autput af the generatar shall be installed as a laad circuit interrupting and
protectian ,device. . It shall ape rate bath manually far narmal switching
functians and autamatically during averlaad and shart circuit canditians.
2.
The trip unit far each pale shall have elements praviding inverse time delay
during averlaad canditians and instantaneous magnetic tripping far shal1
circuit protectian. The circuit breaker shall meet standards established by
Underwriters Labarataries Natianal Electric Manufacturer's Assaciatian, and
Natianal Electrical Cade.
16190-5
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
1.7
I
I
I
I
I
I
1.
1.
1.8
Transient valtage surge protectian shall be pravided pratecting all law valtage circuits
serving the transfer, switch and the annunciatar. EDCO ar equal.
Engine Generatar Trailer
1. Maunt the engine/generatar, cantral panel, and cable an a suitable trailer
meeting ICC requirements far highway use.
2. The trailer shall have a 400-gallan fuel tank, electric brakes, ICC running
lights, ballcauple, swivel wheel suppart, fenders, and all appurtenances
necessary far highway performance. The weight distributian shall be balanced
sa that the tangue and ball caupler may be handled by ane persan and the
trailer may be pulled by a Y2-tan ar larger pickup truck.
MANUF ACTURING:
A.
The engine, including engine black, ail plan, and cylinder heads, generatar and all
majar items af auxiliary equipment shall be manufactured in the U. S. by
manufacturers currently engaged in the praductian af such equipment.
B.
The unit shall be shipped to. the jab site by the manufacturer's autharized dealer
having a parts and service facility within a 75 mile radius afthe iab site. In additian,
and in arder nat to. penalize the awner far unnecessary or prolanged periads aftime
far service ar repairs to. the emergency system, the bidding generatar set suppl ier must'
have no. less than eighty percent (80%) af all engine replacement parts in his stack
at all times. Certifiedproaf afthis requirement shall be available from the dealer and
a persanal inspectian afthe dealer's facilities shall be made by the designing engineer
ar his appainted representative to. substantiate claims made by the generatar set
supplier.
TESTING:
A.
Priar to. acceptance afthe installatian, equipment shall be tested to. shaw it is free af
any defects and will start autamatically and be subjected to. fulllaad test thraugh the
use af existing laads and, dry type laad banks supplied far this purpase at the jab site
by the generatar set supplier.
B.
Laad bank testing shall be done in the presence af the Owner's engineer ar his
appainted representative anly after the unit is permanently installed in accardance with
the plans and specificatians. If testing is campleted withaut benefit af Engineers
presence, testing shall be dane again in his presence. Testing shall be far a periad af
faur (4) haurs under fulllaad.
c.
Cantractar shall supply all fuel necessary far laad bank testing and shall befare tinal
acceptance af generatar unit tap afftank leaving it full.
161 90-6
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
1.9
1.10
I
I
I
I
I
I
A.
1.11
CERTIFICATE TEST REPORTS, MANUALS AND INSTRUCTIONS:
Priar to. the final inspecti<?n, deliver 4 capies afthe fallawing items to. the Engineer:
I . A certi ficate by the manufacturer afthe engine-generatar set that the aux i I iary
electrical pawer system has been praperly installed, adjusted and tested.
2. Certified capies af all afthe factary and canstructian site test data sheets and
reparts far the engine-generatar set and majar auxiliaries.
3. Camplete aperating and maintenance manuals far the engine-generatar set and
auxiliaries including wiring diagrams, technical data sheets and infarmatian
far ardering replaceable parts:
a. Include camplete intercannectian diagrams which indicate all
campanents af the system.
b. lndude camplete diagrams afthe internal wiring far each afthe items
af equipment.
c. The diagrams shall have their terminals identified to. facilitate
installatian, aperatian and maintenance.
B.
Laminate ar maunt under plexiglas a set af aperating instl'Uctians far the system and
install it under a neat frame, adjacent to. transfer switch.
c.
Furnish the services af a campetent, factary-trained engineer ar technician far
instructing aperating and maintenance persannel an the praper aperatian and
maintenance af the system at the time af testing.
SYSTEM SERVICE CONTRACT:
A.
The supplier afthestandby pawer system shall provide a capy af and make avai lable
to. the awner his standard service cantract which, at the awner's aptian. may be
accepted ar refused. This cantract will accampany any documents, drawings. catalag
cuts, specificatian sheets, wiring ar autline drawings, 'etc. Submitted far appraval to.
the designing engineer. The cantract shall be far the camplete pawer system.
WARRANTY:
A.
The camplete standby electrical system furnished under this Sectian shall be
guaranteed against defective parts and warkmanship under terms af the
manufacturer's and dealer's standard warranty. But, in no. event shall it be for a peri ad
afless than five (5:) years ar 3000 haurs from date affinal testing and acceptance af
1 6 1 90-7
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
1.12
. the system and shaU include labar, parts and travel time far necessary repairs at the
jab site. Warranty infarmatian shall be submitted alang with canstructian site test
data sheets. This infarinatian shall list starting and ending dates and who. is to. be
cantacted far warranty service.
MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT:
A. Wark under this sectian shall be paid far at the lump sum amaunt shawn in
the bid schedule for electrical.
16190-8
I
I
I
I
I
I
.1
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
SECTION 16220
CONSTRUCTION REVIEWS INSPECTION AND TESTING
1.1
GENERAL:
A. Camply with Divisian 1 - General Requirements.
1.2
CONSTRUCTION REVIEWS:
A. The Architect ar his representative shall abserve and review the installatian
af all electrical systems shawn an the drawings and as speci1'ied herein.
B. Before cavering ar cancealing any candllit belaw grade ar slab, in wall ar
abave ceiling, the cantractar shall nati1'y the Architect sa that he can review
the installatian.
1.3
CONTRACTOR'S FINAL INSPECTION:
A. At the timeafthe Cantractar's final inspectian, all systems shall be checked
and tested far proper installatian and aperatian by the Cantractar in the
presence af the Architect ar his representative.
B. The Cantractar shall furnish the persannel, taals and equipment required to.
inspect and test all systems.
C. Fallawingis a list af items that the cantractar must demanstrate to. the
Architect ar his representative as camplying with the plans and speciticatians.
Please nate that this list daes nat necessarily represent all items to. be covered
in the final inspectian, but shauld give the Cantractar an idea afwhat is to. be
reviewed.
1. Service graund, shaw cannectian to. grallnd rad and cald water main.
2. Demanstrate that main service equipment is properly banded.
3. Demanstrate that all panels have breakers as specified, graund bar,
capper bus, typed directary far circuit identificatian and that they are
free 0.1' trash.
4. Demanstrate that all canduits are supparted as required by the
Natianal Electrical Cade.
5. Del)1anstrate that all autlet baxes abave ar an the ceiling are
sllpparted as required by the Natianal Electrical Cade.
6. Demanstrate that autlet baxes in wall ar ceilings af cambustib1e
16220-1
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
materials are flush with surface af wall ar ceiling, and that autlet
baxes in walls or ceilings af nan-cambustible materials are sa installed
that the frant edge afthe bax ar plaster ring is nat set back mare than
1/4".
7. Demanstrate that autlet boxes in wall are secure.
8. Demanstrate that all devices are praperly secured to. baxes, that
device plates are properly aligned and are nat being used to. secure
device.
9. Utilizing a Waadhead No.. 1750 testing device. demanstrate that all
125 valt receptacles are properly cannected.
10. Demanstrate that all fixtures have speci1ied lamps, ballast and lens,
and that they are supparted as required by the NatianaI Electrical
Cade ar as called far an the drawings ar in the speciticatians.
II. Demanstrate that all discannects requiring fuses are fused with the
praper siZe and type, and that all discannects are properly identified.
12. Demanstrate that Engine Generatar Set is in praper warking arder
and meeting all requirements autlined in specificatian.
1.4
MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT:
A. Wark under this sectian shall be paid far at the lump sum,amaunt shawn in
the bid schedule far electrical.
16220-2
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
APPENDIX A
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
csra
TESTING AND ENGINEERING CO., INC.
1005 EMMETT STREET, SUITE A
AUGUSTA. GEORGIA 30904
(706) 733-6960
FAX (706) 737-0629
September 1, 1999
Augusta-Richmond County Ut~lities Dept.
2760 Peach Orchard Road
Augusta, Georgia 30906
Artn: Ms. Robin McMillon, P.E.
Re: Ground Storage Tank
Morgan Road
- Augusta, Georgia
(B-05699)
Dear Robin:
As requested, this fmnhas performed a subsurface exploration at the above
subject site. We are enclosing two (2) copies of the completed report. This report
describes the methods of exploration and presents the results of our tests.
If there are any changes in the plans or if we can be of further service, please do
not hesitate to contact us.
Sincerely,
cJ:=:P~ ~.E.
President
JMP/dq
cc: Cranston, Robertson & Whitehurst; Jim Cranford, P.E.
Member of American Society for Testing and Materials
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
INTRODUCTION
This report presents the fesults of a foundation exploration for a; new ground
storage tank and booster pump on Morgan road in Augusta, Georgia.
The purpose of this work was to evaluate the suitability of this site for the
proposed construction and to determine whether any extraordinary conditions could be
expected. In order to explore the subsurface soil conditions, test borings were made
to determine the character and composition of underlying soil strata and to defme the
soil profile within the areas of these borings. Samples of the soil were obtained from
the test borings for field and laboratory analyses to assess the engineering
characteristics of the foundatioIl materials and to provide criteria for use by the design
engineers and architects in preparing the foundation treatment and site development for
this project.
Page -1-
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
FIELD INVESTIGATION
The field exploration to determine the engineering characteristics of the
foundation materials included a ;reconnaissance of the project site, the making of the
boring, the performance of standard penetration tests and the recovery of disturbed split
spoon samples. The apparent ground water level was recorded in each boring after
completion.
A total of three (3) test borings numbered B-1 through B-3, and one (1) auger
borings, numbered B-4 have been made, and these, were drilled to depths shown on the
test boring records. The locations of these borings are shown on the attached Boring
Location Plan.
In the test borings, soil sampling was performed in accordance with ASTM D-
1586. The borings was made with continuous steel auger flights. At regular intervals,
standard penetration tests were conducted with a two inch (2") splittube sampler. The
sampler was fITst seated six inches (6") to penetrate any loose cuttings, then driven an
additional foot with blows of a 140 pound hammer falling thirty inches (30"). A record
was made of the number of hammer blows required to drive the sampler the fmalfoot.
This number is designated the penetration resistance and is an index of the soil strength
and density.
In the auger borings, samples from the augers were continuously monitored
during the drilling operation and the conditions reported on the field boring logs along
with any observed changes in soil consistency and drilling resistance.
Page -2-
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
SUBSURFACE CONDITIONS
Representative samples of the soils obtained by the standard penetration tests
were visually examined in the field and returned to our laboratory for further analysis.
In the laboratory, each sample was examined and classified by composition and texture
according to the Unified Soil Classification System.
The types of subsurface materials encountered in these test borings are described
on the accompanying test boring records. The results of our standard penetration tests
and water level observation at the time of this exploration are listed in numerical form
on the test boring records. The soil conditions described in the test boring records
represent our interpretation of the field boring logs, visual examination of the soil
samples, and comparison to typical samples from past explorations in this geophysical
regIOn.
Representative samples of the soil were placed in special sample jars and are
now stored in our laboratory if further analysis is desired. Unless we are notified
otherwise, all of the soil samples from this exploration will be disposed of after thirty
(30) days.
Page -3-
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
SITE CONDITIONS
This project is an undeveloped tract on Morgan Road near Tobacco Road in
Augusta, Georgia. The site is moderately wooded at present and appears to slope
downward slightly in a southwesterly direction. No unusual topographic features were
noted on the surface from our visual observations.
The subsurface condition~ underlying this site were found to consist of upper
loose to firm sands and clayey sands underlain by very stiff sandy clays and dense
sands. The results of our standard penetration tests show that there are rather low soil
bearing qualities in the uppermost layers with a significant increase in bearing value at
increasing depth.
Further discussions of soil bearing values and foundation treatment are given in
a following section of this report.
Page -4-
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
WATER LEVEL OBSERVATIONS
Water level observations were made during the boring operations and are noted
on the test boring records for each of the respective test boring locations.' In relatively
pervious or sandy soils; the indicated levels are considered reliable ground water
elevations. In relatively impervious soils, the accurate determination of the ground
water elevation may not be possible even after several days of observation. Seasonal
variations may influence the levels of the ground water table and volumes of water will
depend on the permeability ofthe upper soils. If deep excavations or pits are planned,
additional long-term studies of the ground water table would be advisable. This can
be done with the installation of piezometers or perforated casings which extend below
the bottom of proposed excavations.
<:1
No ground water was encountered in these borings to the depths drilled at the
time of this exploration.
Page -5-
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
DISCUSSION
Based upon the results of conditions encountered in these test borings, it is our
opinion that this site can be developed for the use of shallow foundations with proper
design and construction procedures. Our recommendations to accomplish this work are
described below.
1. Initially, the site should be stripped of all topsoil, vegetation, and root mat.
2. The underlying two feet (2') ofloose sand should be removed from an area
extending five feet (5') outside of the planned foundation line.
3. The underlying surface should then be densified by vibratory compaction
to a minimum density equal to 95% of Standard Proctor Val~e.
4. All fill required to level or raise the site should be placed in thin six inch
(6") layers with each lift compacted to 95% of Standard Proctor Value. All
of the loose sands previously removed which are free from organic material
can be reused as leveling fill.
5. With this degree of compaction, a maximum net uniform soil pressure of
2,000 psf can be used for footings placed within the densely compacted
soils.
6. Since these granular soils are easily disturbed by construction activity, care
should be taken to assure that all densified areas are reworked and
recompacted to the required density.
When fmal construction plans are complete, we will be available for further
consultation on these soils upon request.
Page -6-
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Our recommendations are based upon conditions which were enco'untered in the
individual test borings and it is possible that some variations may occur in
uninvestigated areas. We should be notified in the event that any unusual soils are
encountered during construction so that proper consideration can be given: to these
conditions.
Page -7-
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
II
\1
II
~
~
~
. . ....
,
I
I
\
I
I
\
. I
\
: I
\
I
II
1\
I
\
S \
\
0 I
'JJ
G)
~
N/F AUGUSTA :- - -
-.c BOARD OF- RICHMOND CO
--')<'-'- _)(__ EDUCATION .
y- 7<,-
--x__
'JJ
0
J>
0
\
CP
0_
'JJ
"-
~ . I
..
;
..
csra
BORING LOCATION PLAN JOB NO, DESIGNEC 31
8-05699
MORGAN ROAD GROUND STffiAGE TK. SCALE O;::l:AWN a.~
N.T.S. J,C.P.
= CHECKED 31
OATE
AUGUSTA, RIQ-lMOND CO., GEORGIA 8/31/99 J.M.P.
TESTING & ENGINEERING CO., INC.
1005 EMMETT STREET. SUITE A . AUGUST A. GEORGIA 30904 . (7061 733,6960
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
N Value is number of blows of 140 pound
I hammer required to drive 2" split-tube
sampler one foot after seated.
I
I
IROJECT
csra
TESTING & ENGINEERING CO", INC.
AUGUSTA, GEORGIA 30904 (706) 733-6960
(FAX) 737-0629
1005 EMMETT STREET. SUITE A
Ground Storaqe Tank
BORING NO.
B-1
Morgan Road, Augusta, GA
August 18, 1999
DATE
VISUAL SOIL
DESCRIPTION
PENETRATION
VALUE (N)
UNIFIED
CLASS.
PERCENT
MOISTURE
,
Loose, Bro~TI, Fine Silty Sand
Loose, Reddish-Tan, Fine Clayey Sand
8 @ 21
28 @ 41
5'
Very Stiff, Reddish-Bro~TI, Fine Sandy Clay
29 @,71
Dense, Reddish-Tan, Fine ciayey Sand
28 @91
10'
Dense, Tan, Fine to Medium Sand
24 @ 141
Boring Terminated at 15 feet.
20'
25'
30'
35'
40'
None
WATER TABLE
I
I
10'
csra
TESTING & ENGINEERING CO., INC.
AUGUSTA, GEORGIA 30904 (706) 733-6960
(FAX) 737-0629
1005 EMMETT STREET, SUITE A
Ground Storage Tank
BORING NO.
Morgan Road, Augsuta, GA
DATE
VISUAL SOIL
DESCRIPTION
PENETRATlaN
VALUE (N)
Loose, Bro\\Tl, Fine Silty Sand
5'
Loose to Firm, Reddish-Bro\\Tl, Fine Clayey
Sand
6 @ 3'
11 @ 4'
25 @ 7'
Dense, Reddish-Tan, Fine Clayey Sand
23 @ 91
Firm, Tan and White, Fine Sand
10 @ 14'
Boring Terminated at 15 feet.
20'
25'
30'
35'
40'
None
N Value is number of blows of 140 pound
hammer required to drive 2" split-tube
sampl.er one foot after seated.
B-2
August 18, 1999
UNIFIED
CLASS.
WATER TABLE
PERCENT
MOISTURE
I
I
csra
TESTING & ENGINEERING CO., INC.
AUGUSTA, GEORGIA 30904 (706) 733-6960
(FAX) 737-0629
1005 EMMETT STREET, SUITE A
IROIECT Ground Storage Tank
LOCATION Morqan Road, Auqusta, GA;
BORING NO.
B-3
DATE August 18. 1999
VISUAL SOIL
DESCRIPTION
,PENETRATION
VALUE. (N)
UNIFIED
CLASS.
PERCENT
MOISTURE.
Loose, Bro....n, Fine Silt Sand
Firm, Reddish-Tan, Fine Clayey Sand
10 @ 2'
25 @ 4'
5'
I
I 10'
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
N Value is number of blows of 140 pound
I hammer required to drive 2" split-tube
sampler one foot after seated.
Very Stiff, Reddish-Bro....n, Fine Sandy Clay
29 @ 7'
24 @ 9'
Firm, Tan and White, Fine Sand
10 @ 14'
Boring Terminated at 15 feet.
20'
25'
30'
35'
40'
None
-===- WATER TABLE
I
I
csra
TESTING & ENGINEERING CO., INC.
AUGUSTA, GEORGIA 30904 (706) 733-6960
(FAX) 737-06,29
1005 EMMETT STREET, SUITE A
BORING NO.
8-4
IROJECT Ground Storage Tank
LOCATION Morgan Road, Augsuta, GA
DATE August 19, 1999
VISUAL SOIL
DESCRIPTION
PENETRATlaN
VALUE (N)
UNIFIED
CLASS.
PERCENT
MOISTURE
Loose, Bro\\Tl, Fine Sand
Loose, Tan, Fine Sand
5'
Stiff, Reddish-8ro\\Tl, Fine Sandy Clay
Boring Terminated at 6 feet.
10'
15'
20'
25'
30'
35'
I 40' ,
N Value is number of blows of 140 pound
I ha(Tlmer required to drive 2" split-tube
sampler one foot after seated.
None'
-===- WATER TABLE
..,\
~_., ~.~.
J'
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
-I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
1
~~~tiwt~
DEe '6 \999
de S. HAREN ~0i'.j\?Al\\Y